THE GEOLOGY AND MINERALIZATION OF

THE AD-DAV/ALHI DISTRICT OF SAUDI ARABIA

by

Ahmed M.S. A1 Shanti

A Thesis submitted for the degree of

Doctor of Philosophy in the University
of London.

Mining Geology Division,

Royal School of Mines,
Imperial College of Science and Technology,
University of London,
LONDON.

May, 1973.
 ABSTRACT

This district in the high* pediment of central Saudi Arabia con-

tains a complex of Precambrian granitic rocks together with two oval
layered basic complexes and two belts of folded metasediments.
Economic interest centres on sulphide mineralization in the metasedi-
ments, and on numerous vein deposits which formed an ancient silver-
mining industry and which are emplaced in parts of an extensive
fracture belt trending N-S across the district.

The oldest rocks are the conformable arenaceous and calcareous

Ar-Ridaniyah, and the semi-pelitic Abt Formations, which were deposited
during Precambrian in a transgressive subsiding probably marine
environment. An ultrabasic and basic suite of rocks were intruded prior
to deformation and metamorphism to greenschist facies. Two layered
masses were later intruded, the detailed studies on Al-Jealani intrusion
indicated an inverted cone-shaped mass formed from a basaltic melt in
possibly one surge of magma in an elliptical structure forming layered
gabbroic rocks with persistent dominant plagioclase. The pyroxene
rich units were strongly amphibolitized. Layering originated through
undercooling combined with convection currents in the magma. Investi-
gations up to date show that these complexes are barren of minerali-
zation. A multicycle history of granite intrusions took place after
the emplacement of the layered masses. Three separate types are
recognised, differentiated in time from more calcic to less calcic from
an average calc-alkaline magma.

The fracture-controlled bydrothermal zinc-lead-silver minerali-

zation is one of two main genetic types in the district. . In the vein-
type, the metals initially present in a N-S trending belt of pre-
existing sedimentary rocks are thought to have been mobilized, concentr-
ated and deposited by the medium of hydrothermal fluids related to
post-kinematic granitic activity during the last orogenic episode. The
ore minerals within the fractures are sphalerite, galena, native silver,
silver sulphosalts and sulphides. The other genetic type is iron-zinc
sulphide deposit in the form of metamorphosed and structurally
disrupted stratabound lenses within the calcareous horizon of the
Ar-Ridaniyah Formation. The principal minerals are pyrrhotite and
sphalerite, and the mineralization is interpreted as metamorphosed
syngenetic-diagenetic in a sedimentary calcareous environment.
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The writer expresses his gratitude for Sheikh A.Z. Yamani,

Dr. F.K. Kabbani and Mr. G.H. Sultan for the opportunity and support
they have given to undertake this research study.

Special thanks are due to Professor G.R. Davis who suggested,

encouraged and with Dr. W. Skiba supervised this research; stimulating
discussions and advice were forthcoming from both. Cordial thanks
are offered to Dr. C. Halls, Mr. H. Toms, Dr. C. Gilboy and Mr. J. Moore
who offered invaluable suggestions during this study.

Discussions and stimulating suggestions have improved the thesis,

in particular Mr. L. Hamilton, Dr. Ambrayses, Mr. J. Huntington and
other research student colleagues. Mr. G. Steed and Mr. N. Wilkinson
kindly conducted the electron probe analyses of the ore minerals.
Mr. M. Jambi, Mr. S. Farouki and Mr. M. Furati kindly assisted the
writer in the chemical and spectrographic analyses done in the DGMR
laboratory. Mr. R. Irshad and Mr. A. Afendi helped in the drafting of
the maps and diagrams.

The technical staff of the Department of Geology in Imperial

College helped considerably, notably Mr. A. Thompson, Mr. R. Curtis,
Mr. B. Foster and Mr. J. Gee.
 GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

The underlined terms are those used in this thesis.

Geographic names:

Jabal Hill or mountain

Wadi Valley, stream

Towns:

Jeddah, Jiddah Jidda, Djedda

Ad-Dawadmi Ad Dawadami, Dawadmi
Arjah, Arja
Urn Ergaba Urn Ergabah, Uram Ergaba
Saffaga Saffagah
Al-Jealani Harrat Jaelani
Al-Kufairah Hufayra, Hufairah
Ar-Ridaniyah Ardaniyah

Organisations:

D,G,M.R. Directorate General of Mineral Resources

U.S.G,S. United States Geological Survey
B.R.G.M. Bureau de Recherches Geologiques et Minieres
Argas Arabian geophysical and surveying company -

Miscellaneous:

E.P.M,A. Electron probe microanalyser

DH Drill hole
P.L. Initials of French assistant geologist P. Laloux (used
in numbering the ancient prospects)
G.V. Initials of the French geologist G. Vincent (used in
numbering the ancient prospects)
S.P. Self-potential geophysical survey method
E.M, Electronmagnctic geophysical survey method

4LH micron
cm centimetre
m,, mr, metre
X angstrom units (10 cm.)
wt.% = weight %
a.t.% = atomic %
2V The optic axial angle
1 temperature
P pressure
 CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION
Page No,
1.1 LOCATION AND ACCESSIBILITY 18

1.2 GEOLOGICAL SETTING 18

1.3 PURPOSE OF STUDY 26

l.k CLIMATE, VEGETATION AND POPULATION 26

1.3 PHYSIOGRAPHY 27

1.6 MINERALIZATION 27

1.7 GEOLOGICAL MAPPING 28

1.8 PREVIOUS WORK 29

CHAPTER 2

THE METASEDIMENTARY FORMATIONS

2.1 INTRODUCTION 31

2.2 AR-RIDANIYAH FORMATION 33

2.2.1 Quartzofeldspathic gneiss ... 33

2.2.2 Quartzofeldspathic schist ... 35

2.2.3 Calcareous schist ... 35

2.2.3a Impure marble ..• 36

2.2.3b Tremolite schist ... 36

2.2.3c Actinolite schist ... 36

 Page No,

2.2.3d Tremolite-epidote-quartz schist ... 37

2.2.3e Epidote-tremolite-albite schist ... 37

2.2.3f Actinolite-epidote-albite-quartz schist 37

2.2.3g Quartz-actinolite schist ... 38

2.2.3h Calc.-quartz-albite-clinozoisite-actinolite schist 38

2.2.3i Quartz-chlorite-sericite schist ... 38

2.2.3j Epidote-albite-calcite schist ... 38

2.2.4- Summary ••• • •• 38

2.3 ABT - FORMATION ... ... 39

2.3.1 Quartz-sericite-chlorite schist ... 40

2.3.2 Quartz-sericite schist ... ... 4l

2.3.3 Quartz-biotite-albite schist ... 4-1

2.3.4- Arkosic quartzite ... ... 4-2

2.3.5 Summary ... ••• 4-2

2.4- PRE-KIN1MATIC INTRUSIVES ... ... 4-7

2.4-.1 Ultramafic rocks ... ... 4-7

2.4-.la Serpentinite ••• ••• 4-9

2.4-.lb Chlorite schist and chloritite 4-9

2.4-.lc Talc ... •••

2.4-.Id Carbonates ... ••• 50

2.4-.le Tremolite rock ... ... 50

2.4-.If Meta-quartz-diorite ... ... 50

2.4-.lg Rhyolite-Rhyodacite ... ... 31

2.4-.lh • Dacite ... ••• 51

 Page No,

2.5 SYN-KEIEILiTIC MINOR INTRUSIVES 51

2.5*1 Porphyritic microadamellite sills ... 51

2.6 POST-KEOTATIC 52

2.6.1 Porphyritic pink rhyolite dykes ... 52

2.7 METAMORPHISM 52
2.7.1 Regional metamorphism ... ... 52

2.7*2 Contact metamorphism •*• ... 55

2.8 STRUCTURE 55.

2.8.1 Introduction and regional structural setting 55
2.8.2 Folding ... ... 56
2.8.3 Fractures 60

2.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 61

CHAPTER 3
AR-RIDANIYAH MINERALIZATION

3.1 INTRODUCTION ... ... 63

3.2 THE GOSSAN ... ... 63

3.3 SULPHIDE MINERALS ... ... 68

3.3.I Pyrrhotite ••• ••• 68

3.3.1a Fabric ... * ... 68

3.3.1b- Intergranular textures and structures revealed
by etching ... ...
3.3.1c X-ray diffraction ... ... 75
3.3.Id Mode of formation of pyrrhotite ... 77
3.3*2 Sphalerite ... ...

3«3*2a Fabric ... •••

3.3.2b Exsolution in sphalerite ... ...

3.3.2c Relationships of pyrrhotite-sphalerite

3.3.2d Possible conclusions to be drawn from the

FcS-ZrS-FeS phase relations and the chemical
composition "of the sphalerites. ...
3.3.3 Pyrite ... ••*
3-3*4 Chalcopyrite ... ...

3.3.5 Marcasite ••• • ••

3.3*6 Galena ... •••

3.3.7 Stannite ... ...

3.3*8 Arsenopyrite ••* •••

OXIDE MINERALS

3.4.1 Hematite and goethite ... ...

3-4.2 Cassiterite ... ...

SILVER MINERALS

JABAL HUMAYYAN

3.6.1 Geologic setting ... ...

3.6.2 Composition and texture of siliceous lenses

3.6.3 Geophysical investigation ... ...

3.6.4 Geochemical investigations ... ...

SUMMARY

3.7.1 Ar-Ridaniyah. mineralization ... ...

3.7.2 Jabal Ilumayyan mineralization ...

CONCLUSIONS ...
 CHAPTER 4

LAYERED BASIC EXTRUSIONS

Fage No.

4.1 EXTRODUCTION ... ... 103

4.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF INVESTIGATIONS ... 103

4.3 AL-JEALANI EITRUSIONS ... ... 1C4

4.3.1 Structure arid topography ... ... 1C-4-

4-.3.2 Previous work ... ... 10 4

4.3.3 Airborne magnetic and radiometric survey 107

4.3.4 Nomenclature and sequence ... ... 107

4.3.5 Field characteristics ... ... 1C8.

4.3.6 Mineralogy ... ... Il4 .

3.6.1 Major constituents ... ... 114

3.6.2 Accessories ... ... 116

3.6.3 Magnetic and related minerals .... 121

3.6.4 Sulphides ... ... 124

4.3.7 Textures ... ... 127

3.7.1 General textural characters ... 127

3.7.2 Textures of orthocumulates ... 127

3.7.3 Textures of adcumulates ... ... 13I

3.7.4 Textures of amphibolitised cumulates/- ... 132

3.7.4a Types of amphibole grains ... 132

3.7.4b Grain boundaries ... ... 133

3.7.4c Two stages of amphibolitisation - ... 133

4.3.8 Petrography of the principal rock types ' 13.4

3.8.1 Modal data ... ... 134

3.8.2 Amphibolitised plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates

(amphibolitised gabbro) ... ... 1J»4
 Page No,

3.8.3 Plagioclase-olivine cumulates (troctolites) 135

3.8.4 Plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine cumulates (olivine-

leuconorite) ••• ••• 136

3.8.3 Plagioclase-orthopyroxene cumulate (norites) 137

3.8.6 Plagioclase cumulates (anorthosites) ... 138

4-.3.9 The characters of individual units of the intrusion 139

*f.3.10 Geochemistry ... ... 15?-

3.10.1 Whole rock analyses ... ... 151

3.10.2 Strontium in plagioclase ... ... 132

3.10.2a Introduction ... ... 152

3.10.2b Strontium in plagioclase from Al-Jealani
intrusion ... ••• 154

3.10.2c Strontium in plagioclase from xenoliths I56

3.10.2d Summary and conclusions ... 160

3.10.3 Variation of the trace elements ... 162

3.10.3a Introduction
162
3.10.3b Nickel
163
3.10.3c Cobalt
166
3.10.3d Barium
• ... 166
3.10.3® Zirconium
167
3.10.3? Copper
167
3.10.3s Vanadium
168
3.10.3b Chromium
169
3.10.31 Summary and conclusions
169

4.4 ARJA LAYERED BASIC INTRUSION ... - ... 176

4.5 GENERAL SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS ... ... 177

 Page No,

4.5.1 The primary features of the intrusion ... 17&

4.5.1a Shape ••• •••

178
f

178
xr
4.5.1b Contacts ••• •••
4.5.1c Synopsis of petrography and textures ... 17$
T78
4.5.Id Layering • •• •••
4.5.1 e Variations "in mineral composition ... 179

4.5.2 The metamorphic features ... ... 179

1
4.5.2a Grade of metamorphisra ... ••• 79
3
4.5.2b Mineralogical changes ... ... -'79

4.5.2c Features of araphibolitisation ... 18°

180
4.5.3 Geochemical considerations
180
4.5.3a Original composition ... •••
1so
4.5.3b Sr-An ratio in plagioclase ...
180
4.5.3c Minor elements ... •••
4.5.3d Relationships of the Zn-Pb-Ag vein mineralization
and the layered masses ... ... 1°

181
4.6 DISCUSSION

CHAPTER 5
GRANITES

183
5.1 INTRODUCTION
*

18*
5.2 THE METASEDIMENTARY ENVELOPE

185
5.3 THE GRANITIC BATHOLITH

5.3.1 The major units of the batholith ...

5.3.2 Petrography and internal variation ...

5.3.3 The relict masses of amphibolitized gabbro and
metadiorite ••• ••• '7
 Page No,

5.3.4 Relict masses of the pelitic'and semi-pelitic rocks 183

5.4 CLASSIFICATION ... ... 188

5.4.1 The synkinematic granitic rocks ... 189

4.1.1 The Sidriyah quartz - monzono-diorite 189

4.1.2 The Sidriyah granodiorite ... 192

4.1.3 The Ar-Rida'ihah adamellite ... 193

4.1.3a Field characteristics ... ... 193

4.1.3b Petrography ... ... 194

4.1.3c History of crystallization ... 198

4.1.4 Summary ... ... 198

5.4.2 The late-kinematic granitic rock (the Al-Ilasloukhah

adamellite) ... ... 199
4.2.1 Field characteristics ... ... 199

4.2.2 Petrography ... ... 200

4.2.3 History of crystallization ... 201

4.2.4 Summary ... ... 2CI

3.4.3 The post-kinematic granitic rocks ... '202

4.3.1 The Al-Hadbah adamellite ... 202

4.3.2 The coarse grained pink granite ... 203

4.3.3 Summary ... ... 203

5.5 MINOR INTRUSIONS 2.06

5.5.1 Pregranite intrusions 2:06

'5.1.1 Microdiorite dykes 206

5.5.2 Post granite intrusions 2.06

5.2.1 Aplite and pegmatite 2:06

5.2.2 Granitic dykes 207

5.2.3 Dacite, microdiorite, quartz-microdiorite

and rhyolite dykes ... ... 208
 Page No,

5.6 GEOCHEMISTRY AND 1-IODAL VARIATION OF THE GRANITIC ROCKS 209

5.6.1 Modal variation ... ... 209

5.6.2 Normative and chemical variation ... 209

6.2.1 Introduction ... ... 209

6.2.2 The synkinematic granitic-rocks ... 213

6.2.3 The late-kinematic granitic rocks ... 221

6.2.4 The post-kinematic granitic rocks ... 221

5.7 GENERAL DISCUSSIONS AND CONCLUSIONS 221

CHAPTER 6
FRACTURES AND JOINTS

6.1 INTRODUCTION * ..." ... 223

6.2 GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF THE FRACTURE SYSTEM 223

6.3 FIRST ORDER WRENCH FAULTING ... ..." 223

6.4 SECOND ORDER FAULTING 225

6.4.1 Shears ... ... 225

6.4.2 Extension fractures ... ... 225

6.4.3 Considerations of fracture analysis implications 227

6.4.4 Comparison with theoretical models ... 229

6.4.5 Relationships of joints and the second order

fractures ... ••• 23X

6.5 STRESS TRAJECTORIES 231

6.5.1 Principal stresses ... ••• .231

6.5.2 Construction of stress trajectory in Ad-Dawadmi

District ••• ••• 23
 Page No,

6.6 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN FIRST AND SECOND ORDER FRACTURES 238

6.7 RELATIONSHIPS BETi/EEN FAULTS OF THE SECOND ORDER AND

DYKES ... ... 239

6.8 RELATIONSHIPS OF VEIN ORE DEPOSITS TO SECOND ORDER FRACTURES 241

6.9 SCALE FACTOR 241

6.10 CONCLUSIONS 243

CHAPTER 7
VEIN-TYPE MINERALIZATION IN GRANITE

7.1 INTRODUCTION 245

7.2 HISTORY OF MINING . 246

7.3 PREVIOUS WORK 246

7.4 PRESENT WORK 247

7.5 GEOLOGICAL SETTING 248

7.6 THE MINERALIZED SITES 251

7.6.1 Samrah Mine 252

6.1.1 Lithology and structure 252

6.1.2 Ancient Workings 25^

6.1.3 Geophysical survey 25^

.6.1.4 Gcochemical survey 25*

6.1.5 E::ploration drilling 255

6.1.6 Mineralogy 255

1.6.1 Silver minerals 255

1.6.1a Polybasite 261

 Page IIo

1.6.1b Pyrargyrite ... • • • 272

1.6.1c Tetrahedrite ... ... 275

1.6.Id Acanthite ... ... 274

l.o.le Stromyerite ...

• • • 277

1.6.If Native silver ... ... 278

1.6.2 Sphalerite ... ... 278

1.6.3 Galena ... 0. . 285

1.6.4 Chalcopyrite ... ... 285

1.6.5 Pyrite ... ... 256

1.6.6 Arsenopyrite ... . . . 287

1.6.7 Magnetite ... ... 287

1.6.8 Hematite ... ... 2'89

6.1.7 Phase relations between iron oxides and the

associated iron sulphides ... 2p9

6.1.8 Ore reserve estimation »•• 294

'7.6.2 Materah mine (GV-19) ••• •••

7.6.3 Sumairah mine (PL-98) ... ••• * 297

7.6.4 PL-44 mine 299

7.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS ... ••• 299

CHAPTER 8

CONCLUSIONS

8.1 OROGENESIS ... ••• 303

8.2 THE METAMORPHIC SUCCESSIONS ... ••• 304

8.2.1 The Ar-Ridaniyah Formation ... 304

8.2.2 The Abt Formation ••• ••• 3°4

8.2.3 The ultrabasic suite ... ••• 30^

 8.2.4 The deformation and metamorphism

8.3 LAYERED EXTRUSIONS

8.4 GRANITIC ROCKS

8.5 SYNSEDBIENTARY MINERALIZATION

8.6 HYDROTHERMAL VEIN-TYPE MEXERALIZATION

REFERENCES

APPENDIX 1

APPENDIX 2

APPENDIX 3
 CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 LOCATION AND ACCESSIBILITY

Ad-Dawadmi district which is the subject of this geological

research lies some ?60 kilometres east north-east of Jeddah town,
and some 320 kilometres west south-west of the capital, Ar-Riyad
(fig. 1-1), on the asphalt road that connects these towns. The
district is situated at the extreme east-central border of the
Arabian Shield with the unconformably overlying Palaeozoic sediments.
The area concerned covers about 2426 square kilometres and lies
partly on aerial mosaic 98 and partly on 101. Ad-Dawadmi tov/n is
situated approximately in the middle of the district. A few other
villages are also present in the district, namely: Arja, Musiddah,
Ismairah, Hamrur, Saffagah and Al-Hufairah. The district lies
between latitudes 24°19» and 24°45! north,, and longitudes 44°13»
18," and 44043 » 8" east (fig. 1-2).

The district is accessible for field cars.

1.2 GEOLOGICAL SETTING

Bramkamp et al. (1963) considered the Ad-Dawadmi district, which

is studied in detail in this thesis, to contain four main geologic
units (fig. 1-3)*

However, the geological setting is summarized on the basis of

this study to be as follows :

A granitic batholith makes up over 80% of the district and con-

stitute three granitic varieties, the earlier variety is hetero-
geneous and is greatly enriched with xenoliths. Two layered basic
intrusions occur in the district, a southern one Al Je'alani covering
2 2
an area of about 50 Kin and a northern, Arja covering 9 Km , (fig.
1-4), both are oval in shape and contain inwardly dipping igneous
layers. In the north and in the south east, metamorphic sedimentary
 0 200 400kri
i i »

Fig: 1 - 1

ARABIAN PENINSULA
39? 42° 45°

LOCATION OF THE DISTRICT

 21.

CAINOZOIC
Ou Sand, silt and gravel Amphibolite (Layered basic intrusion)

PALAEOZOIC
SC: Sericite and chlorite schist
g g Khuff imestone

Saq sandstone Dykes of rhyolite, diabase and

andesite
PRECAMBRIAN

gn Gneissic granite

Figr|-3 General Geology of the Area (Bramkamp et el., 1963)

Scale 1:500,000
 22.

GEOLOGICAL M A P OF T H E A D DAWADMI DISTRICT

Approximate Scale 250,000

LEGEND
Cainozoic
[7L<] Alluvium iv 50: Layered basic intrusion

Palaeozoic LJSc Abt Formation

1
j. Oss. J Sediments
i®5c j Ar-Ridaniya Formation
Precambrian
+ gp + Post - k i n e m a t i c granite Fault indicated and i n f e r r e d
Shear zones
v
y j Late - kinematic granite Strike and dip of strata
Dip of layering
Syn - k i n e m a t i c granite
Geological contact, indicated and inferred
Et Town
successions occur, these are unconformably overlain in the east by
Ordovician sandstone.

A well developed fracture pattern characterises the district

where swarms of dykes and zinc-lead-silver veins have been intruded.

The sequence of geological events started by the deposition of

sediments in a transgressing probably marine basin, intruded during
a long time span by ultrabasic, basic and extensive granitic intrusions.
The district was affected by two principal orogenies, the multicyclic
Hejaz oxogeny (1000 - 660 m.y.B.P.) and Najd Orogeny (660 - 570 m.y.B.P.)
Brown et al. (1972).

The metasediments and the early basic and ultrabasic intrusions

suffered during the Hejaz orogeny deformation, folding and metamorphism
to the greenschist grade.

Theraetasedimentsbelong to two conformable Formations, the lower

Ar-Ridaniyah, which constitute a quartzo-feldspathie unit at the base
and an overlying Abt, which is essentially pelitic and semi-pelitic.
The several phases of granitic intrusions which formed the present
batholith, v/ere preceded by successive intrusions of ultrabasic and
basic rocks now represented by lenses, xenoliths^hybrid rocks and by
the later elliptical layered basic masses.

The regional stratigraphy and the suggested tectonic history for

the district are represented on page 25 and in fig. 1-5.

The emplacement of the early synkinematic granitic rocks, which

are foliated heterogeneous and porphyritic, was followed by the em-
placement of the homogeneous late-kinematic type at the waning stages
of the multicyclic Hejaz orogeny.

The Najd orogency, on the other hand, which is less widespread

followed the Hejaz orogency to produce the important Najd wrench fault
system (fig. 6-1), Brown (1971). According to Brown, this orogeny is
probably the continuation of the same east-west compressive forces of
the Hejaz orogeny. The Najd orogeny is represented in the district
 PRECAMBRIAN LATE PRECAMBRIAN PALAEOZOIC HOLOCENE

Sedimentation Metamorphism Deformation

S| ) Ar-Ridaniyah formation, Abt formation M 1) Burial 0 1) Bedding Sq
5 2 ) Palaeozoic sediments M2) Kibaran orogeny D2) Schistosity S
5 3 ) Alluvial deposit M 3) Hijaz orogeny
M 4 ) Najd orogeny 0 ) Folding
D4) Jointing (S +Sg )
3
Igneous activity Mineralization &
Faulting (S + S )
2
G1 ) Ultramafics Z 1 ) Synsedimentay 4 5
G2) Layered gabbros
G3) Syn-kinematic granitic rocks
Z 2) Hydrothermal - 1
Z 3) Hydrothermal-2 fig: 1-5
G4) Early post-kinematic granitic rocks Z 4) Gossan
G 5 ) Late post-kinematic granitic rocks
 25.
Regional stratigraphy and suggested tectonic history for

Ad-Dawadmi District

Tectonic Depositional
System Depositional rock App. episode Plutonic Rocks Tectonic units in
units in thickness and in Ad-Dawadmi episode other areas
Ad-Dawadmi in meters duration district (African) of Arabian
(Arabian) Shield

o Unconsolidated
•H 0-20
O sediments
N
8
•H
O U n c o n f o r m i t y

O
•H Ordovician Saq
o 200
N Sandstone
a>
o
3
2
pq A n g u 1 a r u n c o n f o r m i t y

NAJD Post-kinematic Pan African

OROGENY granite tectonothermal
660-570 m.y. event
Shearing,
fracturing

N o n c o n f o r m i t y

Halaban,
Group
HEJAZ Lat e-kinemat i c Katanga
OROGENY adamellite, Syn- Orogeny
1000-660 m.y. kinematic gran-
B.P. itic rocks.
Metamorphism
and folding

p Abt Formation Over 3Km Layered gabbro,

3 Ultrabasic rocks
•H
fH
Ar-Ridaniyah "KIBARAN" Kibaran Bahah
Formation
3-5 Kin Orogeny Orogeny Group
E
3 (culminated north-east
O at 1000 m.y.
I
<D
Old basement, not
hi represented.
by the emplacement of post-kinematic granitic intrusions (570
m.y.B.P.), northwesterly sinistial v/rench faults and secondary
extensive fracturing and subsequent dyke intrusion.

The secondary fractures in the district were partly emplaced

by zinc-lead-silver veins.

This vein-mineralization is related to the post-Kinematic

granitic intrusions where the residual magmatic hydrothermal sol-
utions leached out metals from the pre-existing rocks within the
granitic batholith and deposited them along the developed fractures.
Subsequent to this, deposition, reactivation of movements along these
fractures caused shearing, brecciation, mobilization and recrystal-
lization of these ore deposits.

1.3 PURPOSE OF STUDY

The object of this research has been to study the geology of

the area in order to formulate an understanding of its mineral poten-
tial. The field work was carried out during two winter seasons for a
total period of seven months.
The granitic rocks and their relationships with the pre-existing
country rocks was established. The geology and petrology of the Al-
Je'alani layered basic intrusion has been studied. The two metamorphic
belts, Ar-Ridaniyah and Abt were mapped and duly investigated. The
structure, the metamorphism, the nature of mineralization and its con-
trols were studied.

1.4 CLIMATE, VEGETATION AND POPULATION

The district has a typical arid dry climate. Humidity is usually

low. There are considerable diurnal and seasonal temperature variations
from 0° - 23°C in winter and from 25° - 45°C in the summer. The annual
rainfall of about 6 cm falls in a few stormy showers which cause flash
floods in winter. The vegetation is scarce, represented only by scat-
tered palm gardens around the villages behind artificial dykes at edges
of wadis.
 Water for irrigation and drinking is pumped from drilled or hand
dug wells in wadis.

The population in the whole district makes up about 6000 people

dwelling in the villages. Moving Bedu families live away from the
villages rearing live-stock.

1.5 PHYSIOGRAPHY

Ad-Dawadmi district is part of Najd. The name applies to the

vast plateau which slopes gently eastwards from the Eejaz escarpment
at 1500 m above sea level. The district is part of a wide peneplain
superimposed on a granitic batholith. The relief is predominantly low
and the drainage system is poorly developed. A thin cover of sand,
silt and gravel partly covers this plain.

The north-eastern area is drained by wadi Tasrhir, into which the

wadis of Sidriyah and Dhaf flow. Wadi Tasrhir flows eastwards crossing
the Khuff limestone escarpment. The: north-west and northern areas of
the district are drained by both wadis Arja and Mussiddah, which join
and flow west-north-west to join a northerly flowing wadi which joins
Wadi Ar-Risha.

Isolated individual hills of exfoliated granitic rocks, and ridges,

20 - 100 m high serve as landmarks. In the south-v/est, an elliptical
layered basic intrusion occurs with characteristic circular or curved
ridges rising locally to about 70 m. In the southeast, a series of
northerly trending elongated ridges 20^ m high occur underlain by
raetamorphic rocks and intrusive concordant and discordant plutonic
rocks. Long east-west trending dark grey and pink ridges mark the
district, where it has been intruded by swarms of dacite and rhyolite
dykes.

1.6 MINERALIZATION

Ancient mines and prospects are widespread in the district, es-

sentially localized along and at intersections of shear and tension
fractures. The mineralization in the district is of two styles.
 The first style comprises structurally controlled sulphide vein
deposits, and these are localized in fracture zones where wall rocks
are strongly sheared and brecciated. The principal minerals in the
veins are sphalerite, galena, pyrite, chalcopyrite and silver minerals
represented by polybasite, argentite, pyrargirite, tetrahedrite
(freibergite), native silver and occasional stromyerite. Minor amounts
of magnetite and hematite, arsenopyrite, pyrrhotite and occasional
grains of millerite also occur. The gangue minerals are usually,
quartz, calcite and chlorite and less abundant sericite and epidote.
The mineralized fractures are mainly situated within the granitic
batholith (Plate 1), which includes numerous inclusions of pre-existing-,
basic and metasedimentary rocks. Other, less abundant vein mineral-
ization occurs in the metamorphic belt of the Ar-Ridaniyah in the south-
east and in Arja area.

The second style is sulphide deposits within the calcareous hori-

zon of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation. Lenses of essentially, pyrrhotite-
sphaerite assemblage v/ith surface gossan exposures are stratabound,
but are cut and displaced by mineralized faults which may derive sul-
phides both by mobilization from the stratabound zone and by hydro-
i . .
thermal solutions with associated cassiterite and stannite. \

Jabal Humayyan, which constitutes the northernmost outcrops of

the Ar-Ridaniyah belt contains ferruginous-siliceous lenses which are
locally converted to gossan. These lenses are included within a
series of schistose serpentinites and chloritites metamorphosed from
olivine and/or pyroxene rich rocks. Geochemical investigations by
BRGM showed local anomalous nickel and copper.

The silver mineralization discovered in the district to date has

proved uneconomic. Investigation studies are still being carried out
in Jabal Humayyan for nickel.

1.7 GEOLOGICAL MAPPING

Fig.1-3) represents a reconnaissance geological map by Bramkamp

et al. (1963) within which the limits of the studied district lie.
 Fig. 1-4 shows the geology, the physiography and the outline
of the studied area.

A granitic batholith makes up over 80 percent of the district.

Numerous biotite schist and basic xenoliths, besides older layered
basic intrusions, occur within this batholith. The southeastern and
the northern parts are occupied by metamorphic schist belts v/hile the
northeast part is underlain by unfolded Palaeozoic sediments which
rest unconformably on the older rocks.

The geology of the district is plotted on 1 : 50,000 scale overlay

for aerial mosaics 98 and 101. Aerial stereo-pair photographs at
1 : 60,000 scale were used for field mapping (Plate 1).

The layered basic intrusion of Al-Jealani was mapped on 1 :

10,000 scale photographic enlargements from 1 : 50,000 mosaics (Plate 3)-

Detailed plane-table geologic-topographic maps at 1 : 1,000

scale for both Samrah ancient mine (Plate 4) and Ar-Ridaniyah gossan
zones (Plate 2) were done during the course of study of the district
by the author.

Faults and fractures in the south were plotted on a separate map

(fig. 6-2) to aid in the analysis of the fracture system v/hich is-so
prominant in the district.

1.8 PREVIOUS WORK

Previous work relevant to the geology of the area is summarised

in the following:
1. In 1932 K.S. Twitchell examined the ancient workings of Sararah
mine and sampled the dumps.

2. Bogue, R.D. (1954), carried out some geological investigations

at Samrah mine and sampled the old workings'and the dumps,
3. Bramkamp et al. (1963) mapped the regional geology of the Wadi
Ar-Rima quadrangle and compiled the 1 : 500,000 scale geological
map, 206A.
 30,

4. Quin, H. (1964, a, b, c) carried out a program of sampling

the dumps in Samrah ancient mine, mapped the old workings of
Um-Ergabal , of Samrah and of Ar-Ridaniyah. He also studied
the basic intrusion.

5. Theobald, P. (196€>), studied the geology and the geochemistry

of Samrah ancient mine and the vicinity.

6. Mytton (1905) spent few days on geological reconnaissance of

the Ad-Dawadrai area.
7. Eijkelboom, G. (1966), mapped the regional geology of sheets
98 and 101, scale 1 : 100,000 as part of BRGM exploration of
zone II.

8. Kiilsgaard(l968), evaluated the diamond drilling programme of

Samrah prospect and estimated the reserves.
9. Larabolez, B. (1968), interpreted the airborne magnetic sheet
101, which covers the Ar-Ridaniyah area and the basic layered
intrusion.

10. Several other geologists from BRGM spent varying amounts of

time in the area, where they described the mineral localities
and their exploration, these are: Lacomb and others (1969),
Letalenet and others (1969), Bois and Shanti, M. (1971),
Corpel et al. (1971).
11. Meaton (1971) carried out an exploration trenching programme
of the ancient prospects and supervised a drilling of 12'
holes in favourable sites in the district.
 CHAPTER 2

THE METASEDMENTARY FORMATIONS

2.1 INTRODUCTION

The metase dimentary successions in the district are divided on

the "basis of lithology and distribution, into two Formations, the
basal one Ar-Ridaniyah Formation and the overlying Abt Formation
(fig. 2-1). These two Formations have undergone regional metamorphism
and recrystallization under conditions of repeated Precambrian .
orogenies. The most intense and widespread of these is the Hejaz
orogeny, Brown, et al. (1972). Rocks of the two Formations flank
the granitic batholith. The Abt Formation being spatially predominant.
Their occurrence is not restricted to this area but both extend to the
south, Abt extends to the north and west as well (plate l). Numerous
xenoliths are incorporated in the granitic batholith and have retained
their structural trends.

The two Formations exhibit continuous concordant contact. Both

have been injected by pre-, syn-, late-, and post-kinematic rocks of
ultrabasic, basic, intermediate and acidic nature, in the form of
sheets, dykes, sills, and larger intrusive bodies. Contact metamorph-
ic aureoles are locally developed superimposed on regionally meta^-
morphosed rocks.

A belt of quartzo-feldspathic gneiss borders the granitic batho-

lith in the east and separates it from the overlying Ar-Ridaniyah
Formation. The gneiss grades easterly into quartzo-feldspathic schist.
Both comprise the base of this Formation with no evidence of a sharp
contact.

The emplacement of the granitic batholith with its longer north-

westerly axis roughly parallel to the fold axes in both Formations,
took place at the waning stages of metamorphism which affected the geo-
synclinal sediments during the Hejaz orogeny (see section 2.7).
 G E N E R A L I Z E D S T R A T I G R A P H I C S E C T I O N O F M E T A M 0 R P H I C SEQUENCES

|V\A/VNAJW

F O R M ATION
</> Fi0= 2 - 1
A M , 3
O
Ul
o
m l <
J Quo r t z - C h l o r i t e ond Quortz-biotite schist.
£O
J
ABT

o
o cc
o <
(M ' A f\
A
/ V S
1 A TV,
J I Vj\I m \ Epidote, Amphibole schist

z
•ll J-l-Li-'-l-l tl Morble
o
Epidote ond c o l c i t e
H-
Chlorite + ser i c i t e
<
2
ce Actinolite 4 - E p i d o t e + C o l c i t e
o
u. F CO
Marble
O 3
O c
0 o 4>
fO
1
Ui!: tn
oc Z
2000
1 Y A H

< => A c t i n o l i t e + E p i d o t e + Calcite w

o 4)
a.
_J
<t 4)
7 o
i • i '.' • i ' i • i Mineroilzotion zone, Biotite . t r e m o l i t e 5
< o
Q T r ^ m o l i t e , a c t i n o l i t e , Biotite

CC Quartzite —
a>
•o
a>
Q.
1 A c t i n o l i t e + m o r b le ui
1
A c t i n o l i t e t c h l o r i t e +• marble

tr
< Quartzo-feldspathic schist
X
£ essentially B i o t i t e , m i n o r chlorite and muscovite
£ £ local lenses of Amphibole schist
o CO
Q -J Muscovite
ff t Quortro-feldspothic gneiss
i l essential b i o t i t e , minor bands w i t h e s s e n t i a l
1 N1 muscovite. C h l o r i t e is present thoughout
f-
but less abundant than both
<
3000

3
O
gradational
contact
A l - Masloukhah Adamellite
« ~ M ^ // ^
2 . 2 AR-RIDANIYAH FORMATION

Ar-Ridaniyah Formation, which is the lower in the geosynclinal

sequence in the district is represented "by its exposures in the
southeastern
p
corner of the map (plate l). It covers an area of
some 300 km and attains an approximate average thickness of 5000m.
The relief is flat for the major north part of the Formation, except
for individual hills 5-10 meters high. In the south, ridges approxi-
mately N-S parallel to "bedding are common. In the west, sand; con-
ceals a great part of the quartzo-feldspathic gneiss and schist
horizons at the "base of the formation, and contacts are mostly inferred.
Local cross-cutting streams have provided some exposures.

In terms of lithologic features, sedimentary structures and com-

position, six rock units could "be recognised. Four of these have "been
represented on the map (plate l) as one lithologic unit i.e.
calcareous schist, the rocks of which axe dominantly calcareous thinly
"banded. A diagrammatic stratigraphical column is shown (fig. 2-1).

2.2.1 Quartzo-feldspathic gneiss: (AS-754)

A 2-4 Km. wide belt of•quartzo-feldspathic gneiss borders the

even-grained Al-Masloukhah adamellite on the east. The contact is
nowhere properly exposed, but an inferred gradational zone could be
outlined. This inferred zone runs more or less parallel to the
schistosity direction in the overlying Ar-Ridaniyah Formation. The
schistosity in the quartzo-feldspathic gneiss is well developed
010°-01f? and dips 50°-70° easterly in the south, and swings to 012°-
N00 and dips 50° in the north. Aplite-pegmatite dykes occupy planes
parallel to schistosity. They are especially abundant in the trans-
itional border zone which ranges between 50-100 metres in width, sit-
uated between the Al-Masloukhah adamellite and this gneiss belt. Dark
bands of thermally metamorphosed hornblende-plagioclase-hornfels are
occasionally intercalated in the gneiss. The gneiss is cut by faults
030°-140° and dip 60-70°NE infilled commonly with white quartz veins.
 The quartzo-feldspathie gneiss is predominently leucocratic, "but
occasional darker bands occur. It is of medium grain size generally,
but finer grained bands are more common away from the border zone.
Porphyritic bands are abundant in the vicinity of the border zone
(As-742). In thin section the essential minerals of the gneiss are
as follows; Plagioclase, occurs in two forms, phenocrysts with
inclusions of muscovite, quartz and biotite, and fine grained in the
groundmass; locally plagioclase inclusions occur in quartz. It is
oligoclase in composition a»cL albite rims are common.
K-feldspars, both microcline and perthitic orthoclase, occurs in
small grains in the groundmass as well as in phenocrysts. The latter
are more abundant than plagioclase phenocrysts. Inclusions of plagio-
clase, quartz and orientated biotite are common. The phenocrysts
exhibit irregular outlines and evidence of replacement of pre-existing
minerals.

Qufl.-rtT: occurs as deformed irregular grains, in elongated aggre-

gates (fig. 2-2a), as worm-like grains in the myrmekitic intergrowths
with feldspars, and as drop-like inclusions in feldspar phenocrysts.

The TPq.fict constituents are represented by biotite, and chlorite.

Biotite, brown with greenish tint is the main mafic mineral in the major
part of the gneiss. It occurs in small orientated flakes commonly
segregated into bands parallel to schistosity planes.

Muscovite dominates the biotite in the marginal layers bordering

the adamellite, and occurs also in subordinate amounts in the over-
lying gneiss.

Chlorite is present in small amounts throughout the gneiss belt,

but locally (As-742) it is dominant over both biotite and muscovite.
Chlorite is probably a later alteration product of biotite throughout
this horizon.

Allanite, apatite, sphene and opaque inonoxides are common

accessories•
2.2.2 Quartzo-feldspathic schist (As-792, AS-747> AS-748, AS-791,
As-789)

This is a poorly exposed unit at the base of the Formation.

It grades westerly into quartzo-feldspathic gneiss. The boundaries
are inferred and the contacts, where seen, are gradational. In
thin section the quartzo-feldspathic schist is fine-grained, granu-
lated, leucocratic, composed of subangular granoblastic, elongate
quartz grains in orientated aggregates, and other small rounded grains
randomly distributed. Quartz makes up over 50$ of the rock (fig. 2-2
b andC).

Feldspars, both plagioclase and K-feldspars occur in the ground-

mass, plagioclase is less dominant and tends to form poikiloblasts
with inclusions (As-79l), and is sericitized. Biotite, less common;
amphibole, and muscovite constitute the ferromagnesian minerals where
biotite is dominant. Amphibole in long laths is dominant in some
bands (As-747). Sphene, opaques and apatite are common accessories,
zircon is a local accessory.

The schistosity is well developed, 015° and dips 50-70°E.

Thin bands of amphibole schist are intercalated. Locally these were
thermally metamorphosed by dyke intrusions to form plagioclase-
hornblende hornfels (fig. 2-2i).

The quartzo-feldspathic gneiss and schist may have originated as

an arkose.

2.2.3 Calcareous schist

Calcareous schist is a term used here to designate a unit composed

of metamorphosed impure magnesian limestone interbedded with other cal-
careous sediments. Thin non-calcareous pelitic sediments are also
interlayered. The unit is made up largely of the minerals tremolite,
carbonate, calcite, epidote/clinozoisite, chlorite, albite, biotite and
quartz. Sphene and opaques are present in accessory amounts.

This unit dominates other units of the Formation. It is cut by pre-

kinematic intrusions, represented by the lensoid strongly deformed
quartz metadiorite and the leucocratic trachy-andesite and rhyolite
dykes and sills. Syn-kinematic microadamellite and post-kinematic
red porphyritic microgranites form sills and dykes concordant with
the "bedding.

2.2.3a Impure marble (fig. 2.2d)

Several impure marble beds (lime-silicate rocks) are intercal-
ated within the calcareous schist horizon. One of these is host to
the zinc mineralization. In addition to dolomite and calcite, the
minerals present are albite, tremolite, biotite, epidote/clinozoisite,
muscovite, chlorite and quartz. Albite and epidote are usual associ-
ations of marble bands. Biotite rich layers are intercalated with
tremolite rich layers and/or clinozoisite rich calcareous bands with
strongly defined compositional banding. Chlorite, opaque iron oxides
and sphene are present in subordinate amounts.

Tremolite schist and hiotite-sericite-schist layers are inter-

calated with the marble. Both are strongly schistose e.g. As-752(b),
As-754(a), AS-753, As-762, As-765.

2.2.3B Tremolite schist ( A S - 7 9 8 )

This rock is fibrous, strongly foliated colourless or light green.
Tremolite forms over 80$ of the rock. Quartz in minute rounded and
angular grains is locally disseminated hut commonly is segregated in
lensoid aggregates with fine opaque dusty material in preferred
orientation.

Amphibole poikiloblasts, probably post-kinematic, are abundant.

Calcite is accessory. The abundance of tremolite points out that the
original rock was a siliceous dolomite.

2.2.3c Actinolite schist (As-746)

The rock is fine grained and pale green. Actinolite grains show
preferred orientation and form over 60$ of the rock. Quartz forms 20$,
and albite 15$, sphene and opaques making up the rest. Occasional
stumpy, post-kinematic poikiloblastic grains of actinolite with
rounded inclusions of quartz are present.
 37.

The original rock was probably a siliceous dolomite.

2.2.3d Tremolite-epidote-quartz schist (As-760(a))

This is a fibrous, strongly foliated, light green rock. It tends
to be segregated into small lenses. Tremolite forms 80$ of the rock.
Quartz is in minute angular grains as well as in large poikiloblastic
grains. Epidote, fine grained is restricted to calcite grain boundaries.
Calcite is present in polygonal granoblastic post-kinematic grains.

The original rock as indicated by the occurrence of tremolite,

epidote, quartz and calcite was a magnesian limestone with sand and clay
impurities.

2.2.3e Epidote-tremolite-albite schist (As-825, As-754(b), As-811,

As-784(a))
Dominant epidote in interlocking granoblastic polygonal grains
forms over 50$ of the rock. Tremolite occurs as oriented needles, but
radiating slender crystals are also present. Albite, is largely poik-
iloblastic with inclusions of tremolite needles and epidote grains.
Calcite is present in subordinate amounts.

The original rock as indicated by abundance of epidote and presence

of tremolite and calcite could have been a magnesian limestone with
clay impurities•

Plagioclase separated from seven samples of this sub-unit, gave an

average strontium content of 500 ppm indicating a probable sedimentary
origin (see Chapter 4 Sec. 3.10.2).

2.2.3f Actinolite-epidote-albite-quartz schist (As752 (a))

This is in form of intercalated segregated layers of amphibole-
epidote and quartz-albite rich layers. Actinolite is-.in stout pale
green grains showing weak preferred orientation, and many grains show
cross-cutting orientation to foliation planes. Quartz is granular,
segregated into lenses, and disseminated amongst other mineral grains.

Albite is poikiloblastic and in small grains interstitial to.

anrphiboles. The original rock as indicated by occurrence of actinolite
and albite was an impure magnesian limestone, containing some sand and
clay.
 38.

2.2.3s Quartz-actinolte schist (As-773)

This is in form of intercalated segregated layers of actinolite
and granular quartz. Actinolite is extensively poikiloblastie with
inclusions of rounded quartz showing preferred orientation and clear
segregation.

The original rock was a calcareous sandstone.

2,.2.3h Calc-quartz-albite-clinozoisite-actinolte schist (As-764)

Segregated layers of the dark minerals clinozoisite- actinolite
occur between granular quartz bands. Polygonal grains of calcite are
erratically distributed. The original rock was a very impure limestone.

2.2.3i Quartz-chlorite-sericite schist (As-775, AS-772)

This is a strongly foliated, very fine grained (As-775), originally
argillaceous rock, made up of quartz evenly disseminated, showing dim-
ensional preferred orientation. Chlorite in fine stout flakes is well
orientated. The albite is sericitized.

The quartz-chlorite-sericite schist layers occur in thin inter-

calations in the upper part of the Ar-Ridaniyah formation.

2.2.3j Epidote-albite-calcite schist (As-776, As-778)

This is an impersistent layer ( 50 m» thick) intercalated in the
upper part of the Ar-Ridaniyah formation. Opaques in fine dust occur
in preferred orientation parallel to schistosity.

Epidote, albite and calcite are approximately equally abundant.

Quartz,- chlorite and opaques occur in subordinate amounts.

Albite is poikiloblastic with inclusions of epidote. Epidote

occurs in small polygonal grains, or aggregates of grains oriented in
preferred orientation. This rock is affected by thermal metamorphism
when adjacent to microadamellite sill intrusions (fig. 2-2f)•

2.2.4 Summary

The Ar-Ridaniyah Formation is most probably sedimentary in origin.

It was essentially made up of dolomitic limestone, impure calcareous
sedimentary rocks, argillaceous and arenaceous sediments. The quartz
grains in the quartzo-feldspathic schist • horizon are rounded and sub-
rounded, probably detrital.« Textures characteristic of volcancics are
lacking. Locally, thin argillaceous hands were intercalated, which
could also "be interpreted as volcanic tuffs. Sedimentary structures
like cross-bedding, current-bedding or graded bedding are not seen,
and if present, could have been obscured by regional metamorphism and
surface oxidation of the outcrops. Cyclic sedimentation is only
represented by repeated occurrence of impure marble beds within a
dominantly calcareous horizon.

The members of this Formation dip constantly at about 50°E, no

large scale folding is present and there is no evidence to suggest
that the succession has not been repeated by isoclinal folding or
overturning. Only small scale folds which are restricted to thin
pelitic bands were seen. Therefore the whole Ar-Ridaniyah Formation
is probably one conformable succession of sediments.

Contact thermal metamorphism is locally displayed at the

intrusive granite contacts where plagioclase-hornblende and epidote-
calcite hornfels rocks were developed (AS-742, AS-778). Biotite in
the quartzo-feldspathic schist has been later partially altered to
chlorite.

Later dynamic metamorphism is locally exhibited along faults

where brecciation and hydrothermal alteration to chlorite and sericite
is well developed.

The mineralogy of the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation shows that it has

suffered greenschist Bl.l to B1.2 facies metamorphism, and it is
these minerals which define the schistosity.

From field observation and thin section study it is clear that

the contact metamorphism is superimposed upon schistose rocks • and
thus post-dates the regional metamorphism.

2.3 ABT FORMATION

The Abt Formation is a purely clastic sequence metamorphosed to

schists, it occurs:
 1) In the southeast corner of the map (plate l) where it con-
stitutes the western limb of a broad open syncline, over-
lying the Ar-Ridaniyah formation conformably.

2) In the north, in the vicinity of Arja village.

3) As xenoliths incorporated in the granitic batholith.

The Formation is essentially made up of clastic material of

sedimentary origin, which were regionally metamorphosed to greenschist
facies (B1-.1 - B1.-2).

The Formation is composed of quartz-sericite-chlorite schist,

which grades into biotite schist and to gneissic biotite schist towards
its contact with the granite. Occasional quartzite bands and lenses are
interbedded. Almandine garnet is locally developed at the contacts with
the granite.

2.3.1 Quartz-sericite-chlorite schist (As-830)

A thick succession of this schist occurs to the north and west of

Arja village. Only a small part is included in the map (plate l).
It occurs on small hills, which are usually elongated parallel to the
strike of schistosity, N.50°W. Quartz-float is seen covering the low
ground between these hills, derived from the abundant quartz and peg-
matite veins.

In hand specimen, the rock is pelitic schist, highly fissile,

lead grey in colour, banded, where white quartz bands alternate with
darker bands of sericite and chlorite.

In thin section, the rock is fine grained, banded, quartz occurs

in lensoid aggregates making about 35 percent of the rock, intercalated
*

with sericite chlorite bands, which occur almost in equal abundances

making about 45 percent of the rock. Albite, which makes up 15 percent
of the rock occurs as lensoid poikiloblastic grains with irregular
margins and numerous inclusions of orientated sericite. Calcite forms
the remainder and is present in thin bands parallel or subparallel to
schistosity (S^) (fig. 2-2g). Sphene and apatite are present in acce-
ssory amounts.
2.3*2 Quartz-sericite schist (AS-781)

Occurs in thin "bands (2-5m. wide) within the lower part of the
quartz-biotite-albite horizon in the south east corner of the map.

In hand specimen the rock is extremely fine grained, grey in

colour, banded and schistose.

In thin section, it is very fine grained, schistose, with quartz-

rich lenticular bands which are intercalated with sericite-rich bands
(fig. 2-2e). Chlorite is less abundant, it occurs in small light
green irregular flakes. The rock is probably a metamorphosed arena-
ceous argillite.

2.3»3 Quartz-biotite-albite schist (As-782)

It is most predominant as inclusions throughout the granitic batho-

lith and in the vicinity of Arja village and Arja ancient mine at the
edge of the granitic batholith.

In the south east corner it forms the west limb of the broad syn-
cline, overlying Ar-Ridaniyah fbrmation (As-782), and only partly
included in the mapped area.

In hand specimen the rock is light grey, or grey, highly schistose

and banded, fine grained, intensely folded and crenulated (fig. 2.2h).

In thin section (fig. 2-2a, b and c) the rock is composed of

quartz (30$) and albite (20$) in bands or lenses intercalated with bio-
tite (30$) in segregated bands, chlorite (10$) is less abundant, it
occurs in smaller flakes relative to biotite, disseminated in both the
leuco- and melanocratic bands. Calcite is seen infilling, joints
parallel to schistosity planes and occasionally cutting them. Musco-
vite is present in subordinate amounts.

A gueissic-biotite schist (Ar-27) occurs at the contact with the

granite, in the north, the rock has developed a coarser grained tex-
ture. Quartz is in granoblastic texture as well as in small grains.
Alkali feldspar and albite together form about 60$ of the rock. The
albite is poikiloblastic containing inclusions of biotite, sericite
and drop-like quartz grains (fig. 2~2b). Muscovite is present in
accessory amounts.

2.3.4 Arkosic quartzite (As-783)

In the Abt Formation, intercalations of arkosic quartzite bands

are noticed in the south east corner of the map area. These attain
thicknesses of few centimeters to over 20 meters. In hand specimen,
the rock is light grey to pale brown, schistose but not banded.

In thin section the rock is fine grained, composed of angular and

subangular quartz grains which make up about 35 percent of the rock.
Albite occurs in small and poikiloblastic grains, it makes up 20 percent.
Biotite and chlorite which make up 30 percent of the rock occur in
equal amounts. Epidote and actinolite make up the remainder.

2.3.5 Summary

The Abt Formation is most probably sedimentary in origin. It was

essentially made up of finely banded pelitic, and psammopelitic rocks.
These are spatially more abundant than those of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation.
In all localities in the district, these rocks show similar mineralogic
and textural relationships. The quartz grains in the thinly inter-
banded zones are rounded and subrounded, probably detrital. Textures
characteristic of volcanics are lacking. Sedimentary structures like
cross-bedding, current-bedding or graded bedding are not seen and if
present could have been obscured by regional metamorphism, deformation
and surface oxidation of the outcrops. The members of this Formation
included in the mapped area are strongly folded. Small scale folding
of 50 cm. amplitude and wave length prevail.

It is likely that large scale folding and overturning caused

repetition in the succession. This is difficult to ascertain because
of (l) the lithological similarities throughout and (2) the extensive
dyke intrusions within the Formation.
 Metasedimentary Formations
Figure 2-2
(a-j taken in transmitted light)
Quartzo-feldspathic gneiss. Lenticular ragged deformed grains
in planar fabric shown mainly by quartz. Few flakes of chlorite
and biotite are in parallel orientation defining schistosity.
Bottom of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation, CN, As-735*
Quartzo-feldspathic schist. Section perpendicular to schis-
tosity. Quartz is dominant forming 65% of the rock.
Ar-Ridaniyah Fomation, CN, As-736.
Quartzo-feldspathic schist. Section parallel to schistosity.
Strongly deformed, lenticular and elongate ragged quartz aggre-
gate with shadowy extinction. Feldspathic grains are weakly de-
formed. Ar-Ridaniyah Formation, CN, As-747.
Dolomitic limestone, clinozoisite, minor calcite and opaques at
top and calcite and minor clinozoisite at bottom, with well de-
fined bedding plane. Calcareous horizon. Ar-Ridaniyah Forma-
tion, CN, As-753.
Quartz-sericite-chlorite schist. Lenticular quartz aggregates
in parallel fabric intercalated with major fine-grained sericite
and minor chlorite orientated matrix. Bottom of Abt Formation
CN, As-78l.
Calcite-epidote rock, affected by thermal metamorphism,
Schistosity is lacking. Top of the calcareous horizon, Ar-
Ridaniyah Formation, CN, As-778.
Quartz-chlorite-albite-sericite schist. Lenticular quartz
aggregates, albite contains inclusions of chlorite. Calcite
is less common in fractures parallel to schistosity. Abt
Formation, Arja vicinity, PPL, As-830.
Quartz-biotite-chlorite schist. Showing crenulation and
mimetic crystallization of biotite flakes. Lower horizon of
Abt Formation, CN, As-782.
Plagioclase hornblende Hornfels, Lenses in the quartzo-
feldspathic schist horizon, CN, As-746.
Plagioclase-pyroxene-biotite hornfels, xenoliths in Arja layered
basic intrusion, CN, Ar-87.
 Metasedimentary Formations
Figure 2-3
(a-d taken in transmitted light)

Granitized biotite schist. Gradational contact with granite,

occasional grains of cordierite. Xenolith in Syn-kinematic
granite, PPL, G-110.
Gneissic biotite schist with poikiloblastic texture, rock is
affected by thermal metamorphism. This demonstrates progres-
sive metamorphism towards the contact with the granite.
Nearby granite contact. PPL, Vicinity of Arja, Ar-27.
Biotite schist, Abt Formation. This represents a zone in
between quartz-chlorite-albite-sericite schist, (As-830 fig.
2-2g) and gneissic biotite schist affected by thermal meta-
raorphism (Fig. 2-3b), PPL, Ar-24.
Thermally metamorphosed rock composed of plagioclase, biotite
quartz and occasional cordierite. Xenolith in Syn-kinematic
granite. PPL, , G-137.
Pre-kinematic porphyritic dacite dyke rock. Plagioclase
phenocrysts drawn parallel to planar fabric more defined by
the mafic constituents. Dykes in Ar-Kidaniyah Formation
PPL, As-326.
 46

Qv-.,.,,
 The mineralogy of the Abt Formation shows that it has suffered
greenschist facies B1.1-B1.2 metamorphism (Winkler 1967), and it is
these minerals which define the schistosity.

Zones of progressive metamorphism are well exhibited in the

vicinity of Arja in the north where the quartz-albite-muscovite-
chlorite subfacies (fig. 2-2g), (As-830) which belongs to Bl.l grades
southwards into quartz-'albite-biotite subfacies (B1.2) (fig. 2~3g)
(As 829) then to gneissic albite-biotite schist nearby the contacts
with granitic rocks, (fig. 2-3b), ( A r - 2 7 ) .

Garnet which is a higher pressure temperature mineral is present

locally (As-784, As-1033) at contact zones with the granite and in the
xenoliths along with biotite, cordierite, feldspars and quartz (fig.
2-3d). This contact metamorphism is superimposed upon schistose
rocks (As-1033) and thus postdates regional metamorphism.

2.4 FRE-KIMMATIC INTRUSIVES

2.4*1 Ultramafic rocks

The quartzo-feldspathic' gneiss and schist horizons at the bottom

of the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation have been injected near their uppermost
contact with the amphibole or calcareous schist by concordant sheets
of originally, olivine rich rock. Delfour (l97l) stated that this
sequence of metamorphosed ultrabasic and serpentinized plutonic rocks
appears at the base of the syncline and underlies gabbro, metagabbro,
diorite, and quartz diorite.

Lenses of quartzo-feldspathic, calcareous and amphibole schist

are locally incorporated within this intrusive body (fig. 2-4). The
sequence of metasediments and the metamorphic ultrabasic sheets lie
within an easterly, steeply dipping monocline (plate l). The ultra-
mafic rocks have been metamorphosed to serpentine rocks, chlorite rocks,
amphibolite and sporadically to talc-carbonate rocks with talc veinlets
and pockets. Siliceous and ferruginous silica lenses, resistant to
erosion, form several small hills rising to 10-20 meters above the
 •

DIAGRAMMATIC CROSS SECTION, SHOWING STRATIGRAPHY OF THE METAMORPHIC

ULTRAMAFIC ROCKS. A R - R I D A N I Y A H FORMATION.(Central e x p o s u r e s )

E X PL A N A T I O N

Quartzo feldspathic gneiss

A V \ * \ NSI
Quartzo-feldspathic schist

N Calc. schist
I I .1
III Marble + c a r b o n a t e

Serpentine (massive), becomes schist in north outcrops

Is^.S v, S ^
Amphibolite

E 3 Adamellite even-grained
la. 2-4
Fig X
X
X
-p-
Micro* adamellite sills Oo
surrounding flat ground.

The siliceous lenses contain in places considerable amounts of

hematite and some limonite. In other places these form "pseudo-
gossans". Traces of malachite and chrysocolla were noticed associated
with chlorite and serpentine rocks.

2.4.1a Serpentinite
Serpentinite is the predominant rock in the metamorphic ultra-
basic suite of the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation. It occurs in the northern
outcrops of Jabal Humayyan, where it is schistose and sheared, and
commonly intermingled with zones of chlorite schist and talc. Carbo-
nate material is common and is intimately intergrown with serpentine
mineral.

In hand specimen, this serpentinite is green to light green,

fibrous, thinly banded, foliated and commonly with brown hematite
staining after primary magnetite.

In the southern outcrops of this sequence, serpentine rock is

commonly compact and massive. They are pale green to dark grey rocks
irregularly veined by carbonate and talc material. In thin sections
As-794, As-707, the rock is- entirely antigorite in scaly form dusted
with magnetite, which by oxidation to hematite gave the rock a brownish
tint, and in thin brown stained zones around the magnetite. Chrysotile
stringers occur locally.

2.4.1b Chlorite schist and chloritite:

Chlorite schist and chloritite are less abundant and are commonly
closely associated with the serpentine rocks as in the lenses in the
northern outcrops. Chlorite rock is grey green in colour. Schistosity
is locally well developed. Intercalations of both talc and carbonate
material are common.

2.4.1c Talc
Talc is thinly banded with chlorite and serpentine schist. It
occurs in the northern outcrops associated with strongly schistose
serpentine rocks. Talc occurs also in pockets, in fault zones and as
streaky aggregates within the serpentine and chlorite schist. Hematite
staining is commonly strong.

2.4•Id Carbonates
Pale, light brown to creamy coloured cm. wide veinlets of
carbonates are common in serpentine rocks. Carbonates are more abundant
in talc pockets and bands. As-804a and As-804b show fibrous grains of
both colourless antigorite and tremolite within carbonate rock.

This carbonte rock is probably metamorphosed ultrabasic plutonic

rock. It occurs as small lenses within the metamorphic ultra-basic
sequence.

2.4•le Tremolite-rock
As-795, As-805, massive grey to dark grey rocks, essentially com-
posed of tremolite, forming over 80 percent of the rock with subordinate
amounts of chlorite or chlorite and clinozoisite. Calcite is present
along cracks. Magnetite is in accessory amounts with sphene formed
around the grains. This tremolite rock is probably metamorphosed pyro-
xene rich igneous rock. It is found intercalated in the form of lenses
within serpentine rocks or overlying them.

2.4. If Meta-Quartz-Diorite •
Meta-quartz-diorite occurs. in sporadic prekinematic intrusive bodies.
Thin long axes are drawn parallel to (S1) as a result of the regional
dynamothermal metamorphism which they suffered. The intensity of meta-
morphism is approximately that of the B1-.2 subfacies of the greenschist
grade.

In thin section, the rock is composed of about 40$ albite poikilo-

blasts with characteristic ragged outlines and abundant inclusions.
The ferromagnesian is tremolite/actinolite which, occurs in long laths
in(Sj) planes. It forms about 40$ of the rock. Tremolite/actinolite
is li^it brown to li^it green rimmed locally by colourless to light
green chlorite. Chlorite also occurs in aggregates pseudomorphous
after amphiboles (As-768).
 51.

2-.4.1g Rhyolite-Rhyodacite dykes

These are porphyritic, and parallel or subparallel to schistosity
(S-j). Locally, they cut bedding at an acute angle (plate 2). Composition-
ally, they are acidic to intermediate. In thin section, the acidic
dykes are essentially composed of feldspars and quartz with subordinate
amounts of calcite, epidote, biotite and muscovite. Sphene and apatite
are occasional accessories.

Plagioclase phenocrysts are ovoid with their long axes parallel to

. Plagicclase is of andesine composition and tends to break down to
sericite. Plates of muscovite and calcite are common inclusions within
the plagioclase phenocrysts (As-755 and As-759).

The mafic constituents are in lensoid aggregates parallel to (S^,

streaky and interleaved with the acidic matrix.

K-feldspar, quartz and plagioclase form the bulk of the matrix.

2.4«lh Dacite dykes

These are porphyritic, the plagioclase phenocrysts being drawn out
parallel to(S^ planes. They belong to the same generation as the former
ones except that quartz is less abundant. The plagioclase phenocrysts
are sericitized and set in a deformed and foliated groundmass of plagio-
clase, calcite, biotite and accessory apatite (fig. 2-3e), (AS-826).

2.5 SYNmJEMATIC MINOR INTRTJSrVES

2.5.1 Porphyritic microadamellite sills and dykes

Porphyritic microadamellite varies in width from 50 cms to 50

meters and intrudes the metasedimentary rocks in the calcareous schist
zone of the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation. It has a fine grained groundmass
of plagioclase, quartz and K-feldspar with minor biotite, muscovite
and traces of epidote and opaques. Plagioclase phenocrysts are zoned
and have albitized margins and clouded cores. They make up 30$ of
the rock.i The colour index is less than 10$.
2.6 POST-KENEMATIC MINOR INTRUSTVES

2.6.1 Porphyritic red granite dykes

A porphyritic red granite dyke 50 meters wide and some 5 kilo-

meters long intrudes the metasedimentary rocks parallel to the bedding
200 meters west of the Ar-Ridaniyah gossan exposure. The dyke com-
prises a fine grained matrix, rich in plagioclase, quartz and K-
feldspars. The rounded' K-feldspar phenocrysts are completely replaced
by sericite which is being replaced by calcite.

2.7 METAMORPHISM

2.7.1 Regional metamorphism

The geosynclinal successions of the Ar-Ridaniyah and Abt

Formations were regionally metamorphosed during the Hejaz orogeny.
The metamorphism reached Bl.l to B1.2 subfacies of greenschist grade
(table 2-1 and fig. 2-5). The deformation and metamorphism destroyed
the original textures of the rocks and caused the preferred orientation
of the minerals, thus producing metamorphic rocks of different mineral-
ogical compositions and textures. Probable detrital sand grains
retain their relict roundness within thinly interbedded chlorite and
quartz bands of the Abt Formation. Relict textures are retained in
the pre-kinematic minor intrusions. The outlines and relicts of pheno-
crysts remained intact, the albite was clouded with secondary sericite
and sometimes replaced by calcite or clinozoisite. The mafic minerals
were destroyed and pseudomorphed by biotite, epidote, chlorite, amphi-
boles and calcite.

In Ar-Ridaniyah the grade of metamorphism fluctuates in the zone

B1.2- and possibly Bl.l. The Abt Formation, however, exhibits an
increase ii the grade of metamorphism towards the granite contact. The
mineral assemblage of Bl.l subfacies, (quartz-albite-muscovite-chlorite)
away from the granite becomes quartz-albite-biotite of B1.2 subfacies.
 Temperature, °C.
200 300 400 500 600 700 800

^ /
/ /
_ / /
AmDhibolite \ / /

P-T
conditio
not r e a l
in nature

T h e shaded a r e a is A r - R i d a n i y a h and Abt schist belts P - T envelope

ure:2-5 Pressure & temperature fields of metamorphlc facies (after Winkler, 1965 & 1967)
Table 2-1 The Terminology of the Barrovian Facies Series

Green schist Facies

Reference Bl.l B1.2 B1.3

Turner and Verhoogen (1960) Quartz-albite- Quartz-albite- Quartz-albite-

muscovite-chlorite epidote-biotite epidote-al mandine

Grampian Highland Chlorite zone Biotite zone Garnet zone

(Barrow, 1912)

Eskola (1939) Greenschist facies epidote amphibolite

facies
 Mineral assemblages characteristic of B1.3 subfacies of the
greenschist grade were not observed.

2.7.2 Contact metamorphism

Contaot metamorphism by later basic and granitic intrusives is.

superimposed upon the regionally metamorphosed country rocks in
aureoles around these intrusions as well as in the incorporated xeno-
liths.

In the vicinity of Arja village the B1.2 biotite schist subfacies

becomes gneissose towards the granite contact. At the contact these
rocks are darkened, massive and granoblastic in texture and contain
cordierite and garnet. The occurrence of garnet and cordierite tog-
ether indicates contact metamorphism at medium pressure at moderate
depths (Winkler, 1967). In Al-Hufayrah area small outcrops from the
Abt Formation, in the main valley crossing the village, were thermally
metamorphosed to biotite-garnet-cordierite-plagioclase hornfels. The
pre-existing schistosity shows as parallel lineation oh the outer sur-
face of the exposures.

A contact metamorphic aureole is present at the exposed eastern

boundary of Arja layered basic intrusion as well as the incorporated
xenoliths. Plagioclase-pyroxene-biotite hornfels was formed (fig.
2-2j). The contact metamorphic aureole is between 20-50m.

The intermediate and acidic minor intrusions in Ar-Ridaniyah

Formation formed localised zones of thermal metamorphism. Skarn rocks
where schistosity is almost destroyed were formed in the calcareous
horizon. The skam mineral assemblage is essentially epidote, calcite
and albite with minor quartz and secondary chlorite.

2.8 STRUCTURE

2.8.1 Introduction and regional structural setting

The metasedimentary-metavolcanic successions and the plutonic rock

associations hhve suffered several Precambrian orogenic events since
their deposition and emplacement. The most effective and long lasting
was the Hejaz orogeny (1000-660 m.y). It metamorphosed and deformed
the rocks, which were later fractured during the Najd orogeny towards
the end of Precambrian. An outline of the structural deformation in
relation to the geology of the district is given in (fig. 1-5), and
it is concluded that the deformational forces which affected the rocks
in the district were largely directed east-west.

The structural study was mainly carried out in the southeast

sector of the map, where a complete succession of the metamorphic
rocks is well exposed. The ( s ) surface terminology is used in which
(S) defines the original bedding, and(S^), (S^) etc. define successive
generations of superimposed planar fabrics such as schistosity,
cleavage, joints and faults.

The regional structural setting of the district comprises

northerly trending open concentric folds represented by the major
open synform in the southeast where only the west limb is included
in (plate l), and the "ghost" anticline retained within the quartz-
monzonodiorite in Sidriyah area. The granitic emplacement has
dominated the pre-existing rocks except for local inclusions which
retain the pre-granite structures.«

In the north, in the Arja area, the fold axes of structures

preserved in xendliths within the granite trend approximately east-
west.

2.8.2 Folding

In Ar-Ridaniyah, the bedding (SQ) is generally sub-parallel to

a schistosity (S.^) (fig. 2-7b and c), which is defined by the para-
llel orientation of chlorite and biotite. Folds are rare and have
only been observed in drill cores where they deform argillaceous
bands intercalated within unfolded calcareous horizons. In the
hinge areas of microfolds, microscopic examination indicates that (S^)
is an axial planar fabric which sharply cross-cuts (SQ); platy
minerals have also mimetically crystallized parallel to", bedding in
those areas to form polygonal arcs (fig. 2-6d and e).
 Metasedimentary Formations
Figure 2-6
(f )
Coaxial superimposed folds. Symmetrical refolding 2 of
earlier tight foids(fl'. Quartz bands (white) in quartz-
chlorite schist (dark).
Tightly folded thinly intercalated quartz (white) and quartz-
chlorite schist bands (dark). The folds have angular hinges
and smaller parasitic crenulations on the limbs.

Symmetrical open fold with rounded hinge and parasitic

microfolds.
Folding in quartz-chlorite schist. Closer examination
reveals strong axial plane schistosity.
Mimetic crystallization of biotite and chlorite~flakes
parallel to(SQ)in hinge of a microfold. The intersection
of axial plane schistosity and bedding can be seen. Depth
of 66.90 mrs. DH.l Ar-Ridaniyah.
Poles to Joints S + S b _ Poles to S ,

8 3 readings 7 9 readings

Faults
Summary frequency diagram
 In the Abt Formation, the folds are well exposed on the surface.
In general they are of small amplitude and wave length (fig. 2-6b,
c and d) (both less than about 50 cm.), asymmetric and close to open.
The hinges are rounded and show well developed lineations due to
intersection of axial planar schistosity with bedding and also of
microfold axes.

Detailed studies of polished surfaces cut perpendicular to the

fold hinges, show that there are two generations of coaxial folds
(fl and f2), both of similar style, (fig. 2-6a). The early folds
recognized on polished surfaces, were not distinguished in the field
and are probably of rare occurrence. They are thought to have
formed in response to the same stress system that caused the later
folds.

Measurements of fold axis plunges taken from the west limb of

the major synform have been plotted on a stereogram (fig. 2-7e).
They show a well defined grouping plunging between 20° and 60° to
the south-southwest.

2.8.3 Fractures

Northeasterly trending faults (S^):

These are the dominant transcurrent faults and zones of brecciation

and mineralization with quartz, calcite and brown gossan which show
malachite staining. Several of these fault zones were mined by ancients.
This set of faults form a conjugate pair with the (S^) faults. The
sense of movement is commonly dextral.

Northwesterly trending faults (S^):

These form a conjugate pair with (S^) faults (fig. 2-7d). They
are less abundant and less dominant than S^ faults. They have deve-
loped also, zones of breeciation and limited mineralization. These
mineralized zones were also worked by ancients. The length on these
faults range from 100 meters to 2.0 kms.
within the fault zones. The sense of movement is commonly sinistral.
 Joints (S2a,b, S^)

The majority of the joints measured are prominent joints. These

were plotted on an equal area net and on a rose diagram (fig. 2-7a
and f).

There is one conjugate pattern of joints which consists of rather

steep shear joints (S2a+b) intersecting at about 50° and bisected by
one set of tension joints, (S^). The shear joints are parallel to sub-
parallel with the dominant dextral and sinistral conjugate set of
faults.

These joints are thought to have formed by east-west stresses

responsible for the conjugate set of shear fractures.

2.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS .

1) The rocks of Ar-Ridaniyah and Abt Formations represent the

oldest rocks in the district and are predominantly meta-sediments.
However, it is possible that some of the fine-grained pelitic rocks
are entirely or partly tuffaceous. Metavolcanic rocks were not seen
in the district.

2) Sedimentary structures, like current bedding, cross bedding

or graded bedding etc. were looked for but not detected. These may
have been obscured by metamorphism, deformation and surface tarnish
of the exposures.

3) The Ar-Ridaniyah Formation is the basal Formation, and has

been intruded within its lower horizons by concordant ultrabasic
sheets. The intrusions are of pre-kinematic and pre-metamorphism age.

4) The Ar-Ridaniyah Formation is now composed of quartzo-

feldspathic gneiss and schist (actinolite-tremolite) and marble. The
meta-igneous rocks are represented by serpentinite and chloritite and
their local schist derivatives and plagioclase amphibole schist - the
Abt Formation is essentially a chlorite-sericite schist with zones of
quartzo-feldspathic schist and gneiss.
 5) During the Hejaz orogeny (1000 - 660 m.y. BP., Brown, et al.,
1972) both Formations including the pre-kinematic ultrabasic and
basic intrusions have been deformed and metamorphosed in the green-
schist facies of Bl.l - B1.2 and schistosity was also developed.
Progressive metamorphism from Bl.l to B1.2 from north southwards is
exhibited in the Abt Formation in the northempart of the area mapped.

6) Both Formations have been intruded by Precambrian granitic

intrusions. Contact metamorphism is well developed in xenoliths and
in the aureoles forming biotite, cordierite, garnet-bearing hornfels.
Towards the granite contacts, the country rocks become coarser grained
and gneissose.

7) Post kinematic granite intrusions in the form of dykes, sills

and small bodies intruded the district during the later stages and
after the culmination of the Hejaz orogeny.

8) The strike slip faulting of the district is related to the

Najd orogeny (Brown et al., 1972) which succeeded the multicyclic
Hejaz orogeny. Reactivation of movements along the same structural
lineaments produced brecciation, silicification and recrystallization
of wall rocks and mineral deposits along these lineaments.
 CHAPTER 3

AR-RIDANIYAH MINERALIZATION

3.1 INTRODUCTION

The mineralization at Ar-Ridaniyah was discovered by aero-

magnetic, and airborne electromagnetic (Barringer INPUT method)
surveys. Ground magnetic, SP and IP geophysical surveys were
carried out later. Two holes were drilled to determine the
source of the main anomaly which is localized on a faulted lens
of brown gossan. Plate 2 gives the log and the assays on the
two holes. Within the drill section a number of mineralized
horizons were intersected. They contain sulphides in amounts
between 20 and 100 percent. The principal minerals are pyrrhotite
and sphalerite, together with pyrite, marcasite, chalcopyrite and
galena as minor constituents, native silver and acanthite are in
accessory amounts. Stannite, cassiterite and arsenopyrite are
found in small amounts in discordant veinlets.

Zinc is the only ore metal present in economically interesting

amounts (see figs. 3-1 and 3-2). Two styles of mineralization
were recognised from the drill cores, namely a conformable strata-
bound type (fig. 3-3b) and a younger discordant veinlet type (fig.
>3c).

3.2 THE GOSSAN

The gossan which is the surface expression of the sulphides is

localized along an impure dolomitic marble horizon, (Plate 2). Its
main occurrence is a faulted lens, 180 m long and 26rawide. A
few other smaller lenses occur along the same horizon to the south.
Similar gossan is also localized along northeasterly trending left-
lateral faults cross-cutting the mineralized horizon. Ancient work-
ings are abundant on the latter occurrences.

The gossan is reddish brown, containing vuggy cavities which are

lined with calcite and gypsum (fig. 3-3*). X-ray diffraction studies
 CROSS SECTION OF AR-RIDANIYAH D R I L L HOLE - I

E X P LAN ATION

Gossan

Q 0o ^ o0 • Alluvium
20 40 60 80 100 m L_S_

Calcareous biotite and c a l c a r e o u s

ASSAY VALUES
a m p h i b o l e s c h i s t , morble and
Zn dolmitic beds
Depth Ag Cu Pb
in meters g/t % % % Daci!e,Rhyodocite, interbedded with
56.50-61.50 15.0 0 . 1 0 0.05 6.70 B i o t i t e , a m p h i b o l e and c h l o r i t e s c h i s t
thin calcareous horizons a l s o present
61 .50-71.50 < 5 0.05 < 0,05 0.1 0
71 .50 75.50 5 0.05 < 0.05 3 .90 Rhyolite- porphyritic

75 . 5 0 - 8 7 . 0
87. 5 0 - 9 4 . 0 0
< 5 0.05
< 5 0.05
< 0.05 0.05
< 0.05 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 2 5
Sulphide zone Fi9:3-1
 65.

CROSS SECTION OF AR-RIDANIYAH DRILL HOLE - 2

EXPLANATION

Gossan

% y^o Alluvium
20 30 60 80 100 m

ASSAY VALUES C a l c a r e o u s b i o t i t e ond calcarous

amphibole s c h i s t , morble o n d
Pb
s\V dolomitic beds
Dept h Ag Cu Zn
in Meters g/t % % % j j Dacite,Rhyodacite,interbedded with,
Biotite, o m p h i b o l e ond chlorite schist
42.0 - 5 8 . 0 0 15.0 0.10 0.05 4.60 thin c a l c a r e o u s h o r i z o n s also present
5 0 . 2 0 - 7 8 . 0 0 < 5 0.05-0.10 < 0.05 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 3 0
Rhyolite - p o r p h y r i t i c

Fig: 3-2 S u l p h i d e zone

 Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization
Figure 3-3

A specimen of surface gossan of Ar-Ridaniyah composed mainl

of hematite, goethite, limonite (black) and calcite (white)
lining the cavities and filling cracks in the gossan, x 1.

A core specimen of massive sulphide at depth of 37.3 mrs.

DH.l composed of pyrrhotite and less common pyrite (grey
XA/hite) and sphalerite (grey and dark grey).- The black
patches and laminae are calc-silicate host rock minerals.
Notice the planar fabric in sulphides parallel to
planes, x 1

A core specimen at depth of 229-3 mrs, DH.l, showing dis-

cordant vein-type mineralization in pre-kinematic (grey)
and post-kinematic (grey white) intermediate dyke rocks.
White and light grey veinlets are predominantly pyrrhotite.
Black and dark grey veinlets and specks are predominantly
sphalerite, x 1
proved the presence of hematite, goethite, montmorillonite, calcite
gypsum and quartz. No zinc or lead oxidation minerals were confirmed.
The oxidised zone extends downward to a depth of about 20rar,below the
surface.

3.3 PRIMARY SULPHIDE MINERALS

3.3.I Pyrrhotite

Volumetrically, pyrrhotite is the most important sulphide phase in

the mineralized body. It occurs in both massive and disseminated fabrics
with variable grain size.

3.3.I.a Fabric

The pyrrhotite aggregates described here may contain upto a maximum

of 15 percent of other sulphides and/or gangue in the massive aggregates,
and up to 80 percent or more of other sulphidesand/or gangue in the
disseminated fabrics. In figs. 3-4, 3-5/3-7 and 3-9 the fabric and
relations of pyrrhotite v/ith other sulphides are shown. The fabrics
of the pyrrhotite in both the stratabound and vein-type mineralizations
are similar, therefore in the following description the differences will
be explicitly referred to when necessary.

Both massive and disseminated fabrics are developed. The former

type is dominant and consists of coarse tabular or lensoid anhedral
granular mosaics in v/hich the grains have dimensions from 500 - 1000 ^.m
The grains are flattened parallel to the planar fabric of the silicate-
carbonate host (fig. 3-4a) so that their lengths are approximately double
their thicknesses. Grain boundaries are usually polygonal (fig. 3-7
f and i) linear but occasionally serrate.

Where the pyrrhotite is disseminated the mineral forms isolated

clusters of 2-4 large grains, or single grains 50 - 100#ra as in the
brecciated microveinlets. Grain shapes tend to be tabular polygonal
with a preferred orientation parallel to schistosity (fig. 3-4a). In
other cases they are irregular (fig. 3-4 b and c).
 Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization
Figure 3-4
(a, b and c taken in reflected PPL)

A polished specimen in stratiform mineralization showing

Planar orientation of sulphides parallel to S . Sulphides
are dominantly pyrrhotite with less common pyrite (white)
and sphalerite (grey). The gangue is composed predominantly
of calcite and clinozoisite. X5, As-656, depth of 74.90
mrs. DH.l.

A polished specimen in stratabound massive sulphides.

Section is at right angles to (S^). Sphalerite (grey) in
subrounded aggregates in a matrix of pyrrhotites, and is of
later crystallization than pyrrhotite (white). Notice the
ratio of both minerals, and the irregular distribution of
calc-silicate gangue and irregular shape of pyrrhotite
aggregate. X5, As-658, depth of 92.0 mrs. DH.l.

A polished specimen of vein-type discordant mineralization

showing embayment of sphalerite (grey) to pyrrhotite (white)
and extensive replacement of the pyrrhotite by chlorite
(black). X5, As-662, depth of 229.5 mrs. DH.l.
 Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization
Figure 3~5 (Etched pyrhotite)
(a, b and c are taken in reflected PP1)

Angular zigzag lamellae of monoclinic pyrhotite (grey) in a

host of hexagonal pyrrhotite (light grey). As-660,
Stratiform mineralization at depth of 151.0 mrs, DH.l
Monoclinic pyrrhotite (grey) rimmed by hexagonal pyrrhotite
(light grey) which is marginally replaced by marcasite and
gangue. As-659, stratiform mineralization at depth of
149.60 mrs, DH.l
Hexagonal pyrrhotite (light grey). One grain contains
lamellae of monoclinic pyrrhotite (grey). Notice the
po-po grain boundary relationships and replacement of chlorite
to pyrrhotite. As-660, stratiform mineralization at depth
of 151.0 mrs., DH.l.
 hex.po

u
5 4 52 5 0 2 4 2 2 2 0 18
2 0 2 0

St

49 48 47 46
Atomic % metals
b
400i
high temp- high temp,
c hex.po.
hex. po. py

320f
hex.po. + py
300 29Z*

hex. po. moii.+ po.

a 200 low temp.
py
£
a
H

Q*
troilite
"7f?
hex po
. low temp* I xnon.po.
J

50 49 48 47 46 45 44
Atomic %
(Taylor 1968 )
Fig: 3-6
3.3.1»b Intergranular Textures and Structures revealed by etching

The internal textures are determined by the arrangement of

gangue and sulphide inclusions within the pyrrhotite grains, struc-
tural modifications v/ithin the pyrrhotite phases were revealed by
chemical etching.

The frequency of non-sulphide inclusions in the pyrrhotite may

have been influential in delimiting the grain fabric developed during
metamorphic recrystallization. The grains of the silicate and
carbonate gangue show well developed orientation resulting in the
planar schistosity fabric of the rock. It is possible that there
has been local chemical mobility resulting in replacement of the
gangue by sulphides and vice versa.

The minor inclusions within the pyrrhotite show a random dis-

tribution but commonly are oriented v/ith their longer axes parallel
to the schistosity'. The inclusions are chiefly calcite, albite,
tremolite, quartz, biotite and epidote or clinozoisite.

Etching of pyrrhotite by concentrated chromic acid indicates

that hexagonal and monoclinic pyrrhotites are present in both
concordant and discordant mineralizations. The common intergrowth
takes the form of spindle shaped monoclinic lamellae in a hexagonal
host, but the reverse may also-occur (fig. 3-5 a and c). Another
less common relationship is that in which hexagonal pyrrhotite forms
a peripheral fringe around the monoclinic host which also contains
amounts of the hexagonal phases. (Fig. 3-5b)

According to the experimental studies in the Fe-S system con-

ducted by Arnold (19&9) and more recently by Taylor (1970), mutual
exsolution of low temperature hexagonal pyrrhotite in monoclinic
pyrrhotite takes place from hexagonal low temperature pyrrhotite of
composition approximately Fe 4-7.5 - ^6.75 atomic % Fe at 292°C,
Taylor notes that monoclinic pyrrhotite of Fe^Sg composition inverts
rapidly and reversibly at 292°C - 4-°C to a low temperature hexagonal
pyrrhotite of the same composition (fig. 3-6c).
 75. '

The textures observed in the Ar-Ridaniyah pyrrhotites indicate an

original temperature of formation of 292°C according to this data.

3.3.1.c X-Ray Diffraction

The X-ray powder diffraction traverses across d (102) reflection

of pyrrhotite showed that five of the six samples studied exhibit two
peaks at this substructure reflection position. This split according
to Desborough et al. (1965) indicatesthat the pyrrhotite is a mixture
of hexagonal and monoclinic phases (fig. J-oa.). Sample (As-657) showed
that the two peaks 2.060 and 2.050A° are of low intensities which indi-
cates that monoclinic pyrrhotite is the major phase. Sample (AS-662)
showed only one sharp peak 2.060A° indicating a hexagonal pyrrhotite
dominance over the monoclinic, Desborough et al. (1965). In the
other four samples both phases are present in approximately equal amounts.

A convenient method for determining the composition of hexagonal

pyrrhotite was given by Arnold et al. (1962.). They found a close
relationship between the d(102)S spacing and the metal content provided
the total concentration of Cu, Ni, Zn etc., was less than about 0.5
percent. Their graph is reproduced in (fig. 3~6b) and X-ray data for
the pyrrhotites are given in Table 3-1•

The pyrrhotite in the six samples showed a composition ranging

from 46.75 to 47.20 atomic percent iron, and an average of 46.94 per
cent iron. This is in accordance with Arnolds1 (1967) observation
that hexagonal pyrrhotite in association with monoclinic pyrrhotite
is restricted in composition in the natural?assemblages.

Samples As-662 and As-663 are from the discordant veinlets, while
the rest are from the concordant mineralization.

Desborough et al. (1965) found that the mixture of both hexagonal

and monoclinic pyrrhotite can form below the beta transformation i.e.
320°C.

The pyrrhotite compositions are plotted in (fig. 3-6b).

Table 3-1

X-ray data and compositions of pyrrhotite based on the (102)

lattice spacing and continuous scanning using CoK©< radiation and
external silicon and fluorite standards
Samples degrees 29 d(102)A° Atomic /-oFe V/t^Fe
(EPMA)
As-632 51.373 2.065 47.20
As-654 51.435 2.061 46.90 60.4
AS-633 51.523 2.059 46.75 60.6
AS-637 31.500 2.060 46.80 60.0
As-662 51.415 2.064 47.10 60.7
As-663 51.4-35 2.061 46.90

Average 46.94

Samples are taken from diamond drill hole No.l, Ar-Ridaniyah

at depth of 38.90, 60.30, 71.60, 82.30, 229.60 and 238.O meters
inclined from the surface, arranged from top to bottom.

The mineral assemblage in all these specimens is mainly pyrrhotite

but minor sphalerite or galena are present.
* J. Steed and N. Wilkinson kindly conducted the electron probe
analyses used in this chapter.

Table 3-2

Electron probe analysis of pyrrhotite of Ar-Ridaniyah mineral

assemblage in wt. percentages.

As-654 As-633 As-637 As-662

grain 1 grain 2
Element 1 2 1 4 1
Fe 60.4 60.6 60.0 60.0 60.7
S 39.0 37.1 38.5 38.0 37.6

Total 99.4 97.7 98.5 98.0 98.3

Co and Ni checked but not detected.

 Analyses 1, 2 and 4 are for pyrrhotite in the pyrrhotite-
sphalerite assemblage of the concordant mineralization.

Analysis 3 - is an exsolved bleb of pyrrhotite in sphalerite.

Sample 3 is pyrrhotite grain in discordant mineralization shown in
(fig. 3-7a).

3.3.1.d Mode of formation of Pyrrhotite

The original iron sulphides are believed to have been deposited

within an impure calcareous sediment to form bodies of diagenetic
pyrite in a dolomitic limestone horizon. Regional metamorphism has
caused the desulphurisation of the pyrite to form pyrrhotite, this
process being accompanied by redistribution of the sulphide phases
by diffusion during recrystallization and deformation. Remnant
pyrite as individual crystals or aggregates of crystals or corroded
grains, forms islands within pyrrhotite (fig. 3-7 b,c,d and e).
Antun (1967) studied the sedimentary pyrite of the lower part of the
Cambro-Silurian sequence of Oslo, Norway. Within the thermal aureole
of the Permian Drammen granite, pyrite has been transformed to homo-
geneous monoclinic pyrrhotite. The temperature of this transformation
was less than 320°C with a very low sulphur fugacity. Jackanan (1971)
studied the massive sulphide deposits of Wadi Wassat and Qatan of
Saudi Arabia and concluded that the pyrrhotite formed by contact
metamorphism of pyritic lenses by intruding diorite. McDonald (19&7)
compared the mineral assemblages of the McArthur River, Mt. Isa and
Broken Hill N.S.W. deposits which occur in increasingly metamorphosed
terrains, and showed that the pyrrhotite-pyrite ratio increases with
increasing metamorphism.

Metamorphism caused the release of sulphur from the pyrite.

This liberated sulphur reacted with iron-rich minerals within the
pyritic lenses, but a certain amount of it was able to pass out of the
system.

3.3.2 Sphalerite (Zn, Fe)S

Sphalerite is the principal economic sulphide of the Ar-Ridaniyah

deposit and follows pyrrhotite in abundance. Locally, it may form
30 percent of the total volume of the sulphides. Sphalerite is
probably of the same generation or slightly later in the paragenetic
sequence than pyrrhotite (fig. 3~7a).

Under the microscope it is grey to dark grey with characteristic

red internal reflections in oil. Lamellar twinning is sporadically
developed when the sphalerite is etched (fig. 3-8 a i b a n d g)-

3.3.2.a Fabric

Sphalerite occurs in the interstices of the massive pyrrhotite

aggregates (fig. 3-4b) and is found more commonly at po-po grain
boundaries than as inclusions within individual grains, this
suggests metamorphic mobility of the sulphides in the sense of
Stanton (1972).

Sphalerite of the stratiform type mineralization is in segregated

individual aggregates (fig. 3-4b) or in compound bands in dimensionally
preferred orientation parallel to the gangue and the pyrrhotite rich
bands (fig. 3-4a). However, intergrown mixed bands of both sulphides
are predominant, where sphalerite is always interstitial or marginal
to pyrrhotite. Sphalerite aggregates with numerous gangue inclusions
are abundant, and show protuberant extrusions into the enclosing
pyrrhotite (fig. 3-4 b and 3-9 i and j). Primary orientation of
gangue inclusions within sphalerite aggregates seems not to be affected
by the later crystallization of sphalerite.

Sphalerite of the vein type mineralization on the other hand,

commonly forms aggregates which form embayments in pyrrhotite and
partly replaces it (fig. 3~7a). Individual small grains, 5O-3OO
microns, are abundant within pyrrhotite aggregates. Small, corroded
grains of brecciated sphalerite are present within younger post-
mineralization fractures along with other sulphides.

Sphalerite in both stratiform and vein types shows replacement

by both chalcopyrite and galena.
3.3-2.b Exsolution in sphalerite

Sphalerite of stratiform type shows exsolved inclusions of

chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite. These occur in various forms (fig.
3-8g and fig. 3-9 a-g), predominantly as rounded droplets of
variable diameters from sub-microscopic to 30 microns randomly
in migrated emulsion texture. Tabular or lens-like bodies are
embedded parallel to crystallographic directions. Irregular
ragged forms are restricted to sphalerite grain boundaries (fig.
3-9 d and f).

The pyrrhotite inclusions are usually larger in size and often

though not invariably associated with gangue inclusions. They are
less abundant than chalcopyrite, subspherical or ovoid in shape.
Chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite compound bodies occur as a form of
exsolution (fig. 3-10c).

The sphalerite of the vein type, in addition to both chalcopyrite

and pyrrhotite, shows exsolved stannite (fig. 3-8 e, 3-10e and f).
As in the case of the stratiform type, chalcopyrite is predominant
but appears to be more crystallographically controlled (fig. 3~9e).
Stannite inclusions are at random and show variable grain size and
irregularities (fig. 3-10f). Grain boundary segregation of stannite
in sphalerite is common (fig. 3-10e). Pyrrhotite inclusions are
identical to those in sphalerite of the stratiform type.

Electron probe analysis of sphalerite of Ar-Ridaniyah mineralization

in wt. percentage.
As-654 As-655 As-657 As-662
Element 1 2 1 4
Zn 54.2 55.4 52.4 51.4 52.5
Fe 12.1 12.4 11.9 13.2 10.9
S 34.2 34.3 31.7 33.4 32.3

Total 100.5 102.1 96.0 98.0 95.7

FeS 18.35 18.67 17.77 20.0 16.4

Mn not detected. Cd - in traces.

Samples 1, 2, 3 and 4 are for sphalerite from the pyrrhotite -
sphalerite assemblage of the concordant mineralization.
Sample 5 is sphalerite in the discordant mineralization.

3.3.2.c Relationships of pyrrhotite - sphalerite

The textural and compositional characteristics of these two

minerals indicate one episode of mineralization in which sphalerite
is slightly later (fig. 3~9h, i and j).

Sphalerite tends to show mutual boundaries with pyrrhotite at

which sphalerite apparently replaces pyrrhotite. The relationship
between these two minerals is identical in both the stratabound and
the vein type mineralizations. Sphalerite is interstitial to
pyrrhotite grains, it infills the open spaces and follows grain
boundaries. Moreover, in the vein type mineralization sphalerite
tends to be deposited around the earlier formed pyrrhotite grains
and in this way it both encloses and replaces them.

Pyrrhotite occurs also as exsolved blebs or inclusions within

sphalerite grains. These vary in size from submicroscopic to about
20 microns, however larger inclusions are also present. Together
with chalcopyrite, pyrrhotite segregate at sphalerite grain boundaries
and along twin planes.

In the stratabound type mineralization, sphalerite and pyrrhotite

tend to form segregations intercalated in the layered gangue. In
the 80 - 100 percent massive mineralization (fig. 3~^b) pyrrhotite is
dominant) sphalerite forms subrounded polycrystalline inclusions with
irregular digitations protruding the enclosing pyrrhotite.

3.3.2.d Possible conclusions to be drawn from the FeS - ZnS - FeS^

phase relations and the chemical composition of the sphalerites

The mineral assemblages of the FeS - ZnS - FeS2 type are ubiquitous
in the Ar-Ridaniyah deposit. On the microscopic scale, examination
shows that pyrite, pyrrhotite and sphalerite occur intimately associated
on the scale of millimetres in polished section. Thus there is a
reasonable basis for suggesting that the composition of sphalerites
should fall within the narrow range about 20.8 mol.% FeS which is
that predicted by the work done by Boorman (19&7). His synthesis
demonstrated the temperature independence of the equilibrium sphalerite
compositions falling on the FeS - FeS^ - ZnS solvus below 530° C at
atmospheric pressure. More recently, additional synthetic studies
made by Scott and Barnes (1971) showed that, while the slope of the
solvus is vertical and thus sphalerite compositions are temperature
independent at low atmospheric pressures, the position of the solvus
is significantly shifted as pressures are increased.

The Ar-Ridaniyah sphalerites show iron contents of significantly

less than 20.8 mol.% FeS (16A - 20.0 mol. %, average 18.2 mol.%).
These compositions are believed to indicate the metamorphic equilibrium
of the Fe-Zn-S phases in rocks under conditions of greenschist meta-
morphism P = 1-4 Kb at T 300°C. This conclusion is wholly in
agreement with the solvus predicted by Scott and Barnes (1971). (fig.3-11)

The presence of exsolved pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite in the Ar-

Ridaniyah sphalerites does introduce some uncertainty into the
interpretation of the sphalerite analysis using Scott and Barnes
(1971) geobarometer. Notwithstanding the uncertainty introduced by
these iron rich exsolution products, the results seem to be reasonable,
if the evidence for metamorphic equilibration in the greenschist field
provided by the non-sulphide minerals is accepted.

3.3.3 Pyrite FeS2

Pyrite is a minor sulphide present in both stratiform type and

vein mineralizations. Two varieties occur :
(I) First generation pyrite in scattered isolated grains or mosaic
aggregates which occur within a pyrrhotite matrix and show corroded
boundaries. Islands of this type-I pyrite are very common in the
massive pyrrhotite of the stratiform ores. Zoned idiomorphic
pyrite grains are extensively intergrown with gangue and/or
hematite. Hematite and gangue replace pyrite along the zone
boundaries.
(II) Late stage pyrites found in two ways (a) as pyrite-
marcasite intergrowths replacing primary pyrrhotite (fig.
3~7h), and (b) as extremely fine grained discordant and con-
cordant veinlets which formed in minor fractures (fig. 3"7j)»
showing by their brecciation and displacement that they were
affected by later stages of fracture activation.

Atoll and caries replacement textures are extensively developed

in pyrite II where gangue and hematite replace pyrite during supergene
oxidation.

Pyrite II also shows minor inclusions of hematite, sphalerite,

galena and chalcopyrite.

3.3.4 Chalcopyrite CuFeS2

Chalcopyrite is also a minor sulphide in Ar-Ridaniyah

mineralization. It occurs mainly as an exsolved phase in sphalerite
or as occasional small allotriomorphic grains in both vein type and
stratiform type mineralization (fig. 3-10cO. In relation to
pyrrhotite and sphalerite, which are the major sulphides of the
deposit, chalcopyrite shows a tendency to fill interstices.
Chalcopyrite tends to replace both pyrrhotite and sphalerite. It
shows local oxidation to covellite.

The grain boundaries with both pyrrhotite and sphalerite show

the migratory tendency of the chalcopyrite during deformation and
metamorphism.

The chalcopyrite which occurs as exsolution bodies in sphalerite

is discussed under the sphalerite heading.

Electron probe microanalysis of chalcopyrite of Ar-Ridaniyah

mineralization.
Element As-654 As-657 As-663
1 2 I

Cu 34.6 33-2 33.5

Fe 31.1 29.7 28.5

S 34.2 33.6 33.3

Total 99.9 96.5 95.8

 83-

Samples 1 and 2 are chalcopyrite blebs exsolved at grain boundaries

of sphalerite in the concordant mineralization.

Sample 3 is for chalcopyrite replacing pyrrhotite in the discordant

mineralizat ion.

3 . M a r c a s i t e (FeS2)

Marcasite is a minor constituent in the sulphide assemblage. It

is principally a secondary alteration mineral formed at the expense
of pyrrhotite. It is closely associated v/ith it and rarely occurs
in individual grains or aggregates. Marcasite is always associated
with fine granular pjrrite as a product of pyrrhotite breakdown. It
occurs in both stratabound and vein mineralization, but more commonly
in the latter (fig. 3-8d). It is usually peripheral to pyrrhotite
in the form of lamellar aggregates growing within alteration zones
parallel to (0001) of pyrrhotite. Spindle shaped or tabular,inclu-
sions are also present within pyrrhotite aggregates at grain boundaries
(fig. 3-7h).

Marcasite in polished section is whitish yellow, with metallic

lustre, pleochroic in air and in oil showing yellow and light green
interference colours.

Ramdohr (1969) suggested that marcasite forms from the decomposition

of pyrrhotite in acid solution at low or moderate temperatures from
either ascending or descending waters. All the evidence points to
a supergene origin for the Ar-Ridaniyah marcasite.

3.3.6 Galena PbS

Galena is also present in very small amounts in both vein and

stratabound mineralization, but more commonly in the former, v/here
cassiterite and stannite also occur.

Galena is of the latest crystallization, it embays and probably

replaces other sulphides (fig. 3-7g)» Galena commonly forms irregular
grains within pyrite, pyrrhotite and sphalerite. It also fills fractures
and frequently follows the grain boundaries in pyrrhotite aggregates.

In polished section galena is bluish grey white with a strong

metallic luster. No silver mineral inclusions were detected.
Occasionally remnants of pyrrhotite, sphalerite or pyrite occur in
small inclusions.

Investigation of a few galena grains by E.P.M.A. detected no

other elements in the galena. Microanalysis gave 87.7% Pb and 13„1% S.

Galena in vein mineralization is more abundant compared to

stratiform type and is believed to be mobilized to its present sites
from the stratabound mineralization in addition to that deposited
from hydrothermal solutions.

3.3.7 Stannite (Ci^FeSnS^)

Stannite is present only in the vein type mineralization and

is restricted to association with sphalerite occurrences. It occurs
in very small amounts either as exsolved blebs, usually irregular
(fig. 3-10f), as thin veinlets within sphalerite grains,, or as
segregations at sphalerite grain boundaries (fig. 3-10e). Idiomorphic
grains of cassiterite are commonly present in the vicinity (fig. 3-10f).
Unfortunately, EPMA analysis of several spots on stannite grains gave
low totals, only two grains gave totals of 93-9 and 93*1 oat of 100%.

For comparison, stannite from San Jose, Oruro, Bolivia and from
Wheal Ager, Cornwall, (Springer* 1968) are as foliows:
Bolivia Cornwall Ar-Ridaniyah
Element As-663 As-662

Cu 29.5 29.2 28.9 29.3

Sn ~ 27.6 27.7 22.8 21.6
Fe 11.1 10.5 12.7 12.9
Zn 1.8 3.1 0.9 1.1
s 30.0 30.0 28.6 29.3

Total 100.0 100.5 93.9 93.1

 The stannite in polished section is olive green. Weakly
pleochroic and anisotropic. Since no other optically distinct
stannite-type phases are recognised the mineral is regarded as a
typical tetragonal anisotropic stannite (see table of analyses).

3.3.8 Arsenopyrite FeAsS

Occurs as isolated" grains in the vein type mineralization where

it is associated with cassiterite and stannite. It is not an
abundant mineral. The grain boundary relationships suggest that it
is formed later than the associated sphalerite (fig. 3-8e). It is
regarded as a product of late hydrothermal activity.

3.4 OXIDE MINERALS

3.4.1 Hematite Feo0_ and Goethite Fe_0_.0H

2 3
Both .'are.' secondary replacing pyrrhotite and pyrite (fig.
3~8c and f) in both vein and stratiform mineralization.-

The surface exposures of the mineralized lenses are completely

oxidized and leached. The iron sulphide phases are oxidized to
hematite, geothite and less commonly to siderite. This oxidation
extends downwards to about 20 meters below the surface and oxidation
below this level is sporadic.

3.4.2 Cassiterite SnO^

Cassiterite is restricted in its occurrences. It is seen only

in the veinlets crosscutting the post-kinematic microadamellite sills.
It occurs in small subrounded grains (fig. 3-10f), either isolated or
in aggregates with closely associated sphalerite and stannite. It
is present in small amounts (As-662). Cassiterite possibly alters to
stannite, although no replacement textural relationships are observed.

The occurrence of cassiterite and stannite in the vein mineral-

ization suggests that the composition of the veins comprises material
from two distinct sources. (a) A base metal sulphide component
remobilized from the earlier stratabound bodies, and (b) a tin
86.

Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization

Figure 3-7

(a-j taken in reflected PPL, Oil immersion)

a - Sphalerite (SI) embaying and marginally replacing pyrrhotite
(Po). As-662, vein-type mineralization, depth of 229-3-
DH.l.
b - Pyrite-1 (white), zoned and partly embayed by pyrrhotite ,
(light grey). Gangue minerals replace pyrite along zoned
planes. As-660. Stratiform mineralization, depth of
131.0, DH.l.
c - Pyrite-1, zoned (Py) partly embayed and replaced by pyrr-
hotite and gangue along zoned planes. As-660. Stratiform
mineralization depth of 131-0 mrs. DH.l.
d & e Pyrite-1 (Py) corroded and enclosed in a matrix of pyrrho-
tite (Po) where pyrrhotite is replacing it. d-As-651,
e-As-638, Stratiform mineralization at depths of 37-20
and 92.0 mrs. respectively, DH.l
f - Po-Po grain boundary relationships, dominantly polygonal
linear. Pyrrhotite aggregate is deformed and cemented by
quartz. Monoclinic pyrrhotite lamellae occur in some grains
As-663, vein-type mineralization, depth of 238.30 mrs,
DH.l (Etched section).
g - Galena (gn)interstitial to pyrrhotite (Py) extensively
replacing it. As-663, vein-type mineralization, depth
of 238.30 mrs. DH.l.
h - Pyrite"2(Py) and marcasite (mc) marginally replacing pyrrho-
tite (po). As-630, stratiform mineralization, depth of
3^.0 mrs, DH.l.
i - Po-Po grain-boundary relationships, polygonal linear. Dom-
inantly hexagonal pyrrhotite, some grains host monoclinic
lamellae (grey). As-630, stratiform mineralization at depth
of 3^.0rars,DH.l (Etched section).
3 - Micro-veinlets of pyrite-2. As-66l, depth of 217-0 mrs, •
DH.l.
 87. '

ZOOM.

IOO A
88.

Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization

Figure 3-7

(a-g taken i n reflected PP1 i n o i l immersion DH.l)

Twinned sphalerite and secondary pyrite. As~o59j stratiform

mineralization, depth of 149.60 mrs. Etched section.

Hematite (hm) and goethite replacing pyrite. As-660,

stratiform mineralization, depth of 151.0 mrs.

Marcasite (mc) replacing pyrrhotite (Po). Galena (gn)

interstitial to pyrrhotite. As-663, vein-type minerali-
zation, depth of 238.30 mrs.

Sphalerite ( s i ) i n t e r s t i a l to pyrrhotite (Po). Arseno-

pyrite (ars) i n t e r s t i t i a l to sphalerite. Galena replacing
pyrrhotite and sphalerite. The sphalerite contains ex-
solved stannite (sn) and chalcopyrite grains. As-663»
vein-type mineralization, depth of 238.30 mrs.

Irregular inclusions of hematite (hm) and gangue i n pyrrho-

tite. A S - 6 6 0 , stratiform mineralization, depth of 1 5 1 . 0 mrs.

Coarse pyrrhotite grains exsolved at grain boundaries of

twinned sphalerite. As-659, stratiform mineralization,
depth of 149.60 mrs. (Etched section).
 89. '

N .:; ,
« » • <»4 .1
«•• *» f „f

• ^ H u n -V V
» i^^M^t BV V A.
py - T R P *

• ft,
^ . V X •• • * ; i,
CL_ u •fr.' • :' •• . * rv ». , ^
90.

Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization

Figure 3-9

(a-j taken in reflected PPL in oil immersion.

Specimens from DH.l)

a - Unmixing of chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite (white) from sphal-

erite (grey) and subsequent segregation to sphalerite.grain
boundaries. As-S57, Stratiform mineralization, at depth
of 87.50 mrs.
b - Exsolution of chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite along parallel
planes and grain boundaries of sphalerite. linulsion
exsolution is also developed. Coarse exsolved grains are
commonly pyrrhotite or compound grains of pyrrhotite and
chalcopyrite. As-650, Stratiform mineralization, depth of
54.0 mrs.
c &d Coarse unmixing of chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite in sphalerite
away from the margins and along grain boundaries, c - As-
654, d - As-657 stratiform mineralization, depths of 60.55
and 87.50 mrs. respectively.
e - Chalcopyrite exsolved along crystallographic planes and in
emulsion in sphalerite, As-662, vein-type mineralization,
depth of 229.5 mrs.
f - Unmixing and segregation of pyrrhotite (coarse) at sphal-
erite grain-boundaries. Chalcopyrite in emulsion exsolu-
tion. As-662, vein-type mineralization, depth of 229.5 mrs.
g - Coarse compound grains of chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite ex-
solved from sphalerite. As-657, stratiform mineralization
depth of 87.50 mrs.
h - Massive sulphide fabric of sphalerite (SI) and pyrrhotite
(Po) in stratiform mineralization. As-652, depth of 59.65 mrs.
i - Subrounded sphalerite (si) aggregate with protuberences in
a matrix of pyrrhotite (Po). As-658, stratiform mineraliza-
tion at depth of 92.0 mrs.
j - Sphalerite, interstitial to pyrrhotite matrix in stratiform
mineralization. As-652, depth of 59.65 mrs.
 Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization

Figure 3-10
(a-f taken in reflected PPL in oil
immersion from DH.l)

Fine inclusions of native silver (ag) rimmed by acanthite

(ac) in pyrrhotite (Po). As-657, stratiform mineraliza-
tion, depth of 87.50 mrs.
Coarse compound grains of chalcopyrite (cp) and (Po) ex-
solved from Sphalerite (si). As-659, stratiform
mineralization, depth of 14-9.60 mrs.
Etched chalcopyrite grain showing twinning. As-660,
stratiform mineralization, depth of 151*0 mrs.
Stannite (sn) rimming sphalerite in a matrix of pyrrho-
tite (Po). As-663, vein-type mineralization, depth of
233.30 mrs.
Subrounded grains of cassiterite(cas). Stannite (Sn)
marginal and in irregular exsolved bodies in sphalerite.
Arsenopyrite (ars) interstitial to sphalerite. Galena
(gn) interstitial to pyrrhotite and sphalerite. As-663
vein-type mineralization, depth of 238.30 rars.
 94

700 -

600

Ctf

400 -
• — Measured " E x t r a p o l a t e d isobar
— — Calculated isobar
IScatt & Barnes 1971)
O 2.5 kb Experiments
• 5kbE*periments
1— A 7«5kb E x p e r i m e n t s
R Reversal

\
3 00 \
1
. I » f
22 20 18 16 14 IZ 10 8
Fig:3-11 Mole / FeS in Sphalerite
( A f t e r Scott p e r s . comm.)
ISOBARS OF SPHALERITE + PYRITE + METASTABLE MON. + HEX.
PYRRHOTITE
 95 •

bearing pulse originating in the microadamellite intrusions which

form sill-like bodies in the calcareous formation of Ar-Ridaniyah.

3.5 SILVER MINERALS

Silver minerals are rare in Ar-Ridaniyah mineralization. Minute

native silver grains rimmed by acanthite occur as veinlets (fig. 3-10a)
or as inclusions (fig. 3-10b) in pyrrhotite grains. It seems that
the native silver is replacing acanthite and that both minerals were
formed by supergene alteration.

3.6 JABAL HUMAYYAN

Jabal Humayyan is situated 25 Km east of Ad-Dawadmi town. It

includes several dark low hills at the extreme north of the Ar-
Ridaniyah Formation.

Blanchot (1970) noticed a close similarity between the geological

setting of this area and that of the Kambalda area in Western Australia. •
At Kambalda large nickel deposits have been discovered in the past few
years (Woodall and Travis, 1969). He recommended an exploration
program for nickel and copper.

3.6.1 Geological setting

Jabal Humayyan area (fig. 3-12) is an essentially metamorphic

ultramafic suite of rocks deformed and metamorphosed to greenschist
facies. The predominant rock types in decreasing order are serpentinite,
chloritite and siliceous lenses. Talc and carbonates are less common.

The siliceous lenses have variable amounts of iron oxide content,

accordingly these v/ere classified into three categories, siliceous,
ferruginous and "pseudogossan". Fig. 3-13 shows detailed geological
sections along trenches dug by B.R.G.M. in separate locations.

The siliceous lenses, being resistant to erosion, form prominent

low hills, 10-20 m. above the surrounding flat ground. Intercalations
of the host rocks from Ar-Ridaniyah Formation are common., particularly
calcareous ..and quartzo-feldspathic schist. Concordant pre-kinematic
 96. '

basic and acidic minor intrusions occur throughout the area.

Serpentinites and c h l o r i t i t e s are strongly deformed. The

s c h i s t o s i t y i s predominantly north-south with prevailing steep
easterly dips. Where the stratigraphic contacts are observable,
the s c h i s t o s i t y i s concordant with the bedding.

3.6.2 Composition and texture of the s i l i c e o u s lenses

Siliceous lenses are composed essentially of quartz, hematite,

goethite and limonite. The common rock i s cryptocrystalline i n
texture and has a porcelanous lustre. The content of iron oxide
i s variable from one outcrop to the other. The highly s i l i c e o u s
rocks often show a microbrecciated texture where small red s i l i c e o u s
fragments with a cryptocrystalline texture are cemented by finely
crystalline quartz. Calcite and chlorite form accessory minerals.

3.6.3 Geophysical investigations

The geophysical investigations carried out by B.R.G.M. con-

sisted of airborne magnetic, ground magnetic and s e l f potential
surveys.

A l l failed to find any strong anomalies at shallow depths

(Corpel et a l . 1971).

3.6.^ Geochemical investigations

The surface geochemical investigations carried out by B.R.G.M.

on the area revealed that the ferruginous s i l i c e o u s rocks often
contain as much nickel and chromium as the serpentinite and c h l o r i t i t e
rocks (Corpel et a l . 1971). They thought that the s i l i c a and the
iron removed from the ultramafic rocks during metamorphism leached
out the nickel, chromium and the carbonates.

This s i l i c a and the associated Fe, Ni and'Cr accumulated and

deposited i n lenses. However, samples from t h i s siliceous rock
contained up to 300 ppm copper and 325 ppm zinc. These high values
suggest that the hematite and limonite are derived from sulphides
 i

7 >-,\ \ K \\\\ > N 82° W

dip 55°E
Fe, Fe-
Serpentine + rT
Chlorite
!+ 1 V SS e r p e n t i n e schist
minor chlorite + Serpentine +
talc schist t a l c schist

N 80° W
dip 45° E

Carbonates Faulted zone Serpentine +

+ t a l c schist chlorite + to Ic + chlorite schist
serpentine s c h i s t

N 82° W
dip 60° E
Massive
serpentinite

T 13 N
N 84° W
dip 78° E

N 80° W
dip 62° E

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
11 i 2 0 130 Meters
t—nrrraii 1 J
i—w«i It—1—1F ImwiwiJ jiimwiwi Ihwimw^ I—miiminil

C h l o r i t e schist
rpeT*^™!
1
ale schist Ny Serpentine schist^H^gj Gossan

: fe F e r r . Sil. J ^tJ "Siliceous rocks | 7 1 Qzite

q i O
Fig. 0 - . I 0 Detailed Sections along trenches in J

Humayyan Metamorphic ulframafics.

rather than silicates (Corpel et al. 1971).

The nickel values from the soil ranged from 660-2350 ppm.,
higher than the enclosing metamorphosed ultramafics. This again
suggests that this nickel originated from sulphides.

3.7 SUMMARY

3.7.1 Ar-Ridaniyah Mineralization

1 There are tv/o styles of mineralizations, a stratabound and

a discordant vein-type. Both styles occur in an impure dolomitic
marble horizon which is intercalated with biotite, amphibole and
chlorite schist bands. Extensive pre- and syn- and post-kinematic
sill and dyke intrusions cut the calcareous horizon, predominantly
concordant with the bedding.

2 The stratabound style mineralization which is in small .lenses,

the largest of which is a faulted lens l8o m long and 26 m v/ide
appears on the basis of textural evidence to have a pre-metamorphic
origin. Selective hydrothermal replacement does not seem likely
and thus a syngenetic origin in a marine environment is proposed.
The dominance of iron and zinc sulphides suggests a distant
relationship to a hydrothermal system.

3 The sulphides form bodies in broadly conformable relationships

to the enclosing strata, but in common with many low-grade metamorphic
rocks containing conformable sulphides, there are local small-scale
discordant fractures, veinlets and protruberances, which pierce the
wall rock envelope.

The gossan lenses are the superficial expression of sulphide

mineralization containing a pyrrhotite - sphalerite assemblage with
other minor sulphides. These lenses occur entirely within a
stratigraphic horizon of impure dolomitic marble of the Ar-Ridaniyah
Formation; this forms the v/est limb of a broad syncline. As a
result the mineralized lenses retain their forms with an easterly
dip of about 55°. The host rocks have not suffered intensive folding
and metamorphici grade is in the greenschist facies.
 3 A conspicuous feature of these lenses is the occurrence of
northeasterly trending left-lateral wrench faults cut and displace
them. The faults show a dark brown partly gossanized surface trace
easy to recognise, and have been reactivated by later movements.

6 The mineral assemblage of the stratabound-type is composed

essentially of pyrrhotite and sphalerite, pyrite is less abundant.
Chalcopyrite, galena and marcasite . are in minor amounts. Native
silver and acanthite occur in minute rare grains.

The mineral assemblage of the vein-type mineralization is again

composed essentially of pyrrhotite and sphalerite, pyrite, galena
and chalcopyrite are less abundant. Marcasite, cassiterite, stannite
and arsenopyrite are in minor amounts. The cassiterite, stannite
and arsenopyrite are restricted to this vein-type mineralization
and are probably related to hydrothermal solutions which originated
in the post-kinematic dyke and sill intrusions.

7 The internal fabric of the sulphide-rich bands maintains a

sedimentary aspect when hCf/o or more of the gangue silicates and
carbonates are present. The basal planes of recrystallized clay
material and the long axes of the amphiboles mimetically reproduce
the original sedimentary lamination of the host. The granoblastic
fabric produced during the main phases of deformation and metamorphic
recrystallization does not show any evidence of later modification.
The principal gangue inclusions in the pyrrhotite - sphalerite ore
are quartz, albite, epidote/clinozoisite, biotite, chlorite and
calcite. Calcite rimmed by chlorite occurs very commonly within the
sulphide bodies as a major component of the included gangue.

3.7.2 Jabal Humayyan mineralization

1 Jabal Humayyan mineralization occurs in form of siliceous

lenses within metamorphic ultrabasic rocks located in the northern
exposures of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation (Plate 1 and fig. 3-12 ).

2 The siliceous lenses contain variable amounts of hematite, '

goethite and limonite, locally they are rich with iron oxides and
termed "pseudogossan". Traces of malachite and chrysocolla were
observed in the serpentinite and cliloritite.

33 The magnetism and SP geophysical surveys on these lenses by

BRGM to delineate the extent of the ultrabasic rocks and to explore
any anomaly induced from sulphides, respectively, gave no significant
results.

^ The silica lenses have been produced through metamorphism of

the ultramafic rocks, the Fe, Ni and Cr associated have also been
mobilized together with the silica.

5 One sample from the "pseudogossan" contained 30° ppm. Cu and

323 ppm. Zn. Three other samples contained 230, 270 and 380 ppra Zn.
The nickel values from the soil covering the ferruginous silica
lenses and the "pseudogossan" range from 660 to 2330 ppm. These
values, according to Corpel et al. (197D suggest derivation from
sulphides.

3.8 CONCLUSIONS

Two stages of mineralization can be recognised at Ar-Ridaniyah.

They are distinct in both geometry and mineral content.
1. A conformable stratiform type which is composed of pyrrhotite-
sphalerite rich bands intercalated with carbonate and silicate
gangue. Pyrite, arsenopyrite and galena occur in this
association as minor constituents. The pyrrhotite is believed
to be a product of the metamorphic conversion of diagenetic
pyrite. Regional metamorphism related to the ilejaz orogeny
is believed to have played the chief role in this process but
locally, contact metamorphism by post-kinematic sill intrusions
may have played a part.

2. A later cross-cutting vein type mineralization in which pyrrhotite

and sphalerite are accompanied by tin minerals, cassiterite and
stannite, and arsenopyrite. The hydrothermal solutions res-
ponsible for this mineralization are believed to have originated
from post-kinematic acidic and intermediate intrusions. Much
 102. '

of the sphalerite and iron sulphides may have been redistributed;

after remobilization of the stratiform bodies, but the presence
of tin minerals suggest that special geochemical characteristics
must have been associated with this later, structurally distinct,
phase of mineralization.

3. The ore reserves in Ar-Ridaniyah are estimated by the writer to

a depth of 200 m, -to be about ^00,000 tons of average hc/o Zn/ton.
This estimated reserve, the grade and the remoteness of the
deposit exclude the possibility of this deposit to be economic.

The geological setting and the surface geochemical sampling of

Jabal Humayyan deposit point to the possibility of Ni mineral-
ization. Therefore it is strongly recommended that a minimum
of three drill holes should be sunk under the "pseudogossan"
exposures which showed anomalous Ni values. BRGM recently,
drilled one hole in the deposit to check an SP anomaly away from
these "pseudogossan" lenses; apparently, poor or no mineraliza-
tion was detected and no further drilling was done. Up to the
end of this year 1972 no report has been published about this hole.
 CHAPTER 4

LAYERED BASIC INTRUSIONS

4.1 INTRODUCTION

Two layered basic intrusions occur in Ad-Dawadmi district

(plate l). The northern one, Arja, was discovered during this
course of field mapping; the southern one Al-Je'alani is larger in
size 50 km ) and is more prominent. They are separated by a
distance of thirty km. In plan view both are elliptical in shape
with their longer axes trending northwesterly. Arja intrusion will
be discussed briefly later, in this chapter- The field and labora-
tory nethods used i n t h i s study are d?scussed in appendix 2.

4.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OP INVESTIGATION

1. The two basic intrusions occur within an ancient silver

mining district. Their investigation thus included the
possibility of a genetic relationship to this mineralization.
The major mineralized occurrence in the area (Samrah) is
localized at the contact of xenoliths disrupted from A1-
Jealani basic intrusive mass within a suite of younger
granites.

2. The varied recorded opinions about the structure and the

nature of the southern intrusion (Al-Jealani) encouraged its
mapping and ascertaining its origin, i.e. whether it is a
layered intrusion, or merely dykes intruded into pre-existing
rocks.

5. The possibility of any economic ore deposits usually associated

with such layered basic intrusions such as Ni, Pt, Cr, Pe,
V, Ti etc. was a prime purpose, though none have yet been
recorded.
4.3 AL-JEALANI INTRUSION

4.3.1 Structure and topography

This layered intrusion is oval in outline about ,9 x 6 km., with

its longer axis trending N 42°¥ (plate 4 and fig. 4-1 )• It is
enveloped by light coloured granitic rocks, displaying spectacular
contrast in colour and shape. The intrusion is made up of rather
uniform concentric horizons dipping radially inward. Dips are gene-
rally steep, in the marginal layers ranging between 50-70°> and
decreasing gradually towards the center to dips of about 20°. Local
distortions in dips and layering are due to later dyke and granitic
intrusions as displayed in the central area.

The drainage pattern over the intrusion is approximately radial,

although minor streams follow concentric surfaces of horizons para-
llel to layering, before joining the main ones.

The layered basic rocks occupy remarkably flat country with a

mild degree of relief in comparison to the surrounding rocks.

Concentric ridges were formed by differential erosion of the mas-

sive unaltered layers (fig. 4-2a). The altered rock units rarely
form hills or ridges, except where intruded by younger granitic rocks.

4.3*2 Previous work

Work carried out previously has been at reconnaissance level with

no attempt made to map the mass in detail.

1. Bramkamp et al. ( 1 9 6 3 ) , included the layered intrusion on

1*500,000 geologic map (I-206A) as an amphibolite body.

2. Quin ( 1 9 6 4 ) , considered it to be a basin containing many con-

formable sills or bands of basic intrusive igneous rocks.

3. Theobald ( 1 9 6 6 ) , considered two ages for the rocks forming

the ring complex, an older massive gabbro, and a younger
amphibolite, formed as an alteration product of the pre-
existing rocks.
 A1 Jealani layered mass

Figure 4 - 1

Aerial photograph (approximate scale 1 : 50,000) showing the

e l l i p t i c a l A1-Jealani layered basic intrusion (dark grey)
enveloped by granitic rocks (light grey). The dark coloured
units are predominantly plagioclase-olivine cumulates i n t e r -
calated with l e s s resistant plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate layer
106. '
 4. Mytton (1966), considered the layered intrusion as an amphi-
"bolite complex.

5. Skiba and A1 Shanti, (l97l), the first to recognise the

stratiform nature of the complex.

4.3.3 Airborne magnetic and radiometric survey

The layered intrusion has a marked aeromagnetic expression within

the surrounding area of low magnetic relief. The radiometric levels
over the layered mass are lower than the surrounding granitic
rocks, as mightsbe expected. Lambole;z (1968) interpreted the mag-
netic pattern to indicate a deep rooted basic mass with a rather sharp
and steeply dipping contact, and noted the presence of marked sub-
sidiary anomalies within the structure. The suggested structure of a
steep sided mass is important relative to the alternative possibility
that the intrusion has a shallow lopolithic floor adjacent to the
outermost ring of basic rock.

4.3.4 Nomenclature and sequence

The intrusion shows a layered structure such as is characteristic

of the Skaergaard intrusion (Wager and Brown 1968) and it is composed
of cyclic units in which the cumulus phases are represented in a reg-
ular manner. On the basis of the field relations fifteen rock units
with a total thickness of 2,600 m forming the normal sequence from
the margin to the centre of the intrusion were mapped. Within each
unit many features such as distribution of cumulus plagioclase, pyro-
xenes and olivine, variable development of fine-scale rhythmic layering,
variable grain size and degree of amphibolitization of pyroxene allow
the subdivision of units into subunits. Continuity of units appears
to be perfect and no significant mappable variation was noted along
the strike.

The normal rock of the intrusion is a medium grained gabbro con-

sisting of plagioclase and pyroxenes with olivine present in some
units and displaying gabbroic texture. Several units display pyroxene
partially or completely replaced by secondary amphiboles. The layers
are everywhere parallel to contact of the intrusion.

The layered units comprise a considerable variety of rock types

ranging from gabbro and norite, through troctolite to anorthosite.
These are believed to belong to a single fractionation series. Text-
urally and structurally there is a good evidence that these rocks are
cumulates and rhythmic layering is found in many horizons (fig. 4-2
The light coloured layers of plagioclase cumulate (anorthosite) alter-
nate with well laminated plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate (gabbro-norite).

The naming of rocks is based on cumulus minerals only listed in

order of decreasing abundance, e.g. plagioclase-olivine cumulate cor-
responds to troctolite, etc. Such terms as cumulus, intercumulus are
used in this thesis as defined by Wager and Brown (1968).

4.3.5 Field characteristics

The layered mass is oval in outline and funnel shaped with east
and west contacts inclined inward at about 60° and north and south
contacts at 50°. It is enclosed and intruded by granites. No evi-
dence of a chilled phase is found in the marginal zone.

The intrusion contains a variety of structures and textures of

a type which are normally attributed to crystal accumulation. Excel-
lent examples of planar oriented plagioclase and pseudomorphed pyro-
xene, rhythmic layering and gravity stratification have been mapped.
These layers are regularly disposed, parallel to each other and have
low to moderate inward dips implying that no strong post-crystalli-
sation deformation has occurred.

In addition to the small-scale rhythmic layering, a broad rhythm

occurs which consists of plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates in which pyro-
xene is partly or entirely amphibolitized alternating with plagioclase-
olivine cumulates. The generalized sequence Is given in the vertical
section (fig. 4-7)*
 A1 Jealani Layered Mass

Figure 4-2
Field characteristics

Plagioclase-olivine adcumulate of Unit II forming a

prominant ridge. Large and small scale spheroidal
weathering formed rounded boulders with characteristic
"knobbly" surfaces (b). North side, looking northwesterly.

Irregular layering in plagioclase-olivine cumulate, Unit

VII, north side, looking easterly.

Close view of "knobbly" structure on surfaces of boulders

of Unit X, north side, looking northwesterly.

Close view of closely packed lensoid knobs that consist

predominatly of calcic plagioclase. Base of Unit XII,
north side, looking northwesterly.

Well developed rhythmic layering in melanocratic plagioclase'

olivine cumulate (thick layers) and leucocratic plagioclase
rich thin layers. Unit V, east side, looking southerly.
 A1 Jealani Layered Mass

Figure 4-3

Field characteristics

Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate showing

fracture cleavage.and surface weathering. Unit I,
northern side, looking westerly.

Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate, showing

easterly dip and a thin layer of plagioclase cumulate.
Unit 1, north side, looking easterly.

Rhythmic layering expressed by regular and.irregular

layers (top), as well as by differential weathering in
plagioclase-olivine cumulate. Unit VIII, east side,
looking northeasterly.

Rhythmic layering well developed, some layers exhibit

cross lamination (bottom left). Unit VIII, west side,
looking northerly.

Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate (eroded dark

knobs) cut by gently dipping granite pegmatite dyke.
Unit III, east side, looking easterly.
112. '
 113. '

In a general way the sequence of rock types is duplicated in most

of the zones with the amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates
concentrated in the lower 2/3 divisions and the centre. The plagioclase-
olivine cumulates occur at higher levels.

The most significant feature of the structures of the layering

is a progressive decrease in dip towards the centre. The steepest
dips (70°-50°) occur around the margin and the strike of layering
swings round to give a generally elliptical outcrop.

Because of this development and the olivine "bearing horizons "being

most resistant to erosion, a series of parallel ridges dominate the
landscape of the area. Approximate thicknesses of the zones, field
characters and principal cumulus minerals from base to top are given
in fig. 4-7*

Due to gravitational differentiation individual layered bands are

characterized by lower more mafic and upper more feldspathic phases.
The absence of ultramafic layers indicate a relatively high content of
cumulus plagioclase. Extreme examples containing 9plagioclase are
present in thin layers and at about 1750 m. above the base a 20 m.
thick layer of plagioclase cumulate occurs as a prominent anorthositic
zone. The layered rocks locally appear to grade into massive non-
layered plagioclase - olivine cumulates averaging 50 m. in thickness.
These rocks are described as orthocumulates with plagioclase and sub-
sidiary olivine as the only cumulus phases. These units are internally
uniform in grain size and composition of cumulus minerals but are
separated from underlying and overlying units by relatively sharp
compositional differences. Individual layers, which vary from
fraction of a centimeter to several meters in thickness, have never
been observed to cut each other and in some outcrops a sharp transition
from feldspathic to mafic layers was noted. The silicate grains are
well oriented with their longer axes parallel to the plane of layering,
thereby often imparting to the rocks a well laminated structure. Even
when layering is absent the orientation of feldspar laths, amphiboles
or olivines display linear parallelism.
 In the field this layering simulates the rhythmic stratification
of a sedimentary succession and in two dimensional outcrops it pro-
duces a striking effect of "banding. The small scale rhythmic layering
appears to be similar to that exposed in the layered series of gabbroic
intrusions of the Bushveld complex (Hall 1932, and others), Stillwater
(Hess 1960), Skaergaard (Wager and Dear 1939)> Rhum (Brown 1957)>
Freetown (Wells 1962) and Aberdeenshire gabbro (Stewart 1947)*

4.3.6 Mineralogy

3.6.1 Ma jor constituents

The rock types are composed of various combinations of the five
main minerals calcic plagioclase, magnesian olivine, titaniferous
augite, orthorhombic pyroxene and secondary amphibole together with
magnetite, ilmenite, brown amphibole, quartz, biotite and apatite as
notable accessories.

Plagioclase
Plagioclase, the major component is present as light grey laths
with abundant carlsbad-albite twins around which the other minerals
have developed. The crystals are quite variable in size and generally
euhedral in shape, the original straight edges being slightly modified
by addition of a thin rim of feldspathic material deposited from inter-
cumulus phase. Zoning is well developed in plagioclase which crystall-
ized from intercumulus liquid (fig. 4-4a).

The shape of feldspars is related to its crystallization. The

cumulus plagioclase is normally tabular on (010) and are roughly 3-5
times longer than wide. It is due to this habit that igneous lamination
is so well developed. In contrast, the intercumulus feldspars which
crystallized from pore-spaced trapped liquid are irregular in shape,
(fig. 4-4a, c). Zoning is normally present, but in some plagioclase
cumulate layers zoning is practically absent which may indicate a high
degree of homogenisation as a result of adcumulus growth.

The composition of the feldspars was determined by the immersion

method and chemical analyses of CaO content of the separated mineral
 115-

(fig. 4-10). The obvious oscillatory range in composition over the

whole series of units is comparable to that in the Rhum intrusion
(Brown 1956).

The most calcic plagioclases are unaltered and occur in the

plagioclase-olivine cumulates. It is considered that this plagioclase
was primarily in equilibrium with basic magma. The less calcic
plagioclase is altered by sericitisation and epidotization and occurs
in layers which were partly or entirely affected by amphibolitization.

Pyroxenes
Both clino- and orthopyroxenes occur as primary cumulus and inter-
cumulus phases (fig. 4-4©> i and j), but data are not available for
an adequate discussion of their nature and variation in composition.

In general appearance the clinopyroxene is uniform, purplish in

thin sections and usually, shows tiny oriented brown exsolution
inclusions and fine exsolution lamellae and is rarely twinned on (100).

As a cumulus phase it is mostly present in units which were

amphibolitized. The crystals are prismatic, ranging from 0.5 to 4 mm.
and averaging 2 mm. across. Composite grains are frequently observed
in sections from the layered zones. As an intercumulus phase it forms
large poikilitic crystals enclosing numerous grains of plagioclase
(fig. 4-4e). The optical data on a few selected grains indicate a
uniform composition of Ti-augite with 2V averaging 50-55° and. V*
1,715-1,715.

Relict pyroxenes in amphibolitized rocks have the same shape and

optical properties as the clinopyroxene in unaltered plagioclase-
pyroxene and plagioclase-olivine cumulates.

Orthorhombic pyroxene is fairly pleochroic with X = pink, Y = very

pale green and Z = very pale green. It occurs in some layers as primary
cumulus minerals and more commonly it forms rims around olivines
(fig. 4-4g and h).
 116,,

Olivine

Crystals of olivine are widely distributed throughout the

plagioclase-olivine layers in which they crystallized as a cumulus
phase. In habit they are tabular (OlO) and aligned parallel to
plagioclase imparting a distinct lamination to the rocks. Some
olivines in the layered rocks cluster together to form characteristic
chains in planes of lamination. The x-ray peaks of three separated
olivines from unit U and XI show range Fo 62-78.

The crystals are little serpentinised. They frequently contain

small grains of magnetite (fig. 4-4f).

Amphibole
A brown primary hornblende forms usually thin rims around
magnetite and clinopyroxene (fig. 4-4f). Several different amphiboles
are however found in the rocks affected by amphibolitization. Most
common is colourless tremolite forming fibrous aggregates within the
pseudomorphs after clinopyroxene. The pleochroic blue-green actinolite
surrounds the colourless amphibole in form of corona rim and in turn
is patchily replaced by brownish-green amphibole (fig. 4-5b and c).
Frequently amphibole occurs as narrow veins associated with fine
fractures.

3.6.2 Accessories

Quartz occurs mainly as clear fine-grained (0.01 - 0.5 mm.)

interstitial grains. Contacts between quartz grains are serrate and
they usually display undulatory extinction.

Biotite
A mi nor quantity of brown biotite is found associated with
magnetite or moulded on brownish-green hornblende (fig. 4-4f).

Other accessories include rare apatite.

 A1 Je'alani Layered Mass
Figure 4-4
(a to j taken in transmitted light)

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate showing zoned plagioclase.

CN, As-300, Unit XIII.

Plagioclase-olivine emulate showing deformed (bent)

plagioclase grain. CN, As-2$8, Unit X.

Plagioclase cumulate showing adcumulus texture in plagioclase

CN, As-322, Unit XI.

Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate showing well

developed primary planar fabric (igneous lamination).
CN, A S - 2 4 2 , Unit V.

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate showing intercumulus clinopyroxene

(cpx) rimmed by brown hornblende (hb). PPL, As-313, Unit XI.

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate showing a reaction rim of brown

hornblende around the opaque mineral. Hornblende (hb) is
fringed by biotite (bi). PPL, As-302, Unit XIII.

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate. Olivine (ol) grains show

reaction rims of orthopyroxene. PPL, As-230, Unit IV.

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate, olivine partly serpentinized

and rimmed by orthopyroxene (opx). Orthopyroxene is
interstitial. Plagioclase is cracked and partly saussuri-
tized. PPL, As-304, Unit XXV.

Plagioclase-olivine-pyroxene cumulate showing cumulus

orthopyroxene grains enclosed within interstitial clinopyroxene.
PPL, As-313, Unit XIII.

Plagioclase-olivine-pyroxene cumulate. Pyroxene with

exsolved opaque lamellae and rimmed with brown hornblende.
PPL, As-312, Unit XIII.
118. '
 A1 Jealani Layered Mass
Figure 4-3
(a to c taken in transmitted light)

Plagioclase-olivine cumulate showing symplectic intergrowth.

Olivine is altered to magnetite (mg) and serpentine (sp).
Well developed reaction rim of amphibole (am) and plagioclas
(pi) produced by reaction of olivine with calcic feldspar.
Amphibole and interstitial pyroxene (px) are altering to
chlorite (ch). PPL. 15A-662. DHL Samrah prospect.

Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate showing stages

of amphibolitization. Remnants of pyroxene (px) rimmed by
light coloured tremolite (tr) which is in turn rimmed by
light green actinolite (ac). Plagioclase is saussuritized
and amphibole partly altered to chlorite. PPL, As-280,
Unit XV.

Two stages of amphibolitization, shown by light coloured

tremolite (tr) around remnants of pyroxene (px),
actinolite (ac) light green, is fringing the tremolite
during the second stage of amphibolitization. The
amphiboles are altering to chlorite (ch), (c) cavities
in section. PPL, As-280, Unit XV.
120. '
 Alteration products consist of sericite, chlorite, serpentine,
calcite, epidote and prehnite.

3.6.3 Magnetic and related opaque minerals

The magnitude of the aeromagnetic anomaly of Al-Jealani intrusion

is attributed to the magnetic minerals in the rocks, mainly those in
the system Fe0-Ti02 - F e ^ . The TJlvo-spinel-magnetite series
(Fe9TiO. - Fe^O.) is most important magnetically, followed by less
c. 74
important phases in the ilmenite-hematite series. Maghemite and
pyrrhotite also have significant magnetic susceptibilities.
The opaque minerals make up not more than of the rocks and
are represented by the primary magnetic oxide and sulphide minerals,
magnetite, ilmenite, pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite and by secondary
hematite, sphene and pyrite. The oxide minerals predominate.

Iron-Titanium oxides:
No concentrations of any kind have been found in this intrusion.
Only disseminations of commonly coexisting ilmenite and magnetite
grains are present attaining a maximum diameter of 1.0 cm. In
polished section, the ilmenite and magnetite are in approximately
equal amounts. The most common habit of both oxides is stumpy, anhedra,
individual or intergrown grains, interstitial with silicate minerals
(fig. 4-6a, "b, d and f).

Magnetite:
In polished section magnetite is bluish grey or light pink, iso-
tropic and non-pleochroic. It occurs in three characteristic forms:

a) Interstitial and partly poikilitic magnetite is usually

intergrown with ilmenite (fig. 4-6b, c and d). It occurs
as an accessory mineral in plagioclase-olivine and plagio-
clase-pyroxene cumulates. Hematite develops within magnetite
as an alteration product due to incipient weathering along
octahedral cleavage planes, cracks and marginal holes (fig.
4-6b and c).
 b) Subhedral, small grains (0.2 = 0.5 mm.), (fig. 4-6b),
occasionally intergrown with ilmenite. Martitization is
developed at margins, cracks and octahedral planes. Poiki-
litic magnetite grains are rare. In As-245> 246 it makes
up 2-3 percent of the rock.

0) As fine coatings in cracks and margins of olivine grains as a

result of incipient alteration (fig. 4-4f).

Ilmenite:
In polished section ilmenite is light brown, slightly pleochroic
and strongly anisotropic. It commonly contains exsolved hematite
along cleavage planes. Ilmenite occurs in two forms:

a) Intergrown with magnetite in clusters of grains interstitial

to other cumulus silicate minerals in amphibolitized and
fresh rocks (fig. 4-6).

b) As individual subhedral small grains or intergrown with mag-

netite (fig. 4-6e). In As-245 it makes up 2-3# of the rock.

c) As minute blades possibly of exsolution origin in some pyro-

xene grains.

Hematite:
In polished section the mineral is white to light grey, non-
pleochroic, anisotropic, with characteristic internal reflections.
Hematite occurs as:

1) exsolved blebs and lamellae in ilmenite and in magnetite,

(fig. 4-6 a and f).
2) secondary, due to incipient alteration of magnetite (fig.
4-6b and c).

Sphene:
In polished section, it is grey, anisotropic, non-pleochroic with
strong internal reflections. Sphene occurs in ilmenite as a replacement
mineral along the margins and cleavage planes (fig. 4-6d).
Table 4-1

Electron micro probe analyses of some co-exisfcing magnetites and ilmenites

SAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Ilmenite PeWt$ 36.7 37.0 40.9 40.4 37.3 39.0 38.8

Ti 29-7 30.2 31.8 33.6 27.7 28.3 28.1

Eh 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5

TOTALS: 66.8 67.6 72.9 74.2 65.5 67.8 67.4

Equiva- PeO 47.2 47.6 52.6 51.9 48.0 50.2 49.9

lent TiO. 53.0 47.2 46.9
49.5 50.4 56.0 46.2
oxides MnOc.
0.5 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6

TOTALS: 97.2 98.5 105.9 108.2 94.8 98.0 97.4

Magnet- PeWt$ 73.4 72.5 70.5 71.6 72.8 69.9 70.7

ites Ti 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Mh 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05

TOTALS: 73.55 72.65 70.65 71.75 72.95 70.05 70.8

Equivalent oxides of PeO and F e ^ in (Pe0.Pe20^) are more or less

identical to the published ratio 68.97$ F and 31.03$ PeO.
p
2
 124-

Sample 1 and 2 from Samrah hole No. 1 at depth of 632 feet, from
plagioclase-orthoclinopyroxene cumulate.

Sample 3 and 4 are from (AS-345) U N I T VII o f Al-Jealani intrusion in

amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate.

Samples 5, 6 and 7 are from (As-220) Unit 1,-amphibolitized plagioclase-r

pyroxene cumulate.

The paucity of opaque oxidic minerals of economic interest was

supported by panning concentrates from the weathered residue and
stream wash within the area of outcrop of intrusion. Semi-quantitative
spectrographic analyses of 18 heavy concentrates showed uniformly low
levels of the ore metals as follows:

V 400 to 800 ppm Cu 20 to 40 ppm

Ni 50 to 150 ppm Co 30 to 80 ppm

3.6.4 d. Sulphides:
The sulphide minerals are rare in both the fresh unaltered gabbros
and the amphibolitized gabbros.

Pyrrhotite:
In the southern isolated parts of Al-Jealani intrusion within the
area of Samrah ancient mine, pyrrohotite occurs as small individual
strongly anisotropic grains, or as remnants in secondary pyrite grains
in the northern part of the intrusion.

Electron micro-probe analysis of pyrrohotite grain

Ee 60.3
Ni 0.4
S 38.2
Total 98.9$

Chalcopyrite:

Apart from its occurrence in the vein deposits of Samrah mine,

it occurs as small blebs within secondary pyrite.

* See appendix 1 for the other elements

 A1 Jealani Layered Mass
Figure k~6
(a to j taken in reflected light)

Poikilitic ilmenite (ilm) with exsolved lamellae of hematite

(hm). PPL, As-365, Unit VI.
Compound grains of ilmenite (ilm) and magnetite (mg). The
magnetite is replaced along cracks and octahedral planes by-
hematite (hra). PPL, As-245, Unit VII.

Compound grain of ilmenite (ilm) and magnetite (mg). The

ilmenite shows exsolved lamellae of hematite. The magnetite
is replaced by hematite along octahedral crystal planes.
PPL, As-363, Unit VI.

Ilmenite (ilm), poikilitic, altering to sphene (sph). A

small magnetite grain enclosed in the ilmenite is partially
replaced by hematite. PPL, As-245, Unit VII.
Ilmenite (ilm), cumulus, in variable grain sizes partly
enclosed in a pyroxene grain. A compound ilmenite magnetite
grain is shown. PPL, As-337, Unit V.

Ilmenite intercumulus, showing interstitial growth with

silicates. PPL, As-220, Unit I.
Cumulus ilmenite (ilm) showing exsolved lamellae of sphene
(dark grey). PPL, As-337, Unit V.

Letrital ilraenite (ilm) grain from a stream draining

Unit XII. The grain shows alteration to hematite (hm).
PPL, SA-1.

A grain of millerite (mi), NiS, and another of pyrite.

PPL, 1SA-485, DEL, Samrah prospect.

Pyrite (py) replaced by gangue and hematite (lira), small

chalcopyrite grains (cp) are present. PPL, As-220, Unit I.
 Pyrites
In the layered intrusion pyrite is rare. It occurs commonly in
individual small grains relative to the opaque oxide minerals, or as
microscopic veinlets interstitial to silicate minerals, or as anhedraiL
aggregates (fig. 4-6i and j).

4.3*7 Textures

3.7.I General textural characteristics

The textural features of the layered rocks are similar to those

already described by Wager and Deer for Skaergaard and Brown for Rhum.
It is considered that the textures of the basic intrusions are the
result of crystal accumulation of cumulus minerals which crystallized
from primary precipitate liquid followed by interstitial crystalli-
zation from the pore space trapped liquid.

Such textural relations of the rock reflect the process of accumu-

lation of early formed crystals on the floor and sides of the conical
magma. chamber and the building up of a solid mass by the deposition of
layer upon layer.

Both ferromagnesians and plagioclases display a well developed

alignment of tabular grains which emphasises the lamination of the
rock. For the most part, textures are typically igneous. Fine ex-
solution lamellae in pyroxenes and twinning in plagioclase are the same
as in unmetamorphosed layered, basic masses. Blue-green amphibole is
post consolidation in origin.

The textures of cumulates vary considerably (fig. 4-4 ) depending

on the shape of cumulus grains and on the degree of post cumulus modi-
fications .

Plagioclase is the dominant cumulus phase in all units and is the

only cumulus phase in rocks with plagioclase as an essential mineral.
Other cumulus minerals are ' clinopyroxene, olivine and rarely ortho-
pyroxene. Post cumulus material includes plagioclase, opaque minerals,
clinopyroxene and orthopyroxene (fig. 4-4a, i and j).
 128-

3.7*2 Textures of orthocumulates,

The characteristic cumulates represented by unaltered gabbroic

rock horizons are predominantly orthocumulates invariably grading into
mesocumulates. The prevailing plagioclase-olivine orthocumulates are
characteristically developed in unit IB they also form thin horizons
in units IV and V, and become predominant cumulates in the upper part
of the layered mass forming numerous horizons in units VIII to XIV.
Cumulus minerals are plagioclase, olivine,hypersthene, and augite.
Intercumulus minerals include augite, hypersthene, brown hornblende
and biotite.

The modal variation through the layered mass (fig. 4-8 ) show
fairly uniform content of the cumulus minerals. A typical plagioclase-
olivine orthocumulate from unit VIII (As-252) is perhaps the commonest
rock type consisting of 600 plagioclase and 390 ollvlM. In most cumu-
lates of this type, olivine amounts approximately to half of the feld-
spar content. Plagioclase grains are tabular, flattened parallel to
(010), they range in length from 2 to 4 - and display striking planar
alignment (fig. 4-4d). The observed zoning in plagioclase (fig. 4-4a)
indicates that the cumulus plagioclase may have amounted to no more
than 350 of the total volume of the rock. As a result of rapid cooling,
zones of lower temperature plagioclase were deposited over the early
cumulus grains. In contrast, the intercuimalus feldspar is irregular
in shape and entirely interstitial.

Partly serpentinized olivine forms single grains or clusters

ranging in length from 1 to 2 mm. Most of the grains are aligned paxa^
llel to feldspars. Partial serpentinization took place with increased
volume causing a dense fracturing in plagioclase that surrounded olivine.

The clinopyroxene forms large poikilitic plates enclosing cumulus

olivine and plagioclase (fig. 4-4e).

Sli^itly pleochroic orthopyroxene occurs- in reaction rims around

olivine. Pew orthopyroxenes crystallized from intercumulus liquid and
some display symplectie exsolution relation with iron oxide.
 130-

Units
Fig.- 4-8
\ T H E VARIATION OF MODAL ANALYSES OF
XV
ROCKS WITH HEIGHT

XIV

XIII

Xit

XI

IX

VIII

VI1

VI

'V

III

20 40 60 20 40 20% 40 -i 1—t i 1
20% 40 0 20 % 40
% %.
PLAGIOCLASE AMPHIBOLE OLIVINE OPX, CPX,
 131-

Iron oxide and biotite present in accessory amounts appear to

have crystallized from intercumulus liquid. In most plagioclase-
olivine cumulates, late stage reaction rims are exceptionally well
developed. The olivines rimmed by hypersthene, clinopyroxenes and
iron oxides often display rims of primary brown hornblende and less
commonly biotite. The plagioclase-ortho-, clinopyroxene cumulates form
the unit 6. Both pyroxenes occur in tabular prisms orientated paral-
lel to plagioclase. Narrow zoning and fingery outgrowths may represent
addition of material from intercumulus phase. Iron oxide forms incom-
plete rims around pyroxenes.

Thin layers of plagioclase-clinopyroxene cumulate (As-259) occur

amongst the rhythmically layered succession of plagioclase-olivine
cumulate in unit XI. A rare example of plagioclase- clino-orthopyroxene-
olivine cumulate occurs at the base of unit XQl(As-27l) with pyro-
xenes forming large aggregates (4 x 10 mm) and scattered olivines
averaging 0.2 mm in length. Both are poikilitically enclosed by
brown hornblende of late crystallization.-

3.7.3 Texture of adcumulates

Most of plagioclase cumulates forming 1 anorthosite* horizons dis-

play typical adcumulate to mesocumulatetextures. Several of such
layers occur in the lower part of unit I and through entire thickness of
unit H . They range in thickness from 3 cm. up to 2 m and often dis-
play marked transitions to plagioclase-olivine or plagioclase-olivine-
clinopyroxene cumulate. Generally, the plagioclase content is high
within the range 90-97$. Accessory minerals include clinopyroxene or
secondary amphibole in pseudomorphs after clinopyroxene, serpentinized
olivine and iron oxides. Fine scale rhythmic layering is best developed
where plagioclase is found forming monomineralic layers. The feldspar
rich layers are usually lensoid and they are rarely followed along
strike for long distances. Marginal zoning of plagioclase is well
developed in most feldspar rich layers and it is attributed to adcunru-
lus growth from the pore-space liquid.
 The plagioclase is clouded with secondary alteration products
such as sericite and rumerous well orientated ultrafine rods of iron
oxides. Other secondary products include epidote, chlorite, calcite,
quartz, iron oxide, sphene and prehnite.

3.7*4 Textures of amphibolitized cumulates

The plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates were affected at post consoli-

dational stage by a variable degree of amphibolitization. Nearly all
textures of amphibolitized rocks display a conspicuous replacement of
clinopyroxene by colourless and pale blue-green amphiboles. Amphibole
crystals may form a replacement for either pyroxene and/or brown horn-
blende or plagioclase. This replacement is often pseudomorphous after
the - clinopyroxene so that the original orientation and poikilitic
texture wherever present is preserved. The colourless amphibole, often
developed in the centres of the grains, grades peripherally into a
blue-green variety. The amphiboies occur as fibres of rugged prisms
with irregular outgrowth which occasionally obliterate the original
outlines of the pyroxenes.

3.7.4a Types of amphibole grains

1. Single crystal grains: In many of the rocks (As-223) a pale

blue-green amphibole is developed marginally to the pyroxene. Primary
brown amphibole is often left as a relict grain, separated from the
pyroxenes which then appear as inclusions in optical continuity,
entirely surrounded by amphibole. In some extreme cases of replacement
the pyroxene retains its original appearance in ordinary light abut
loses its normal colour and shows the lower order of interference col-
ours of amphibole. Spry ( 1 9 6 9 ) states that single crystal pseudo-
morphs require a considerable degree of structural similarity between
the primary and secondary minerals and probably a considerable retention
of original structural units occur. This seems to apply to the replace-
ment of brown amphibole and pyroxene by colourless or blue-green amphi-
bole, all three of which are structurally similar.

2. Multilattice grains: In this type, the grains consist of a

number of elongate sub-grains which may show a range of extinction
angles indicating different orientations.
 133-

3. Disoriented aggregate-grains: They may show development of a

large number of amphibole subgrains, elongate along cleavage, all
showing identical extinction positions, though not necessarily of the
host grain. A patchy type shows at random orientation. Relict tex-
tures and the original shape of the pyroxene are recognizable in all
sections, except for the primary grain boundaries which become indis-
tinct because the crystal mesh often appears to extend over what must
have been several original grains with rather complex margins.

The aggregate-grains of amphiboles are also seen growing in plagio-

clase. The boundaries of many plagioclase grains appear to have been
altered considerably by external prisms of amphibole which in part
replace feldspars.

3.7»4"b Grain boundaries

The most important grain boundaries are those between plagioclase

and amphiboles. The regular boundaries are sharply defined and are
either straight or more often consist of a small number of simple
curves. Irregular or serrate grain boundaries consist of a series of
sharply dentate contacts. Invariably in this type, the comb-like
boundary is formed by growth of amphibole at the expense of feldspar.

In many cases of irregular feldspar-amphibole boundaries, the

feldspar margin shows a certain amount of straining. Irregular bound-
aries are also associated with amphibole veinlets, where these pass
through plagioclase.

Boundaries which are highly serrated and irregular are basically

unstable and they must be preserved in a rock in metastable state.

3.7*4c Two stages of amphibolitization: In most amphibolitzed

cumulates, amphiboles occur in two generations (As-223). A fibrous
colourless tremolite forms disoriented aggregate-grains well confined
to pseudomorphs after pyroxene. Second blue-green pleochroic amphibole
forms well defined rim around tremolite. The tiny prisms of amphibole
in the rim are perpendicular to more centrally situated tremolite and
they penetrate into plagioclase (fig. 4-5 "b and c).
 134-

4.3*8 Petrography of the principal rock types

3.8.1 Modal data

Sixty specimens from the basic mass were examined modally to

give some indication of the compositional ranges found within the intru-
sion. The volumetric mineral compositions of selected specimens are
given in fig. 4-8.

Five essential minerals of both primary and secondary origin were

measured using a Swift automatic point counter. The primary minerals
include plagioclase, divine, clino- and orthopyroxene. The amphiboles
are predominantly secondary in origin and consists of colourless tremo-
lite and blue-green actinolite in a conspicuous pseudomorphous replace-
ment of clinopyroxene.

3.8.2 Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates (amphibolitized- .

gabbro)

These cumulates are the most abundant rocks in the layered intrusion.
They constitute over 60 percent of the exposed rocks.

Fractures parallel to layering and to primary igneous lamination

developed after crystallization is a common feature for most of the
layers.

Rhythmic layering is well represented by intercalations of leuco-

cratic and melanocratic layers.

In thin section the rock is medium-grained, roughly e qui granular

and consisting of plagioclase and amphibole, the former generally being
in excess of the latter, and making up about 55-65 percent of the
rock. Plagioclase forms prominent parallel orientated tabular crystals
with An content ranging from 50 to 60 though lower (An 40) and higher
(An 70) values have been recorded. Coarse grained rocks are uncommon
and only two layers were encountered. First layer containing over 5 per-
cent by volume interstitial opaques .occurs in the lower part of unit I.
 135-

Second, forms the lower part of unit VII. It contains large arihedral-
grains of plagioclase (5 to 10 mm in length) set in a groundmass of
tremolite-actinolite pseudomorphs after pyroxene and cumulus opaques.
(As-295, AS-246).

Plagioclase is generally fresh with slight clouding, but sericiti-

zation and saussuritization is seen to have developed adjacent to con-
tacts with local intrusives and in the lowermost layers. Strongly altered
plagioclase show dull pale brownish areas in between fibrous aggregates
of tremolite-actinolte and/or chlorite. Bent plagioclase laths are ,
observed adjacent to amphibole aggregates. Local cataclasis was
observed in rocks affected by dyke intrusions.

Throughout the amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates, the

primary pyroxenes have been amphibolitized, small irregular relics of
pyroxene remaining in the cores of small amphibole grains. Where the
pyroxene has been completely amphibolitized its original outline has
been retained and exsolved lamaellae preserved. The colourless amphi-
bole, often developed in the centres of the grains, grades peripherally
into a blue-green variety. Dusty brown hornblende is a frequent
interstitial mineral and in some instances it forms rims around the
green fibrous actinolite.

Chlorite occurs in appreciable amounts with less abundant calcite

and biotite often replacing amphibole in zones close to contacts with
younger intrusions. Opaque minerals, are usually interstitial and
poikilitic; they include magnetite, ilmenite, secondary hematite,
pyrite (both euhedral primary grains and secondary interstitial vein-
lets) and locally minute blebs of pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite.

Apatite is an accessory interstitial mineral in certain layers and

seldom exceeds 0.1 percent by volume. The relatively high values up to
two percent have been found at the western margin of the layered mass
(As 276)

3.8.3 Plagioclase-olivine cumulates (troctolite)

These cumulates form second most abundant rock type in the layered
series. They occur either as discontinuous arcuate conformable layers
 136-

(unitH and IV), or as continous concentric bands. Weathering has

produced dark grey spheroidal boulders at the surfaces of their
exposures. Typically, fresh plagioclase-olivine cumulate is composed
of plagioclase (labradorite) An^-An^, averaging approximately 65
percent by volume of the rock. Small rounded to subrounded grains
are included locally within olivine crystals or, rarely within inter-
stitial pyroxene. Euhedral olivine is the second cumulus mineral
averaging 25-30 percent. It occurs as large grains and as a rule is an
early formed constituent

When in contact with plagioclase, often displays corona reaction

rims, of orthopyroxene succeeded by an outer zone of brown hornblende.
Symplectic intergrowth and myrmikitic magnetite is common. Incipient
serpentinisation of olivine along cracks and around margins is wide-
spread.

Pyroxene is present either as an accessory fringing olivine or

forming an interstitial intercumulus phase which poikilitically
encloses labradorite and/or olivine grains. Pyroxene amounts to 10 per-
cent of the rock and usually orthopyroxene (hypersthene) is in excess
of clinopyroxene (augite). Hypersthene is light pink, pleochroic, with
exsolution lamellae and blebs probably of augite. Augite and titani-
ferous augite is either pink or brownish-green with well developed
schiller texture.

Plagioclase-olivine cumulates are mainly massive, but igneous lami-

nation is locally developed in units XIII and XIV (As 301, As 303 )•
Rhythmic layering is lacking in the major part of the layers, fine
banding on microscopic scale is due to variations in the relative pro-
portions of plagioclase and olivine giving alternative layers of plagio-
clase and plagioclase-olivine cumulate of the order of only 0.5 to 1
centimeter in width.

3.8.4 Plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine cumulate (olivine leuconorite)

Plagioclase pyroxene-olivine cumulate is present as one distinct

layer at the base of unit XIII (As 271).
 In appearance and texture the rock is similar to the plagioclase-
olivine cumulate, "being medium to coarse-grained and consisting
essentially of cumulus plagioclase, olivine and pyroxene. Due to
spheroidal weathering, "boulder strewn surfaces are characteristically
developed in most of the outcrops. Plagioclase is the most abundant
constituent in the rock, in places occurring as prominent parallel'
orientated laths, in others it is present as interstitial mineral.
They are commonly fringed by brown hornblende and, more rarely, by
biotite.

Olivine makes up about 20 percent of the rock, as ahhedral,

stumpy grains with incipient marginal and internal serpentinization.
Some small grains of olivine (0.2 mm in diameter) are included in
plagioclase or in pyroxene. Corona rims and symplectic intergrowths
are locally developed.

A specimen (As 321) taken from B-B» traverse from the same layer,
exhibited equal percentages by volume of both olivine and pyroxene,
with both pyroxenes in equal amounts. Titaniferous augite is in
cumulus occurrence while poikilitic hypersthene is intercumulus,
with corona rims of brown hornblende.

3.8.5 Plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate (norites)

Plagioclase-pyroicene cumulate is characterised by its

friable rock exposures, spheroidal weathering and ai rusty dark grey
surface. It is poorly exposed. The main mass of this cumulate forms
Unit "VI and some thin layers of the same composition are present at
the base of Unit XI. Igneous lamination is well exposed in all
exposures except in the south.

Plagioclase (volumetrically 50-65 percent) occurs as fine to

medium grained tabular fresh laths. Occasional bent laths are
observed in the neighbourhood of the pyroxene-grains. Hypersthene
(20-45-percent) occurs as small to medium grain sized grains, sub-
rounded, pleochroic from pink to pale brown with exolved lamellae
locally developed. Clinopyroxene (up to 15$) is usually associated
with hypersthene. Brown hornblende is a common accessory inter-
stitial mineral. Green hornblende constitutes 2-3 percent of the
rock and it appears to be confined to southern most exposures.

Brown biotite is also a minor accessory mineral, forming up to

2$ of the rock in the south. Biotite and, more particularly, horn-
blende form rims around pyroxenes and opaque minerals.

Magnetite and ilmenite are interstitial accessory minerals which

are locally poikilitic.

3.8.6 Plagioclase cumulates (anorthosites)

Commonly in thin layers (50-100 cm.), thicker layers up to 20 m

in width are occasionally present in units I and XI. They also occur
in inch scale layering alternating with mafic bands. Generally,
they are pale-white, pale-brown or pale-grey in colour. They contain
numerous dark spots of interstitial chlorite or amphibole pseudomorphs
after pyroxene. These cumulates are of variable grain size, but
coarse grained varieties are dominant. Primary igneous lamination is
developed in a few thin layers in unit I, where the rocks are dis-
tinctly fissile and contain over 95$ plagioclase.

Plagioclase cumulate layers are predominantly intercalated with

mafic layers within the amphibolitized units. Orthocumulates, with
few crystals showing primary zoning are in excess of adcumulate layers.

In thin section, labradorite and, in places, andesine form the

principal cumulus mineral comprising volumetrically between 80-100 per-
cent of the rock. The plagioclase is locally sericitized and/or
saussuritized, along grain margins in small irregular patches and along
prismatic planes. At contacts with younger intrusives, chlorite,
irregularly shaped grains of quartz, prehnite, epidote, calcite and
fine saussurite and sericite, are recognized as alteration products
(As-263b).
 The interstitial tremolite-actinolite is pseudomorphous
after pyroxene, with chlorite associated in stages of more advanced
alteration. The range of grain size for plagioclase is between
0.5 and 1 centimetre in length.

4.3.9 The characters of individual units of the layered series

Gneissic porphyroblastic adamellite envelopes the layered

intrusion, thus obscuring the relationship between the intrusion and
the primary country rock. The marginal gabbroic facies are partly
the result of post-intrusive tectonic stresses and partly the result
of initial emplacement into sedimentary succession which was
already heated by regional metamorphism and, therefore, no chilled
contacts are observed. Although the deformation of the whole intru-
sive mass has not been intense, there is a clear indication that the
southernmost part was disrupted by advancing younger granitic magma
that crystallized as porphyritic adamellite. Numerous inclusions of
variable sizes, consisting of olivine gabbro and heavily saussuritized
and chloritized gabbros, with primary textures preserved, have been
recognized and mapped at several localities around the southern regions
of the intrusive mass.

UNIT 1

Unit I, approx. 350 m thick as measured along traverse A-Af is fairly

well exposed at this locality except for the uppermost 80 m which
were studied outside the line of traverse. The rocks of this unit
display mafic layers of variable grain size, composition and texture,
alternating with narrower bands of anorthosite. The sequence of
rocks forming the Unit I is divided into ten subunits:

1-1, 16.5 m. (As-212): Coarse grained with plagioclase and amphibole

crystals ranging from 0.5 to 1.0 centimetre in length. The upper
part of this layer grades into coarse grained, mottled plagioclase
orthocumulate (An^).
1-2, 7*0 m.: Medium grained amphibolitized rock, strongly foliated
parallel to layering (fig. 4-3a), with, plagioclase and amphibole pre-
sent approximately in equal amounts.

1-3, 11.5 m. (As-215): Coarse grained, dark grey rock. Mineralogy

and volumetric proportions similar to subunit 1-2.

1-4, 41.0 m. (As-214, 216, 217, 218): Layered sequence, variable in

grain size, thickness and foliation. As-2l6 is composed of about
60 percent plagioclase and 40 percent amphibole (tremolite-actinolite).
Plagioclase is strongly sericitized. Three varieties of amphibole
are recognisedjcolourless tremolite in centres of grains, pale green
to green fibrous actinolite, usually rimming tremolite, and, locally,
brown hornblende rimming the actinolite.

1-5, 23.5 m. (As-219>s Mottled plagioclase-cumulate (anorthosite),

massive medium to coarse grained. The zoned plagioclase which makes
up about 97 percent of the rock, is partly sericitized and moderately
saussuritized. Poikilitic and interstitial chlorite and calcite
appear to pseudomorph pyroxene. Sub-poikilitic ilmenite and magnetite
are present as minor accessories.

1-6, 28.5 m. (As-220): This subunit consists of fine scale rhythmi-

cally layered plagioclase cumulate and light-coloured amphiboltized
plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate. Foliation is well developed in the
latter. A one metre wide band of massive, medium-grained rock in
the upper part of the subunit contains about 55 percent of opaque
minerals (mainly poikilitic magnetite and ilmenite, with secondary
hematite within the magnetite, with accessory pyrite grains enclosing
small blebs of pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite). The contacts between
layers are gradational. As-220 contains approximately 60 percent of
plagioclase and 35 percent of amphibole. Relic textures are well
preserved.

1-7, 19.0 m. (As-22l): Medium to coarse grained amphibolitized

plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate, moderately well foliated parallel to
 141-

layering. The central section contains a 0,5 m, wide mottled coarse

grained plagioclase cumulate layer with about 98 percent plagioclase,
slightly zoned and moderately sericitized. Poikilitic chlorite and
calcite pseudomorphs after pyroxene, accessory subpoikilitic magnetite
and apatite are also present. Contacts with anorthosite layer are
gradational.

1-8, 98.0 m. (As-222, 223. 224, 225): Amphibolitized plagioclase-

pyroxene cumulate, rhythmically layered with plagioclase cumulate
layers ranging from 0.4 to 1.0 m. in width. The amphibolitized rocks
in this subunit are foliated parallel to layering and show a higher
amphibole content, and finer scale rhythmic layering than similar
rocks in subunit 1-7. A massive 2 m. wide layer which is found in the
lower part of this subunit is composed of 60 percent amphibole and
40 percent plagioclase.

1-9j 18.0 m. (As-226): Massive leucocratic amphibolitized cumulate

of uniform composition. Plagioclase makes up about 60-70 percent of
the rock, amphibole approximately 30-40 percent. It becomes a plagio-
clase cumulate rock, where plagioclase is the only cumulus phase.
Amphibole pseudomorphs are essentially poikilitic, rimmed by accessory-
brown hornblende.

1-10, 87.0 m.: Exposures of this subunit are rather scarce in the
vicinity of the traverse, however, at the locality 300 m. to the west,
it is formed mainly of foliated fine to medium grained amphibolitized
cumulate layers, with interlayered thin anorthosites, rather similar
to subunit 8.

M I T II

This unit forms a semicircular ridge around the northern side

of the intrusive body. It attains a thickness of 72 m. at the locality
of the traverse. It forms a conspicuous landmark, rising up to about
70 m. above the more eroded underlying and overlying amphibolitized
gabbros. Surface outcrops of the unit are characteristically strewn
 142-

by spheroidally weathered boulders with rough knobbly surfaces (fig.

4-2b). The 'knobs' characterising the surfaces were formed as a
result of differential weathering of areas with low content of inter-
cumulus pyroxene. The rock is devoid of both rhythmic and igneous
lamination. In thin section (As-227) the rock displays a character-
istic plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate texture. The plagioclase
(An 62) constitutes 70 percent, and olivine about 20 percent of the
rock, both present as cumulate minerals. The olivine occurs as small
rounded to subrounded stumpy grains, and nearly all are affected by
slight internal and marginal serpentinization. Some very small rounded
cumulus olivines are enclosed in large tabular crystals of plagioclase.
Plagioclase adjacent to olivine grains is heavily fractured.

The intercumulus material is largely represented by titaniferous

augite, which forms large, optically continuous, poikilitic crystals
and interstitial grains. It makes up about 8 percent-of the rock.

Hypersthene is an accessory mineral, mainly restricted to corona

rims around olivine grains, but also forming an interstitial phase.
There is local symplectic intergrowth between hypersthene and magne-
tite.

UNIT III

Outcrops of this unit are rare. The amphibolitized cumulates

display foliation parallel to the margins of the unit. A secondary
cleavage striking N 45°E and dipping 70°SE is superimposed on this
unit. This cleavage is therefore at an angle of 15° with the N 60°E
strike of the layering (as measured along this traverse).

In thin section the rocks are essentially composed of 45-50 per-

cent cumulus plagioclase (An^0-An^g) and 50-55 percent amphibole e.g.
(As-229). Colourless, fibrous tremolite commonly forms the cores of
grains and is surrounded by pale green actinolite, in pseudomorph,
after pyroxene. Accessory dusty brown hornblende rims actinolite.
Opaque minerals include magnetite, ilmenite and secondary hematite.
They poikilitically enclose cumulus grains.
 143-

MIT IV

This -unit is composed of two massive plagioclase-olivine

cumulate layers separated by a layer of amphibolitized plagioclase-
pyroxene cumulate. Exposures are sporadic. A prominant feature
of the massive layers is their boulder strewn surface, which rises
1-2 m. above the surrounding ground. Small rounded 'knobs1 are
developed on the surface of the boulders. The plagioclase-olivine
layers are well exposed around the northwestern part of the intrusion.
They lens out to the south and to the east. This unit is sub-
divided into three subunits.

IV-I, 8.0 m. (As-250): Dark grey, massive, plagioclase-olivine

mesocumulate (troctolite). Boulders characterizing exposure surfaces
have small rounded to subrounded 'knobs' - averaging 3-7 cm. in dia-
meter. This subunit is devoid of both rhythmic layering and igneous
lamination. It is essentially composed of about 55 percent, fresh,
unzoned, tabular plagioclase and approximately 25 percent of cumulus
olivine forming small stumpy, subrounded grains. The olivines are
commonly fringed by hypersthene and brown primary hornblende, more
rarely by clinopyroxene. Incipient alteration to serpentine is seen
at the margins and along the cracks of the grains. Myrmekitic mag-
netite is occasionally developed at contacts between pyroxene and
plagioclase. Titaniferous augite with rims of hornblende and/or
hypersthene forms intercumulus phase (15 percent). Hypersthene (up
to 8 percent), also forms small interstitial grains. Accessory miner-
als include biotite, bio wn hornblende and opaque ore minerals. These
generally occur as interstitial grains or as rims around plagioclase,
olivine, and less commonly, titaniferous augite.

IY-2. 19.0 m.: Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate, strongly

foliated parallel to the contacts of the subunit. Plagioclase makes
up 45-60 percent of the rock, amphibole the remainder.

XV-5, 14.Q m. (As-25l): Dark grey, massive plagioclase-olivine ortho-

cumulate (troctolite). Surface strewn with boulders which have rounded
knobs' 5-10 cm. in diameter. This cumulate consists of about 65 per-
cent cumulus plagioclase (An^) (fresh, medium grained tabular crystals).
Locally small rounded olivine grains are included within the plagio-
clase, which also contain exsolved lamellae of rutile in some
grains. Olivine (30 percent) is the second cumulus mineral. It
occurs as small stumpy subrounded grains. Incipient alteration to
serpentine is developed along margins and cracks. The rock contains
up to 5 percent titaniferous augite forming large optically con-
tinuous grains poikilitically enclosing plagioclase and olivine. It
is randomly distributed in the rock. Accessory opaque minerals occur
as fine coatings along margins and cracks of olivine crystals, or as
subpoikilitic grains.

MIT V

This unit is 320 m. wide and is poorly exposed. It is made up

of amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates in which rhythmic
layering is well developed. There is a considerable variation in
grain size and intensity of foliation. Two narrow concordant- massive
layers occur in the lower part of this unit. They are more resistant
to erosion than the strongly foliated amphibolitized rocks and so
form good marker horizons. The plagioclase content in this unit
varies from 40 to 65 percent. This unit is subdivided into the fol-
lowing subunits:

V-I, 40.0 m. (As-232, 235): Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene

cumulate. Primary igneous lamination is well developed and imparts
a strong foliation to the rock which consists of 50 percent of zoned
cumulus plagioclase and about 30 percent amphibole. Pyroxene (15
percent) and chlorite are also present. Amphibolitization of pyro-
xene is clear and well represented. Pyroxene remnants, mainly green
titaniferous augite, display irregular grains and patches, always
rimmed by fibrous actinolite. Relics of exsolved lamellae are still
present in the completely amphibolitized grains. Chlorite is secondary
after pyroxene.

V-2, 15.0 m. (As-234): Identical to subunit 3> Unit IV.

 I k5*

V-5, 90.0 m. (As-235): Identical to subunit 1 of Unit V.

V-4» m.
15.0 (AS-236): Identical to subunit 3 IN Unit IV, and subunit
2 in Unit V.

V-5, 160 m. (As-237, 238, 259, 240, 241, 242): Most of the rocks in
this subunit are banded. They exhibit strong primary foliation para-
llel to the banding -which is composed of alterations of plagioclase-
rich and amphibole rich horizons. There are a few narrow layers of
massive amphibolitized gabbro and anorthosite.
UNIT VI
Plagioclase-hypersthene-clinopyroxene-orthocumulate (norite)
forms outcrops of this unit ranging in width between 60-100 m. It is
generally poorly exposed. Characteristic spheroidal weathering is
developed and 20-30 cm. diameter annular holes are developed in the
south. The rock is largely composed of plagioclase which varies from
50 percent in the west to 65 percent in the north (Table 4-2).
Cumulus hypersthene constitutes between about 20-40 percent. Titani-
ferous augite is also present as a cumulus phase and is usually
associated with the hypersthene in aggregates. In the south, the
rock is massive, but elsewhere a primary igneous lamination on a fine
scale is developed.

Table 4-2 Modal analyses of rocks from Unit VI

Sample Vol.$> Vol.-$ Vol. $ Vol. jo Vol. jo Vol. jo

Number Plagio- Opx. Cpx. Hb. Biotite Opaques Remarks
clase
As-243 65-0 30.0 4.0 1.0
North side of
intrusion
As-365 62.0 20.0 14.0 accessory accessory 4.0 East side of
intrusion
As-369 60.0 38.0 2.0 " - acc. East side of
intrusion
As-418 55.O 25.0 15.0 1.0 3.0 1.0 Southeast side
of intrusion
As-429 50.0 33.0 10.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 East side of
intrusion
As-289 55.O 42.0 2.0 0.5 accessory 0.5 West side of
intrusion
 146-

MIT VII

In the north this unit forms the widest succession of rhythm-

ically layered amphibolitized rocks (395 m.). It narrows towards
"both the eastern and western sides of the intrusion. The layers
within this unit vary in thickness, grain size, intensity of folia-
tion and in the relative proportions of essential minerals. Plagio-
clase and amphibole together make up over 95 percent of the rock.

VII-1, 135.0 m. (As-244, 245): Massive, coarse grained, amphiboli-

tized plagioclase-pyroxene orthocumulate. Plagioclase occurs as
large, tabular, euhedral-grains which show local zoning. It is
moderately sericitized, and occasionally has corroded margins.
Plagioclase is the main cumulus phase in the rock constituting 50-55
percent of the total volume. Amphibole, pseudomorphous after pyro-
xene forms the remainder. Small plagioclase grains are poikilitically
included within the larger crystals of amphibole which also occur as
smaller interstitial grains. Original pyroxene outlines and ex-
solution lamellae are preserved. Magnetite, ilmentite and secondary
hematite are present as fine grains, mainly associated with amphibole.
They form up to 5 percent of the rock.

yiI-2, 15.0 m.: Thinly foliated cumulate without conspicuous rhyth-

mic layering.

VII-5, 9 0 . 0 M. (AS-246): Identical to subunit I.

m. (As-247, 248): Alternating bands of poorly exposed

VII-4, 6 9 . 0
fine- and medium-grained plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate. Various
stages of amphibolitization are well displayed. Compositionally almost
identical to the subunits already described. Rhythmic layering is
poorly developed.

VTI-5, 88.0 m. (As-249. 25l): The uppermost part, of this subunit

shows inch scale rhythmic layering where narrow anorthosite bands
become abundant. Primary igneous lamination imparts a planar fabric
parallel to the layering. Plagioclase forms 60-70 percent of the
 147-

rock. Tr emolite-actinolite pseudomorphs after pyroxene are common

and display relic poikilitic textures. The amphibole is also inter-
stitial to plagioclase. Accessory opaque minerals are poikilitic
and are predominantly associated with amphibole.

MIT VIII

This unit is 108 m. thick along traverse A-A!. It shows dis-

tinct rhythmic layering between narrow layers of plagioclase-olivine
orthocumulate (5-10 m.), amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate
and very narrow plagioclase - cumulate layers. Layering on a
scale of 2-3 cm. is present between alternating leucocratic and
melanocratic bands in the amphibolitized rocks. The fresh, unaltered
rocks of plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate are coarser-grained than
the "underlying rocks of similar composition (As-252, 253). These are
the predominant rock types and form continuous outcrops around the
layered mass. They have characteristic 'knobbly4 boulder strevnsurface.
In thin section, the essential cumulus minerals are coarse grained
(0.2-0.5 cm.), and are laminated, with their long axes lying in a
subparallel orientation e.g. ( A s - 2 5 3 ) . Slightly zoned plagioclase
constitutes about 60 percent and olivine approximate 35 percent of
the total volume of the rock. Pyroxene is restricted to corona rims
around olivine crystals and to occasional small grains interstitial
to plagioclase.

Plagioclase-amphibole rocks and plagioclase cumulate layers in

tiis unit vary in grain size, in composition and in the development of
foliation parallel to layering. They show advanced stages of amphi-
bolitization of primary pyroxene, and are mineralogically identical
to other rocks of this type within the intrusion.

MIT IX

This unit is essentially formed of amphibolitized cumulate, inter-

calated with several layers of plagioclase cumulate rocks. Inch scale
rhythmic layering is well developed particularly towards the top of the
unit. The lower part of the unit is foliated parallel to layering,
where rocks (e.g. As-256, 257) show an igneous lamination of aligned
 148-

plagioclase and amphibole. Plagioclase is a dominant mineral and

forms 55-75 percent of the rock-, amphibole forms 25-45 percent.
Alternating coarse- and medium-grained rocks forming the upper part
of the unit do not show any primary mineral orientation.

MIT X

This unit is 67 m. wide and is mainly formed of coarse-grained

(0.2-0.7 m. ) plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate. Except for the
coarse grain-size, it is identical to Unit II. In thin section the
rock shows a very patchy distribution of pyroxene and olivine.
This texture can be directly related to the 'knobbly' texture of
w eathered surfaces, where olivine-rich areas are found to be more readily
decomposed. Zoned plagioclase (fig. 4-4b), makes up 65 percent of the
rock and olivine about 10 percent (eg. As-258). Both are cumulus
minerals. The olivine is extensively fringed by hypersthene and
brown hornblende. Incipient serpentinization along margins and
cracks is developed in some grains. Bypersthene and "titaniferous
augite are present, the former as large, optically continuous- poik-
ilitic grains which enclose both plagioclase and olivine. Pyroxene
makes up approximately 20 percent of the rock (e.g. As-258), but
this is probably anomalously high, as the mineral is so patchily
distributed.

UNIT XI

Rocks in this unit are generally coarse-grained and rhythmically

layered. They are mottled with sporadic patches of amphibole or
chlorite. Anorthosite (plagioclase • ..-„ cumulate) is predominant and
tend to form eroded areas in between layers of troctolite. Plagio-
clase-olivine orthocumulate, and more rarely, mesocumulate layers are
the second most abundant rock types within the unit.

The lowest part of this unit forms a 10 m. wide plagioclase-

hypersthene cumulate layer (e.g. As-259). It is exposed only at the
northern and western sides of the intrusion, and may be lacking
altogether in the south and east.

Plagioclase cumulate layers contain about 80-97 percent plagio-

clase. The slightly zoned, plagioclase is coarse-grained (0.3-1.0 mm.)
 149 •

and is moderately to strongly saussuritized and/or sericitized along

cleavage planes and along contacts with chlorite, prehnite and quartz
(e.g. As-263)a). Epidote as an accessory mineral is associated with
the interstitial chlorite or forms microstringers within plagioclase
grains (As-265).

MIT XII

This unit is divided into two subunits- a lower massive plagio-

clase-olivine orthocumulate and an upper massive plagioclase-olivine
mesocumulate interlayered with plagioclase-amphibole rock.

XII-1, 52.0 m. (As-269): Leucocratic cumulate containing about 75

percent plagioclase and about 20 percent olivine. Clino- and ortho-
pyroxene are present as intercumulus phases forming about 5 percent of
the rock, the former is in excess of the latter. They occur as small
interstitial grains or as corona rims around olivine. Accessory brown
hornblende rims pyroxene and, occasionally, olivine. Accessory biotite
and opaque minerals are also interstitial and are locally poikilitic.

XII-2, 50.0 m. (As-270, 578, 379): Dominantly plagioclase-amphibole

rock. However, a narrow band of massive, fresh plagioclase-olivine
cumulate layer outcrops in the central part of this subunit. Amphi-
bolitization stages are well displayed (e.g. As-379) where relics of
pyroxene are preserved. Plagioclase forms about 60 percent of the
rock, amphibole most of the remainder.

UNIT XIII

This unit, 262 m. wide across the measured traverse, is divided

into four subunits, a massive plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine ortho-
cumulate underlies massive plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate which is
interlayered with plagioclase-amphibole rock.

XIII-1, 15.0 m. (As-271): Massive, medium-grained, melanocratic

plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine orthocumulate. Plagioclase forms 45 per-
cent, hypersthene, 20 percent, titaniferous augite 15 percent, olivine
18 percent, biotite, and hornblende 2 percent by volume of the total
rock. Plagioclase, pyroxene and olivine are the cumulus phases. Brown
hornblende and brown biotite are interstitial and commonly surround
grains of pyroxene and olivine.

XIII-2, 136.0 m. (AS-3:76): Plagioclase-amphibole rock is medium-

grained and massive. Plagioclase forms between 40-55 percent of the
rock.

XIII-5, 15.0 m. (As-501): Plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate, with

primary igneous lamination. Plagioclase forms 65 percent of the rock,
olivine forms about 35 percent, both as cumulus phases. Hypersthene,
brown hornblende, biotite and opaque minerals are interstitial
accessories.

XIII-4, 98.0 m. (As-377): Plagioclase-amphibole rock much injected by

granitic dykes. Plagioclase averages between 50-60 percent of the
rock. There are bands of plagioclase cumulate.

MIT XIV

This unit is formed of leucocratic, fresh plagioclase-olivine

orthocumulate 32 m. wide along traverse A-A1. Igneous lamination is
well developed. Plagioclase makes up 75 percent, olivine 23 percent,
and hypersthene 2 percent of the total volume of the rock. The hyper-
sthene occurs both as coarse rims around olivine and as interstitial
grains.

MIT XV

This unit is formed of amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumu-

late and occupies the oval-shaped core of the intrusion. Its relief
is lower in relation to the surrounding massive layers and exposures
are scarce, being concealed by a thin alluvial gravel and sand cover.
This central area is much affected by granitic and pegmatitic dyke
intrusions. The rock is fine- to medium-grained and locally shows
igneous lamination (e.g. As-380). Plagioclase makes up 35-60 per-
cent, amphibole replacing pyroxene makes up the remainder.
 151 •

4.3*10 Geochemistry

3.10.1 "Whole rock analyses

Five rock analyses are represented in table 4-3 of which two

are plagioclase - clinopyroxene cumulates which were amphiboltized.
The plagioclase - olivine cumulates have the composition of a satu-
rated basaltic magma with a high alumina content and tholeiitic af-
finities. It is similar to analyses of the Skaergaard chilled
marginal gabbro (table 4-4) but differs from Stillwater in having
more Na20 and a lower Fe^y'FeO ratio.

Both quartz and olivine are absent from the CIPW norm, so that
the presence of these minerals in the layered rocks is indicative of
strong crystal fractionation.

Table 4-3

As-227 As-300 As-289 As-239 As-308

Si02 WT$ 49.03 43.51 48.32 49.01 48.46

Ti02 2.52 2.01 2.02 1.06 0.56
A1 19.3Q 21.41 16.62 18.41 20.71
2°3
Fe 1.05 22.37 3.32 1.39 2.15
2°3
FeO 6.00 5.20 9.34 4.03 5.02
MnO 0.23 0.25 0.18 0.19 0.32
MgO 7.05 5.89 3.90 4.42 4.73
CaO 11.60 13.00 13.30 11.80 11.90
Na20 3.37 5.63 3.37 2.97 4.10
K2O 0.34 0.47 0.53 1.08 0.53
H2O 0.60 0.70 0.30 7.00 2.00
P 0.00 0.00 0.51 0.01 0.01
2°5

As-227 = Plagioclase-olivine-orthocumulate (Troctolite) Unit II

As-300 = » " orthocumulate (Troctolite) Unit XIII
As-289 = " Bypersthene orthocumulate (Norite) Unit VI
As-239 = " -clinopyroxene cumulate (Amphibolitized) Unit Y
As-308 » » " ( " ) Unit XV
Table 4-4

1 2 3

Si02 48.01 49.70 50.55

Ti02 1.51 0.16 0.66
A1
2°3 19.11 22.04 15.23
Je 0 1.20 0.66 1.04
FeO 8.44 4.02 10.07
MHO 0.12 0.09 0.23
MGO 7.72 7.03 8.30
CaO 10.33 13.59 11.30
Na20 2.34 1.79 2.24
K2O 0.17 0.07 0.19
H20+ 0.55 0.82 0.24
H2O- 0.05 0.09 -

P2O5 0.069 0.02 0.12

Total 99.62 100.11 100.18

1. Chilled marginal Skaergaard gabbro of Tranquil Division, Wager

and Brown (1968 Table 7)«

2. Composite sample of 40 specimens from the norite, anorthosite and

gabbro zones, (Hess (1960) Table 32).

3. Fine-grained hypersthene gabbro, Bushveld Marginal Group (Wager

and Brown (1968) Table 26.

3.10.2 Strontium in plagioclase

3.10.2a Introduction
The main purpose of these investigations was to establish:
 1. The relationships between amphibolitized rocks and un-
altered cumulates.

2. The derivation and genetic relations of the numerous xeno-

liths enclosed in the granite.

3. To delineate the disrupted southern margin of the intrusion.

The geochemical relationships between, Sr and Ca has been investi-

gated by numerous geochemists. According to Goldscbmidt (1954) there
is a tendency for certain minor elements to follow major elements of
similar ionic radius and bond type. This suggestion is exemplified by
strontium which is concentrated in Ca-rich minerals.

Investigations "into the relationship between Sr and Ca in both

basaltic and gabbroic rocks have been carried out by Nockolds and
Mitchell (1948), and by Wager and Mitchell (1951). Heier and Taylor
(1959) have discussed the ability of Sr to replace Ca and K in the
feldspar lattice.

Heier (1962) discovered that plagioclase in the range from

oligoclase to labradorite contains the highest Sr values (898-1129
p.p.m.)., and that more calcic and more sodic members have relatively
low Sr content.

Turikian and Kulp (1956) suggested the hypothesis that the

strontium content in basaltic or gabbroic rocks is dominated by the
regional differences in strontium content of the source magma and the
fractional crystallization and differentiation conditions.

Butler and Skiba (1962) pointed out that plagioclase from

Somalian layered gabbros held the most of the strontium which varied
between 1000 and 1850 p.p.m. and tended to increase as An decreases
from An68 - An^.

Skiba and Butler (1963) attempted to distinguish between amphi-

bolites derived from gabbros and those of the country rock derived
from impure lime-magnesia sediments. They found that the Sr content
of plagioclase from the country rock amphibolites was almost invariably
 154-

beloW the range 1000 - 1450 p.p.m., which was characteristic of

plagioclase from gabbro. and metagabbro. Also, the distribution of
Sr values for the country-rock amphibolites is so haphazard that
they cannot be genetically related to the gabbro and metagabbro mas-
ses. With reference to amphibolitization of a gabbro mass the authors
found that amphibolitization had little effect on the original Sr and
An contents of the plagioclase which crystallized from the initial bas-
ic magma.

3.10.2b Strontium in plagioclase from Al-Jealani intrusion

The intrusion is dominated by amphibolitized rocks interlayered
with unaltered cumulates. Plagioclase separated from 38 represent-
ative samples, showed a fluctuating An content throughout. The Sr
of the plagioclase was found to increase with decreasing An content,
which ranged from -

The Sr content varies between 840-1700 p.p.m., except for one

anomalously high value (2225 p.p.m.) in an amphibolitized gabbro with
An^, (As-294)• The mean average for Sr from all the investigated
samples apart from the highly Sr-enriched one is 1405 p.p.m. Por the
plagioclase separated from fresh cumulates, the average Sr content was
1402 p.p.m., which is very close to the average Sr content, for the
amphibolitized rocks (1407 p.p.m.). The anorthite content for fresh
unaltered cumulates ranges between An„A - An™, that for amphibolitized
70 58
gabbros between -Angy -

Table 4-5 Sr and An in plagioclase in Al-Jealani intrusion

An content
Sample p . Immer- Chem. Sr
0 type
No. sion analyses (p.p.m.)

AS-214 Amphr-plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 59 915

As-221 Plagioclase cumulate (anorthosite) 48 40 1405
As-391 Amphi, plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 63 55 1195
As-392 ti it H
56 42 84
As-226 it n 11 11
67 56 1047
As-227 Plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate (tro-
ctolite) 62 59 950
 155,

An content
Sample Rock Type Immer- Ghem. Sr
No. sion analyses (p.p.m.)

As-235 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 52 50 1270

As-239 ti 11 it if 62 57 1325
As-240 it n 11 it 56 54 1343
As-247 it it it it 55 50 1570
As-249 11 ti it •» 51 47 1721
As-253 Plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate (tro-
ctolite) 58 61 1260
As-257 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 48 32 ' 1370
As-261 Plagioclase-olivine orthocumulate (tro-
ctolite) 58 57 1518
As-264 n it 11 58 60 1465
As-266 11 11 11 59 61 1660
As-377 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 51 49 1420
As-379 11 ti » 55 52 1600
As-380 11 11 11 55 - 1660
As-276 it ti 11 57 66 1410
As-278 11 it 11 59 49 1340
As-284 it it « 56 49 1447
As-289 Plagioclase-hypersthene cumulate (norite) 59 58 1610*
As-308 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 57 56 1635
As-317 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 66 68 1385
As-295 Amphi plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 63 - 1195
As-304 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 70 66 1372
As-271 Plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine cumulate
(noritic troctolite) 66 —
1425
As-300 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 63 - 1415
As-329 Amphi, plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 56 - 1715
As-333 it ti it 56 45 1590
As-269 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 52 - 1380
As-236 Plagioclase n
" 67 60 1138
As-283 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 59 47 1425
As-319 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 63 61 1367
AS-394 Amphi. plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 60 60 1235
As-241 i» ti tt 52 51 1428 .
As-280 ti ti ti 50 43 1382
 157-

An content
Sample limner- Chem. Sr
No. Rock Type sion analyses (p.p.m.)

As-455 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (xenolith) 62 60 1250

As-455 Amphibolitized plagio. pyroxene cumulate
55 1450
(xenolith)
58 1520
As-456 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (xenolith)
A s - 4 6 4 Amphibolitized plagioc-pyroxene cumulate
(xenolith) 55 1545
As-445 " (xenolith) 48 1190

Table 4-6 Sr and An in plagioclase from rocks in Arja basic intrusion

Plagioclase
Sample An $ Sr
No. Rock Type Wt. (p.p.m.)
Xmmer- Chem.
sion anal.

Ar-85 Plagioclase-olivine cumulate (troctolite) 67 42 I663

Ar-86 Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumul-
ate 60 51 1585
Ar-88 " " " 59 58 1130
G-301 Plagioclase-clinopyroxene (ti-augite)
cumulate 56 46 2050
G-302 Amphiboltized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 56 45 1112
G-303 Plagioolase-clinopyroxene (titano-augite)
cumulate 59 55 792
G-304 Amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulate 56 47 1940
11
G-305 " " 63 45 982
11
G-306 " " 45 57 810

G-299 Plagioclase-clinopyroxene cumulate 45 55 IO67

G-349 Plagioclase-cumulate (anorthosite) 59 56 1482

3.10.23 Strontium in plagioclase from xenoliths

Many large xenoliths have been mapped outside both intrusions. Some
of them are concentrated towards the southern margin of the Al-Jealani
mass. Attention is directed to xenoliths with variable content of
feldspar, biotite and/or hornblende. The field evidence alone is
not sufficiently diagnostic to determine parentage of these xeno-
liths and define the disrupted southern contact of the intrusion.
Although some of the xenoliths in the south exhibit similar petro-
graphy and texture to plagioclase-olivine cumulates cf the intrusion,
most have lost their primary texture and mineralogy.

Tables 4-5> 6, 7 & 8 and (figs. 4-9 and 4-10) give the data
which demonstrates a clear distinction between Sr-An values for
plagioclase from the layered masses and from the xenoliths in the
granite. Values in the polygon from the intrusions refer to fresh
cumulates and amphibolitized rocks. Relatively high values and
rather small variation of Sr with change of An content is observed
in (fig. 4-9) • Sr-An data from xenoliths are given in tables 4-7
an<
and 8. There is a widespread of An values from ^iLj.0 "to ^
the strontium varies appreciably from 205 to 1870 p.p.m. It is clear
that these rocks are unconnected genetically with the intrusions on
account of lower tenor of Sr and much greater variation of Sr with
change of An content. By a co-ordination of Sr/An data with care-
fully field mapping it is possible to extend the boundary of the
south main intrusive mass southwards to incorporate the large inclusions
which are genetically related to the intrusion.

Table 4-7 Sr and An content in plagioclase from country rock xenoliths

in the granitic rocks

Sample No. Rock type An Sr (ppm)

content
G-110 Biotite schist IT 450
G-136 IT It
12 630
G-159 tt tt
14 612
G-I64(b) tt tt
10 473
G-180(b) tt It
12 485
G-216 Amphibole schist 25 344
G-20.9 Biotite schist 10 490
G—210 tt it
10 660
 Fig. 4 — 9

G Sr-An Al Jedlani intrusion

2000] +
«« Basic xenoliths
800 • ..» Semipelitic xenoliths
A
600 »i Arja intrusion

400

200

1000-

800-

600 • •
BnM
•
400
• •
200 -I

1
—i 1— > " i" i i—
An70 An60 An50 . An40 An30 An 20 An 10
H
\J1
00

Plagioclase composition
 IV
0
o1 =3•^
O 3
I H III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII >:i\/
XV
\ X
\ s> \0 • / s' 0 o «|0|oi|l o"o ?I
0
,/0\O 0/ 0
/ 0\ 0
0 / 0 0 0
\ / 0X \ / \ / 0 iOlo loll. o"o !| \0o0/ > 0
Oo N 0 / \o/ • / 0 \ \ o
/ / \
N
/
/ / N > \ N 0 N' 0 0 3Q /O/ 0
0 0 O 0 c>00\0 \ o \0 V \ s
An%; r\
O TJ •
o r~ 60-J.
S >
§ 8 ^

GENERALIZED STRATIGRAPHIC AND N 42° W SECTIONS FOR H

V
VJO1
THE NORTHERN PART OF A L - J E A L A N I LAYERED BASIC MASS
Fig :4-10
 160-

Sample No. Rock type Ail Sr (ppm)

content

G-211 Biotite schist 17 330

G-215 " " 11 455
G-216 " " 13 495
G-218 " " 15 205
G-222 " 10 455

Table 4-8 Sr and An content in plagioclase from the basic xenoliths

in the granitic rocks

Sample No. Rock type An Sr (ppm)

content
G-114 Metadiorite 42 1060
G-116 Sheared microdiorite 37 765
G-153 Metagabbro 39 1010
G-163 1, 45 766
G-l64(a) tt 52 1505
G-204 11 48 880
G-207 Metadiorite 32 1675
G-212 Metagabbro 38 1025
G-214 ti 54 1275
G-217 Metadiorite 45 1870
G-263 it 42 770
G-264 ti 49 942
G-269 11 55 978

5.10.2d Summary and conclusions

From these measurements the following conclusions can be drawn:

l) Sr-An relationship in plagioclases from Al-Jealani mass,
is inversal i.e. the Sr content increases as the An content
decreases (fig. 4-9, 10). This is comparable to results
obtained from some Somalian (Skiba and Butler, 1963), and the
Stillwater (Turikian and Kulp, 1956) intrusions.
 161-

2) Amphibolitized cumulates and fresh unaltered cumulates show

almost identical Sr content of 1407 and 1402 p.p.m. respec-
tively. This indicates that both rock types originated
from one magmatic source.

3) The average Sr content of the rocks of the intrusion (1405

p.p.m.) is high relative to the average Sr content of the
pre-existing basic country rocks (492 p.p.m.) included
within the granitic rocks as xenoliths. This suggests that
the amphibolitized rocks of the intrusion are not pre-
existing amphibolite country rocks which have been injected
by gabbroic ring dykes, as Quin ( 1 9 6 4 ) concluded.

4) The plagioclase has a fluctuating An content (fig. 4-10 )

from bottom to top. In all the samples studied, the An con-
tent of plagioclase changes abruptly from about 60-70 per-
cent in unaltered cumulates to approximately 40-60 percent
in amphibolitized rocks. This change is associated with
the equally abrupt appearance of epidote and sericite in
plagioclase and also amphibolitization of pyroxene. The
change of An content in plagioclase is, therefore, linked
with secondary reaction as the result of interstitial water.

5) Samples collected from the marginal layers of the intrusion

or nearby contacts with granitic intrusions, show low anorth-
ite content. This low An ratio is probably due to localized
intense saussuritization of plagioclase. Sr content (840-
1410 p.p.m.) is slightly affected by saussuritization.

6) A very clear distinction is demonstrated between Sr-An values

for plagioclase from the layered mass and from the xenoliths
enclosed in the granite. Most xenoliths are unconnected
genetically wi-fch. the Al-Jealani intrusion.

7) The southern intrusive boundary of the layered mass can he

delineated on the basis of Sr-An ratio in plagioclase.
 162-

3.10.3 Variation of the trace elements

3.10.3a Introduction: The main purpose of this investigation

was to evaluate the geochemical behaviour of minor elements during
differentiation of the intrusion. A total of 38 samples from the
Al-Je'alani layered intrusion were spectrographically analysed for
12 elements, 7 of which (Ni, Co, Ba, Zr, V, Cu, Cr) have been
studied in detail, to see whether there is any significant variation
between the component rock types, and especially between those that
have been amphibolitized and those that are fresh.

13 samples from granitic rocks enveloping and intruding the mass

were also analysed together with 3 samples from inclusions within
the granite for comparison purposes.

Table 4-9 Fresh cumulates (gabbro) Al-Jealani intrusion

Sample No. ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm " PPm ppm
Nickel Cobalt Barium Zirconium Vanadium Copper Chromiu

As-227 300 600 200 10 50 80 120

AS t 231 100 . 60 250 30 60 50 100

As-234 120 80 200 20 400 50 80

As-236 120 60 200 15 80 30 ' 150

As-253 300 20 200 30 20 40 20

As-295 500 30 250 50 120 40 150

AS-261 200 10 600 10 30 40 30

AS-263 30 10 200 10 40 30 100

As-264 500 50 200 10 150 20 120

As-266 100 30 200 10 40 30 100

As-300 300 40 200 20 80 20 70

As-304 300 N.D. 200 10 30 15 30

As-269 200 16 200 10 30 20 30

As-271 700 40 200 30 100 20 2000

As-317 300 60 200 20 80 100 70

As-319 70 10 200 10 50 40 • 50

As-219 10 15 250 20 300 80 30

As-332 100 30 200 30 200 40 50

 163-

Table 4-10 Amphiboltized cumulates (metagabbro ) - A1 Jealani

layered intrusion

PPm PPm PPm PPm PPm PPm PPm

Sample No. Cobalt Barium Zirconium Vanadium Copper Chromium
Nickel

As-214 60 10 800 150 150 30 200

As-428 50 40 300 100 150 20 70
As-216 10 10 250 220 150 10 70
As-2 21 10 10 500 20 30 10 120
As-280 70 10 1000 20 80 40 400
As-226 400 40 1000 10 30 20 70
As-283 100 20 500 20 200 20 70
As-235 50 40 500 20 70 40 120
As-284 40 30 360 70 100 20 70
As-239 100 20 600 20 • 120 50 300
As-390 50 30 500 80 200 20 150
As-240 100 40 400 20 200 60 150 •
As-241 80 30 600 20 100 50 150
As-247 50 20 300 10 120 30 120
As-249 60 20 400 10 100 20 120
As-285 50 20 350 30 170 40 100
As-257 200 .10 600 50 100 60 300
As-257 200 10 600 50 100 60 300
As-294 10 10 800 10 50 20 70
As-308 80 10 250 10 100 20 70

3.10.3b Nickel:
Vogt (1923), Wager and Mitchell (1951)> Storm and
Holland' (1957), Turikian (1963) 321(1 others have shown
that nickel exhibits a strong tendency towards enrich-
ment in olivine and to a lesser extent, in orthopyroxene.
The element is therefore depleted during early stages of
differentiation of a basic magma.
 In the Al-Je'alani layered intrusion, the average
nickel content is found to he higher in the unaltered
rocks (228 ppm) than in the amphibolitized rocks (86
ppm). In the plagioclase-olivine cumulates with olivine
averaging 55 percent and pyroxene approximately 18 per-
cent, the nickel content may be as high as 700 ppm (As-
27l). In contrast, the amphibolitized rocks show low
values for nickel and only rarely a value of 400 ppm is
attained (As-226).

The sudden increase of the nickel content in units

IE,'HE, 3X, X andXH demonstrates clearly a tendency for
its concentration in plagioclase-olivine cumulates in the
early and late stages of crystallization and therefore its
sensitivity to processes of crystal differentiation..

It is interesting to note that their average value

is similar to that of many other basic rocks elsewhere
(Flei^her and Stevens, 1^62), indicating that meta-
morphism of the original pyroxene did not cause mobiliz-
ation of the element.

In granitic rocks associated with the intrusion, an

average of 14 ppm nickel is present, which is normal for
such rocks.
 165-

Table 4-11 Granitic rocks - vicinity of A1 Jealani intrusion

ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm

Sample No. Nickel Cobalt Barium Zirconium Vanadium Copper Chromium

As-206 10 10 1500 170 40 10 400

As-215 10 10 500 80 20 10 400

As-255 10 10 2000 200 30 1000 150

15 10 1000 80 20 10 1500
As-314
As-372 60 10 1500 40 20 10 300

As-333 10 10 800 500 40 10 350

10 10 1200 700 50 30 300

As-345
As-406 10. 10 1000 120 30 10 300

As-412 10 10 1000 500 40 10 200

10 10 500 10 20 10 200
As-415
AS-449 50 40 300 100 150 10 170

As-473 10 10 1500 200 30 10 150

As-290 10 10 1200 100 20 10 120

Xenoliths in the granitic rocks contain an average nickel content

of 25 ppm in two samples and 500 ppm in As-396 which is a biotite
schist.

Table 4-12 Biotite schist xenoliths in granitic rocks

ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm

Sample No. j^^ei Cobalt Barium Zirconium Vanadium Copper Chromium

As-209 20 10 500 150 100 20 150

As-396 300 20 1000 200 150 60 600

30 20 700 70 200 15 50
AS-397
 166-

5.10.3c Cobalt:

Wager and Mitchel (l95l)> Cornwall and Rose (1957),

McDougall and Lovering (1963) and others, have shown that
cobalt enters the same mineral phases as nickel but in
lesser amounts and with more constant values. They have
also shown that there is a gradual decrease in the cobalt
content with crystallization differentiation.

In the Al-Jealani layered mass (fig. 4-13) the

cobalt content is generally low. Although both the fresh
rocks and the amphibolitized gabbros show varying values,
the former have a slightly higher average (34 ppm) than
the latter 23ppm). Thus the olivine rich rocks of units
II, IV, V and XI show high Co values compared to the
other units.

The granitic rocks and xenoliths have average con-

tents of 10 and 15 ppm respectively which are normal for
such rocks.

3.10.3d Barium:
In gabbroic and basalatic rocks, barium is generally
restricted to plagioclase feldspar. In plagioclase of
oligoclase to labradorite composition, barium averages
315-390 ppm (Heier 1962), and decreases in the more sodic
or more calcic end members, the total range as reported
by Martin Prinz (1967) is 220-303 ppm.

Barium fluctuates throughout the Al-Jealani layered

mass and no trend emerges, but it appears to be concentr-
ated in the amphibolitized gabbros in which it attains
more than double its value in the unaltered rocks (fig.
4-11, 13 and 15). In the former rocks, barium ranges
from 300-1000 ppm with a mean value of 535 ppm; in the
latter rocks, it ranged from 200-250 ppm. Ba. with a mean
of 215 ppm.
 167-

It is possible that in the amphibolitized rocks

barium enrichment was produced by bydrothermal solutions
which accompanied the partial saussuritization and
sericitization of the plagioclase.

Felsic rocks and xenoliths show mean barium con-

tents of 1169 ppm and 700 respectively. These high
values are to be expected for potassium rich rocks in
which barium can substitute for potassium in the K-
feldspar lattice.

3.10.3e Zirconium:
Apart from its presence in zircon, the element is
found in pyroxene and apatite lattices, generally repl-
acing calcium ions. Its value tends to increase with
differentiation (Wager and Mitchell 1951 )• Chao and
Fleisher ( 1 9 6 0 ) found a wide regional variation of zir-
conium in basaltic rocks and were unable to give an
average figure.

In Al-Jealani mass, a slight fluctuation is noticed,

where it averages 36 ppm for pyroxene-rich and amphi-
bolitized rocks and 20 ppm for olivine-rich rocks.

This is in accordance with previous investigations

and findings that zirconium tends to enter pyroxene more
readily than other minerals.

In the granitic and xenolithic rocks there are high

average zirconium contents 212 ppm and 140 ppm respecti-
vely. In samples As-255, As-395 zirconium ranges from
500-700 ppm. These particularly high values are probably
due to the presence of zircon.

3.10.3f Copper:
The average copper content (37 ppm) in rocks of the
Al-Jealani layered intrusion, is lower than the value for
basic rocks of 100 ppm given by Martin Prinz ( 1 9 6 7 ) . It
 168-

is rather higher in the marginal layers (50-80 ppm)

than the upper layers (20-40 ppm). The mean copper
content for the unaltered gabbroic rocks is 40 ppm.,
compared with the slightly lower average value of
33 ppm in the amphibolitized rocks.

In granitic and xenolithic rocks copper content

is 10 ppm and 32 ppm respectively, but in a dacite
dyke (As-255), 100 ppm copper is encountered, this is
probably due to presence of copper sulphides in the
rock.

3.10. 3g Vanadium:
Vanadium in basaltic rocks has a pronounced regional
variation. Turikian and Wedepohl (1961) have stated
that olivine basalts contain an average of about 140 ppm.
The element is mainly concentrated in magnetite (300
ppm), and to a lesser extent in pyroxene. Usually,
vanadium enters these minerals during the middle stages
of fractionation and decreases during late fractionation
(Martin Prinz, 19^7 ) •

In the Al-Jealani intrusion the vanadium content is

low in "both fresh and amphibolitized rocks, 93 and 115
ppm respectively. It is commonly enriched in rocks con-
taining a relatively high content of magnetite and bio-
tite, such as AB-234 and 264 which contain 400 and 150
ppm respectively or in rocks with appreciable amounts of
cumulus pyroxene such as As-289 with 300 ppm.

Vanadium is enriched in amphibolitized rocks (115

ppm) relative to fresh cumulates (93 ppm). This may he
due to the retention of vanadium in amphibole pseudo-
morphs after pyroxene and to the-higher magnetite con-
tent in these rocks. Occasionally however, plagioclase-
olivine cumulate (e.g. As-234) is enriched in vanadium
which may he due to a relatively high amount of magnetite
 169-

and interstitial pyroxene. Felsic rocks and xenoliths

contain 36 and 150 ppm respectively, this difference is
attributed mainly to the differing magnetite content.

3.10.3h Chromium:
Chromium has a tendency to be enriched in pyroxene,
magnetite and chrome spinel, (Wager and Mitchell 1951;
Turikian, 1963; McDougall and Lovering, 1963)*

In the Al-Jealani layered intrusion, chromium varies

erratically throughout. The amphibolitized gabbros with
an average of 150 ppm have considerably higher content of
the element than the fresh gabbros (average 86 ppm),
(fig. 4-31^.4). This difference between the two types of
rocks is in accordance with the tendency for chromium to
enter a crystal lattice of pyroxene more readily than
any other mineral. It also indicates that amphiboliti-
zation of pyroxene has not affected the original content
of chromium which is still retained in the amphibole
pseudomorphs.

In felsic rocks, the average chromium content is

253 ppm which is probably contained in the opaque miner-
als. Samples As-209 and As-379 from biotite schist
xenoliths in the granitic rocks average 100 ppm., whereas
the biotite schist xenolith (As-396) contains an abnormally
large value (600 ppm) which ±s probably due to a high
opaque mineral content.

3.10.3i Summary and conclusions

Some important conclusions can be drawn from the distribution of
trace elements in the intrusion. Considering the tendency of Ni, Co,
Cr, V, Zr to enter the lattice of olivine and/or pyroxene in variable
amounts it was possible to differentiate between the unaltered gabbro
and the amphibolitized gabbro.

Ni and Co are depleted from the amphibolitized gabbro relative to

the fresh olivine gabbro. (Table 4-9, 10 figs- 4-12, 13, 16) Cr, V, Zr,
 170-

DISTRIBUTION OF BARIUM, ZIRCONIUM S CHROMIUM

- * o - * 10 5 K 0 - * <0 0> oi
_j i 1 I ' •—I I
<200- < 200- Fig:
200
300 •
200
300
4-11
400 400"
50 0 500-
600 • 600 0
>0
700- 700-
800-
800-
900
c:
900-
ooo
 171-

4 001
•06

-08
02.
09 09
hOS OS
Ofr 0~b
0£ OS
02 02
01 01
01 01

5
5
<
z
<
>

-i 1 1—l—r (i—i—i—i—r
wf> -to o> a, — o V -O
ID «+ —
i
wn —<o o> — o

I—
-J
<
CO
o
o

CO -i—i—i—i—r r—i—i—i—r
at —o S ® 0> f - o

-J
UJ OOfr
X K>0£
o -002
z
001
001 > OOI >
r—r—7-7—3- 1—1—1—r r 1—1—1—1—I 0 I a.
Nn — a> — oa."Q-
W i «> at * ~
wt-o o> <T* aO: CL No of Sample No of S.
No. of Samples No of Sample
 172-

Unit No=
Rg.4-13
XV

XIV

XIII

XII

XI

IX

VIII

VII

VI

IV

III

A] r-Z— QL
O 200 400 600 0 40 60 200 400 600 800 1000 0 50 100 150
Ni Co Ba Zr

s
 173-

Unit No-.

Fig:4-14
XV

XIV

XIII

XII

XI

IX

VIII

VII

VI

IV

III

1 1 1
100 200 300 400
Cr
4
 175-

^4-16

R R M.

MICRODIORITE DYKE
are enriched in the amphiboltized gabbro relative to the olivine gabbro.

Ba which tends to substitute K + in the feldspar lattice is en-

riched in the amphibolitized gabbros relative to olivine gabbro. This
is possibly due to partial sericitization and saussuritization of the
plagioclase during metamorphism.

Amphibolitization has probably not mobilized the trace elements

from the pre-existing pyroxene, as indicated by the enrichment of Cr,
V, and Zr which tend to enter pyroxene lattice in the amphibolitized
rocks. This conclusion is in accordance with the petrographic evi-
dence that the amphibolitized gabbros are derived from plagioclase-
pyroxene cumulates.

4.4 ARJA LAYERED BASIC INTRUSION

This intrusion, 1,5 x 6 km. is intruded into a succession of

biotite and quartz-chlorite schist. An aureole (20-50 m.) plagioclase-
orthopyroxene hornfels was formed along the contact; and in the incor-
porated xenoliths within the intrusion. Outcrops of this intrusion are
rare and are in form of small dark exposures or exfoliated in situ
boulders uncovered along local streams or protruding from the alluvial
cover. The hornfels xenoliths are better exposed over the enveloping
basic rocks.

Although scarcity of exposures did not allow further detailed

work to be carried out; several rock cumulates were recognized. In
one of these exposures, rhythmic and phase layering is exhibited
between plagioclase and amphibolitized plagioclase-pyroxene cumulates.

The following are comparisons between Arja and A1 Jealani intrusion:;

1. Both intrusions are oval in shape and occur 30 km apart along

a north-south line with their long axes approximately parallel.
 177-

2. Both intrusions consist of cumulates with characteristic

textures. Plagioclase is the dominant cumulus phase, fol-
lowed by pyroxene (both ortho-and clino-), and olivine. The
pyroxenes suffered variable degrees of amphibolitization.
In Arja, the effects of metamorphism was stronger and much
of the pyroxene was altered to chlorite. The olivine, which
is almost fresh in A1 Je'alani, suffered serpentinization in
Arja mass.

3. In Al-Jealani, pre-existing country rock inclusions are ent-

irely absent, and the mass is enveloped by younger syn-
kinematic adamellite; while in case of Arja the mass is envel-
oped by the pre-existing pelitic rocks which have been affected
by thermal metamorphism.

4. The spectrographs analysis of the heavy mineral concentrate

from both layered intrusions revealed no economic mineral
deposits.

5. The An content of the plagioclase from Arja mass showed a

fluctuation between -An,-Q and An^ (chemical analysis); the
amphibolitized rocks have generally a lower content. The same
applies to Al-Jealani mass (see page 154). This is attributed
to amphibolitization where it is believed that part of CaO
of feldspars was utilized by amphiboles.

6. The Sr content of the plagioclase in Arja mass ranges from

742-2050 (table 4-6). This shows scattering when plotted
against the An content (fig. 4-10). In case of Al-Jealani
mass the Sr content increases with the decrease of An con-
tent and the plot exhibit grouping in a pentagon (fig. 4-10).
This difference is possibly either due to the limited number
of analyses performed in case of Arja, or to the degree of
intensity of metamorphism it suffered.

4.5 GENERAL SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

The following observations made in the course of this research have

an important bearing on the origin and differentiation of the intrusions:
 178.

4.5*1 The primary features of the intrusion:

4.5*la Shape: The elliptical outline and the inwardly decre-

asing dips of the layered series suggest an inverted
funnel shape of the intrusion. However Lambdez (see
page 107) has interpreted the aeromagnetic anomaly as
indicating steeply dipping contacts. The fact that
Al-Jealani and Arja intrusions (30 km north of A1 Jealani)
show an elliptical shape with their long axes striking
N 40°W, suggests that both have originated through
emplacement of basic magma along pre-existing north wes-
terly fractures.

4.5.1b Contacts: The marginal facies may be partly the result of

post intrusive tectonic effects and partly the result of
initial emplacement into a sedimentary succession which
was already heated by regional metamorphism and, there-
fore displays no chilled contacts.

4.5.1c Synopsis of petrography and textures. The intrusion con-

sists of cumulates ranging from predominant orthocumulate
(gabbro, amphibolitized gabbro, troctolite, norite) to
plagioclase-adcumulate (anorthosite); all textures of the
rocks from base to top are the characteristic textures of
cumulates; plagioclase is the dominant cumulus phase in
all layers; other cumulus minerals are olivine, clino- and
ortho-pyroxene; post cumulus material includes plagioclase,
opaque minerals, clino- and orthopyroxene.

4.5.Id Layering: Rhythmic macro and micro layering is well deve-

loped. The' layered rocks are made up of 15 regular cyclic
repetitious units; elongated minerals in the banded rocks
and some uniform horizons have their long axes within the
plane of layering; no significant -cryptic layering from
base to top of the intrusion is recorded; phase layering
is present in all parts of the intrusion indicating that
 179-

cumulus minerals such as olivine, ortho- and clino-

pyroxene show entry and exit at different horizons within
the intrusion to define distinct and mostly continuous
units.

4*5.1e Variations in mineral composition: The ferromagnesian

minerals tend to show repeated and abrupt changes down
the reaction series from more common olivine and clino-
pyroxene to less abundant orthopyroxene, brown hornblende
and biotite; the plagioclase shows oscillatory range of
An content from base to top of the intrusion; its variation
in composition within the intrusion is not so pronounced
as it is from one unit to the next; the upper part of a
layered unit tend to have more sodic plagioclase than the
lower part but commonly a unit with more calcic-plagio-
clase overlies one with more sodic feldspar; the mineral-
ogical variation in grain size and composition within
\single cycle units, e.g. in unit II (As-1010-1015) and
Unit VI (As-10l6-1019) is rather small but noticeable
and considerably more work will be necessary for statisti-
cal demonstration.

4.5.'2 The metamorphic features:

4.5.2a Grade of metamorphism: The intrusion was subjected to

greenschist facies of metamorphism which mainly affected
the plagioclase-clinopyroxene cumulates with primary
igneous lamination.

4.5.2b Mineralogical changes: The pyroxene was replaced by

amphibole with preservation of relic textures; plagioclase-
olivine cumulates in general are unaffected apart from
local serpentinization of olivine; plagioclase in the basal
unit is extensively sericitized and epidotized, the meta-
morphism was most intense towards the contacts of the
intrusion with the enveloping adamellite and younger intru-
sive granites; the pyroxenes are altered to chlorite and
 i8o.

tremolite and plagioclase breaks down to epidote and/or

sericite, quartz and locally prehnite.

4.5.2c Features of amphibolitization: Amphibolitization affec-

ted the intrusion after the crystallization of the rocks;
augite is partly or entirely replaced by secondary amphi-
bole varying in composition from tremolite to actinolite.

4.5.3 Geochemical considerations

4.5.3a Original composition: The composition of the parental

magma is not certain. The olivine gabbro is assumed to
be closest in composition. In general, the tholeiitic
affinities are indicated as those of Bushveld.

4.5.3b Sr-An ratio in plagioclase: Plagioclase shows an oscil-

latory range of An content from base to top of the
intrusion and Sr increases with decreasing An content;
amphibolitized units and fresh unaltered cumulates show
almost identical Sr/An ratio in plagioclase; the southern
intrusive contacts of the layered mass can be delineated
on the basis of Sr/An ratio in plagioclase - most of the
basic xenoliths in the granites are unconnected geneti-
cally with the Al-Jealani intrusion.

4.5.3c Minor elements: The characteristic peaks of some minor

elements (Ni, Cr, Y, Zr) demonstrate their sensitivity
to processes of crystallization differentiation.

4.5.3d Relationships of the Zn-Pb-Ag vein mineralization and the

layered basic masses: The following facts suggest
that the Zn-Pb-Ag mineralization in the district is probably
related to a north-south belt in the granite extensively
enriched in pelitic and semi-pelitic country rock xenoliths.
1. The Zn-Pb-Ag vein mineralization is structurally con-
trolled along fractures predominantly concentrated
in granitic rocks.
 l8l.

2. All the 150 ancient Zn-Pb-Ag prospects in the dis-

trict are located out of the layered basic intrusions
which were passive and did not respond to fracturing.

3. The majority of these mineralized sites are situ-

ated along a north-south belt within the granite
enriched with xenoliths of pelitic and semi-pelitic
rocks.

4. Spectrograph!c analysis of rocks and heavy concentr-

ates from the layered masses did not show any anomalous
amounts of zinc, lead or copper.

4.6 DISCUSSION

The interpretation of features like rhythmic layering, mineral and

rock variation, and the relationship of the margin and structure of
the intrusion is based on petrographic and geochemical data and on
observed field relationships.

The composition and structure of the layered mass is believed to

represent surges of magma along the oval structure synchronous with
the waning stage of regional metamorphism and deformation. The
layered rocks originated through undercooling combined with convection
currents in the magma. Density stratification in rhythmically layered
rocks has been attributed to gravitative process. The well layered
sequences which are separated by essentially non-rhythmically layered
plagioclase-olivine cumulates suggest that the process of rhythmic
layering operated intermittently. Intrusions of this type are normally
found to form basic masses with steep walls which were emplaced near
the end stage of the regional metamorphic cycle. The succession of
cumulus phases that make up cyclic units is the same as that expected
dxring cooling and crystallization of basaltic magma (fig. 4-10).

Layering in large gabbroic masses has been studied intensively

by Wager and Deer (1939) and Hess ( 1 9 6 1 ) , who clearly distinguished
between cryptic layering andihyllamic layering. The absence of cryptic
layering in the Al-Jealani intrusion is not unique. Wells ( 1 9 6 2 ) has
clearly pointed out that despite the great thickness of the Freetown
layered rocks and the evidence of formation by bottom accumulation of
crystals, there is a remarkable absence of any cryptic layering.
This feature has normally been encountered in layered ultramafic rocks
but it appears to be rare in mafic rocks.

The diversity of compositions in the sequence of cyclic units

may represent successive inflows of magmas Jackson (1970). However,
the gradational contacts between the cyclic units may also indicate
the intermittent changes in water and perhaps oxygen fugacity
operating in a simple body of magma (Wager and Brown 1968).

Features of amphibolitization have formed after the complete

solidification of the rocks and are interpreted as being formed at
the end stages of regional metamorphism and subsequent to emplacement
and solidification of the gabbro mass. The patchy amphibolitization
of the pyroxenes is principally related to introduction of water
(YoderA196E) under relatively high PT conditions.

As already indicated the amphibolitized units have lower An con-

tent than the unaltered cumulates. It is probable that amphiboliti-
zation is also linked with decrease of An content in plagioclase.
Amphiboles commonly penetrate deeply into plagioclase, so that the
plagioclase would become more albitic than its original composition.
If the oscillations of An content are primary then the problem needs
further study. Abbott ( 1 9 6 2 ) and Brown (1956) indicated that minor
pulses of fresh magma would account for oscillations of An content.
This feature may equally be due to minor variations in water vapour
pressure causing undercooling at some horizons.

The monomineralic plagioclase cumulates may indicate slow crystall-

ization at certain stages which prolonged diffusion and led to the
origin of plagioclase adcumulates.

The lack of any concentration of ore minerals is disappointing,

and it is clear that down to the outermost exposed layer the intrusion
is barren. However, if the walls of the intrusion are steep-sided,
then the possibility is not excluded that further layering exists below
the visible limit with the associated possibility of accumulations
of ore minerals.
 184-

CHAPTER 5

GRANITES

5.1 INTRODUCTION

Rocks of granitic composition form part of a large northwesterly-

trending batholith. They make up over IQffo of the exposed basement
rocks in the area mapped (2425 sq. Km.). The batholith is situated
near the eastern margin of the Arabian shield and is unconformably
overlain in its east-central part by a little-deformed Palaeozoic sedi-
mentary succession. The granitic rocks are shown as one unit of
synkinematic granite gneiss on the 1:500,000 scale geological map 206A
(Bramkamp et al., 19&3) 1-3). Eijkelboom (1966 a and b), recog-
nized six varieties of granitic rocks in the district: Syntectonic
granodiorite, syntectonic granite, syn- to late- tectonic granite, syn-
and late- tectonic granite, post tectonic granite and granite of
uncertain age.

Greenwood and Brown (1972), divided the Arabian shield in relation

to the magmatic differentiates of plutonic rocks, into three compart-
ments, following Peacock's (1931) classification of igneous rocks.
According to this division, the Ad-Dawadmi batholith, which is situated
within the northeastern compartment is a calc-alkalic magmatic differ-
entiate.

Detailed field and laboratory studies were carried out on the

granitic rocks of Ad-Dawadmi, in order to determine the mode of emplace-
ment, as well as to investigate the origin of the magma.

For the most part, the area underlain by granitic rocks is a ped-
iment from which protrude bare steep-sided elliptical hills.
Exfoliation or cavity weathering are characteristic of these hills.
Long east-west trending dark grey to tan ridges follow the outcrops of
dacite and rhyolite dykes. Shear zones are present in. the granitic area
and usually make prominent linear features, which are difficult to dis-
tinguish from dykes. Rainwater is held within the upper weathered zone
of the granitic rocks, and a limited supply of water is available -from
wells hand dug or drilled in the main valleys crossing the granite.
 m

- 5.2 THE MEDA-SEDIMENTARY ENVELOPE

The granitic batholith has "been emplaced within previously meta-

morphosed sedimentary country rocks which flank the batholith to the
east and west. Within the mapped district (Plate l) these meta-
morphic rocks are exposed in the south-east and in the north, where
they make up about 20$ of the exposed rocks. These, metamorphic suc-
cessions were assigned to Ar-Ridaniyah and Abt Formations.

Exposures of the latter Formation are predominant. They make the

principal country rock inclusions in the granite and in the north.
Rocks of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation form the major rock types in the
south-east. They underlie rocks of Abt Formation.

The base of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation comprises a quartzo-feldspathic

schist unit that grades westwards into quartzo-feldspathic gneiss.
This quartzo-feldspathic unit is overlain by a thick calcareous unit
made up of marble, dolomite, amphibole schist with rare thin inter-
calations of chlorite-biotite and chlorite-sericite schist.

The Abt Formation is essentially a pelitic Formation composed of

quartz - chlorite - sericite and quartz - biotite - chlorite schist
with local quartzite, and quartzo-feldspathic schists.

Rocks of both Formations have been intruded by pre-, syn- and post-
kinematic minor intrusions of acidic, basic and intermediate compositions
and have suffered regional metamorphism of greenschist grade. Progres-
sive metamorphism is exhibited in the north where quartz-chlorite-
sericite schist grades southwards into gneissose biotite schist.
Garnetiferous biotite hornfels with cordierite occurs at the contact
with granitic rocks.

In the north, the strike of the schistosity in the abundant xeno-

liths swings from 070° in the east to 110° in the west. In the extreme
north the schistosity in the quartz-chlorite-sericite schist is 135°•
In the south-east the schistosity of the metamorphic successions is
about 010° and the dip is 50-70°E. The xenoliths of country rock
within the batholith also strike approximately N-S.
5.3 THE GRANITIC BATHOLITH

The granitic batholith is about 200 Km, in length and 70 Kin. in

width and has been emplaced subparallel to the general strike of the
bedding of the metamorphic host rocks. Elongation of xenoliths,
foliation, and primary flow direction of magma conform with its con-
tacts with the country rocks. Lead-zinc-silver vein mineralization
occurs along a northerly trending zone situated in the central sector
of this batholith. This mineralization is structurally controlled
along north-easterly shear zones and at their intersections with
easterly trending tension fractures.

Within this batholith, there are also well developed fracture

sets related to the final orogenic event.

5.3.1 The major units of the batholith

The batholith consists of two clearly separated components: an

earlier foliated, coarse-grained, porphyritic variety in the west and
a later even-grained variety in the east. The latter contains
inclusions of the former variety. Together, these two types constitute
over 95 percent of the granitic rocks exposed in the area. Other
younger granitic rocks occur as small intrusions within both major
types.

5.3.2 Petrography and internal variation

The major components of the batholith exhibit diversified com-

position, texture and structure. They range from quart z-monzono-
diorite to alkali-granite in composition (Pig. 5-1 )> and in texture,
from being coarse-grained, foliated and porphyritic to being homo-
geneous, even-grained and non-foliated. Both composition and texture
were affected by the pre-existing country rocks, as can be seen in the
marginal zones close to contacts with the inclusions.
 186.
•»

Quartz

Fig. 5-1 Classification of igneous rocks

5.3*3 The relict masses of amphibolitized gabbro and metadiorite

Abundant scattered melanocratic inclusions are present in both

early and late granitic rocks. In the latter, they have been more
affected by metamorphism than those in the early granitic rocks, and
consist of metamorphosed gabbro, tonalite, diorite and quartz-diorite.
Important remnants of these rocks occur in a strip between Ad-Dawadmi
and Sidriyah hills. Smaller xenoliths and more widely scattered are
aligned in northeasterly direction between Wadi Magrass and Wadi Wasset
approximately 10 Km. south of Ad-Dawadmi. These relict masses show
great variation in composition, coarseness and sizes. They vary from
few cms. to 2 Kms. in length, they are generally elongated parallel
to the strike of their planar structure. The large xenoliths appear
to have been little affected by the flowage of magma while the small
remnants are sometimes disorientated presumably due to flow of the
enclosing granitic magma. The contacts with the granitic rocks are
often sharp and as a rule steeply dipping. In general the inclusions
have been contaminated by granitic material and easily responded to
amphibolitization.

Occasionally, large phenocrysts of microcline have grown in these

xenoliths close to their contacts (Fig. 5-2c) which are transitional
with the granite. A planar structure is visible in some of the larger
basic inclusions, which may be relict igneous lamination, possibly with
later foliation induced parallel to it. Many of the basic inclusions
are themselves enclosed in large xenoliths of early granitic rock within
the later one. The jointing in the latter is continuous through the
basic inclusions.

In thin section, the original sub-ophitic texture typical of gabbro

is preserved. The three principal constituents plagioclase, amphibole
and biotite show characteristic changes, with increasing metamorphism.
The plagioclase is often altered to zoisite and/or sericite and albite.
The amphibole commonly pseudomorphs pyroxene. In the transitional con-
tact, amphibole is altered to biotite and chlorite.
5.3*4 Relict masses of the pelitic and semi-pelitic rocks

Large relict masses of pelitic composition are not as common as

remnants of basic composition. The early granitic rocks contain
fairly abundant relics of biotite schist in the area south of Wadi
Arjah. Abundant garnet and less common cordierite in these indicate
that they have been affected by thermal metamorphism.

The contacts with the enveloping granitic rocks are gradational

with a development of alternating white and dark bands (Fig. 5-2e).
Sharp contacts are also developed. The schistosity within the xeno-
liths is essentially north-north-westerly in the major part of the
mapped area, except in the north, where it swings from 070° to 110°.
Locally these xenoliths have been rotated in later deformat.ional shear
zones. The primary flow direction of the granitic magma was parallel
to schistosity. Xenoliths have numerous aplite and pegmatite veins
parallel to schistosity.

It has been demonstrated that the large relict masses that are
enclosed entirely within the granite batholith show considerable dif-
ference in composition but they are conformable with the structures of
the country rocks. It is therefore that the xenolithic masses are not
far removed from their original position and display analogy to ghost
structures of the Older migmatitic granodiorite at Donegal (Pitcher
1953).

5.4 CLASSIFICATION

It is difficult to construct a satisfactory classification for the

wide range of granitic rocks in the area because individual rock types
form part of a gradational series.

Comprehensive petrographie systems of classification (Johanusen,

1931, Streckeisen 1967) are useful and quantitative but they are too
mechanical and inflexible for employing in petrogenetic discussions.

The following systems of rock classifications are adopted in this

thesis:- l) A quantitative mineralogical and/or chemical system that
is used in describing the petrography, and 2) a flexible genetic system
 189 >

that groups together those igneous rocks that appear to have evolved
under "broadly similar conditions. The latter system is used in
petrogentic discussion.

The field data, the mode of emplacement of various granitic rocks

and the age relationships with each other and with the country rocks
and the variation in their megascopic characteristics support and justify
this two fold classification.

The triangular diagram (Fig. 5-1) shows the mineralogical classi-

fication adopted. From this diagram and from (Plate l), it is noticed
that adamellite is the most abundant rock type, granodiorite, granite
and quartz-monzono-diorite are also present.

Genetically, the rock types are classified into synkinematic,

late kinematic and post-kinematic. Geographic locality names are used
along with this genetic classification.

5.4.1 The syhkinematic granitic rocks

Rocks included within this grouping are typically coarse-grained,

foliated and porphyritic (Fig. 5-2c). They are adamellitic, grano-
dioritic and quartz-monzono-dioritic in composition. They occupy the
western part of the area. Inclusions of biotite schist and biotite-
plagioclase-cordierite hornfels are abundant and grade in size from
small clots about 1 cm. in diameter (Fig. 5-2 a and b) to large elong-
ated xenoliths about 7 Km»- in length and 100-150 m. in width (Plate l).
Inclusions of metadiorite and amphibolitized gabbro are also common.
Remnants from pre-existing country rocks are also represented by trails
of orientated biotite bands conforming with flow banding (Fig. 5-2h).

4.1.1 The Sidriyah quartz-monzono-diorite: This rock type com-

prises only a small fraction of the synkinematic rocks. It is mainly
found in the mid-western area where large inclusions of pelitic-semi-
pelitic country rocks are particularly common. It is also present as
lenses within the adamellite and granodiorite. The rock is characterized
generally, by its overall darker colour relative to the granodiorite and
adamellite, by the small white plagioclase phenocrysts and by the scarcity

1
190.

Granites

Figure 5-2

Field characteristics

a & b Ar~Ridaihah.. porphyritic adamellite with inclusions of

plagioclase-biotite hornfels. Long axes in xenoliths
are orientated parallel to flowbanding in adamellite.
a - locality Ar-32, b - locality G-290 (Plate 5).

c - Microcline megacrysts grown in quartz-diorite xenolith

in Ar-Ridaihah adamellite. Locality, As-750 (Plate 5)

d - Sharp contact between the earlier synkinematic Ar-Ridaihah'

adamellite (grey) and the late-kinematic adamellite (light
grey). Locality G-290 (Plate 5).

e - Granitized biotite schist (migmatite), gradational contact

of a xenolith. Locality G-110 (Plate 5)»

f - Flow banding as displayed by orientation of the long axes

of alkali-feldspar phenocrysts and mafic minerals.
Ar-Ridailiah adamellite. Locality G-307 (Plate 5)»

g - Sharp chilled contact of post-kinematic pink granite (left)

against earlier synkinematic adamellite. Locality G-221.
(Plate 5).

h - Trails of parallel orientated bands of biotite conforming

with the flow banding of Ar-Ridaihah. adamellite.
Locality G-279 (Plate 5).
191.
 192.

of alkali feldspar phenocrysts. 30-40$ of the quartz-monzonodiorite

is made up of tabular to sub-rounded phenocrysts of oligoclase
(An^ 3-10 mm. in diameter. Megacrysts of light pink to white
alkali-feldspar, 1-6 cm. in length are locally present.

The phenocrysts are set in a dark matrix of biotite, plagioclase,

quartz and minor alkali-feldspar grains. Accessory constituents include
sphene, apatite and magnetite.

Table 5-1 Modal analyses of the Sidriyah quartz-monzono-diorite

Sample no. K-feldspar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic minerals

As-701 9.9 54.7 10.8 24.6

As-703 8.9 52.4 13.3 25.4

As-704 9.2 55.0 8.7 27.1
As-705 7.7 57.1 13.5 21.7.
As-708 15.0 49.0 14.7 21.3

Range : 7.7 - 15.0 49.0 - 57.1 8.7 - 14.7 21.3 - 27.1

Average : 10.1 53.6 12.0 24.0

4.1.2 The Sidriyah granodiorite:- This rock type surrounds the

main outcrop of quart z-monzonodiorite, and occurs also as lenses within
both the Sidriyah quartz-monzonodiorite and the Ar-Ridaihah adamellite.

In hand specimen the granodiorite is coarse-grained and grey in

colour. The white oligoclase phenocrysts are common and are smaller than
those of pink alkali-feldspars which also range in length between 1-6 cm.

In thin section the phenocrysts of oligoclase and alkali feldspars

are randomly distributed in a quartz-diorite groundmass of plagioclase,
biotite, quartz and alkali feldspar with accessory amounts of magnetite,
apatite, chlorite and sphene.
Table 5-2 Modal analyses of the Sidriyah granodiorite

Sample No. K-feldspar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic minerals

As-702 14.4 43.1 17.2 25.3

As-706 10.3 51.7 17.4 20.6

As-710 17.0 49.3 21.4 12.3

As-716 18.2 . 47.7 18.0 16.1

As-717 13.5 47.5 25.9 13.3

As-451 20.3 51.2 22.6 5.9
As-490 18.0 48.0 18.0 16.0

Range : 10.3 - 20.8 43.1 - 55.1 17.2 - 27.2 12.3 - 2 5 . 3

Average : 16.0 48.9 22.7 15.6

4.1.3 The Ar-Ridaihah adamellite

4.1.3a Field characteristics: The Ar-Ridaihah adaniellite is

characterized by large phenocrysts of pink alkali feldspars. In the
field the rock is seen to be poorly foliated, but in hand specimen,
this foliation is generally difficult to distinguish. The rock has a
coarse-grained groundmass of.microcline and/or perthite, plagioclase,
quartz, biotite and rarely secondary chlorite in which are set well
shaped tabular and prismatic phenocrysts of pink potash feldspar.
These phenocrysts show a good preferred orientation parallel to the
foliation (fig. 5-2f). They measure 2-6 cm. in length and 1-2 cm. in
width. Often they enclose portions of groundmass. Commonly the com-
position of the rock is transformed to that of granite, when a notice-
able increase in the ratio of potash feldspar relative to plagioclase
is attained.

A strongly gneissic porphyritic adamellite crops out around the

Al-Je'alani layered complex (fig. 5-3a, b and c). The gneissic structure
gradually becomes weaker away from the margin of this complex, and is
restricted to a zone that ranges in width from 50-100 m. It is probably
the result of marginal shear during the emplacement of the granitic
 194 .

material along the contact with the older rigid basic intrusion.
Fragments of the outer layers of this basic intrusion are enclosed
in this zone as xenoliths.

4.1.3b Petrography: In thin section the gneissic adamellite is

seen to be composed of a granular mosaic of microcline, perthite,
quartz, oligoclase and biotite. The microcline forms large pheno-
crysts segregated locally into bands with a finer grained darkish
groundmass of feldspar, quartz and biotite. The phenocrysts commonly
form augen which are elongated parallel to the foliation (fig. 5-3a)«
The gneissic adamellite shows cataclastic effects as quartz is crushed
into a fine grained mosaic in which the mineral shows undulose
extinction. The grains of quartz are rounded to subrounded in shape.
Biotite grains are segregated into roughly parallel bands (fig. 5-3a)>
some flakes are bent.

Table 5-3 Modal analyses of Ar-Ridaihah adamellite

Sample no. K.-feldspar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic miner;

As-372(b) 37,6 35*0 24.6 2.8

AS-438 35*2 31.9 25.7 7*2
As-470 29.2 35*8 23.0 12.0
As-473 33*2 24.2 29.1 13*5
As-481 37*6 28.8 28.0 5-6
As-482 36.9 30.2 24.0 8.9
As-432 40.1 41.1 14.0 5.8
As-714 33*3 33*1 24.0 9*0
As-709 41.5 34.5 19.6 4*4

Range : 29.2 - 41*5 24.2 - 41.1 14.0 - 29.1 2.8 - 13.5

Average : 36.2 33.1 23*5 7*3

Quartz: Quartz occurs in two forms; as rounded and subrounded relatively

small individual grains enclosed within later microcline and plagioclase,
and as coarse granular clusters. Strain effects are common in the
 Granites

Figure 5-3

Polished surface of porphyritic gneissose adamellite, marginal

to A1 Jealani layered mass. Foliation is well developed and
alkali-feldspar phenocrysts deformed parallel to planar fabric,
x 1, As-487 (west contact).

Schistose Ar-Ridaihah . adamellite, east contact with the

A1 Jealani layered mass. looking southerly.

Thin section of deformed Ar-Ridaihah porphyritic adamellite,

quartz is in elongated and lenticular aggregates. North
contact of A1 Jealani mass. Transmitted CN. As-482,
 197.

granular quartz, but cataclasis is rare, except in the gneissic

adamellite surrounding the Al-Jealani layered complex. The quartz
grains enclosed as inclusions in plates of alkali feldspars or
oligoclase, have a characteristically rounded outline. In many
instances the quartz shows signs of strain and crushing while the
rest of the minerals are unaffected.

Plagioclase: The plagioclase feldspar also occurs in two generations:

811(1 a s
as earlier phenocrysts of oligoclase (ka^-ka^), later smaller
grains in the groundmass. Crystals are usually poorly shaped. Micro-
cline is seen to replace oligoclase (fig. 5-4d) and often at the
contacts a zone of myrmekite is developed (fig. 5-4b and e). Sericite
inclusions are abundant but are cleaned up on replacement by microcline.

Albite developed at later stages of crystallization forms narrow

rims around the oligoclase (fig. 5-4a, b and c). It is usually clear
and free from sericite inclusions.

Alkali feldspar: MLcrocline and microcline perthite occur in two foims;

as large phenocrysts which show replacement relationships towards
earlier formed minerals, especially the oligoclase (fig. 5-4b, d and e),
and as small grains in the groundmass.

The phenocrysts usually have irregular margins extending into the

groundmass and the earlier formed plagioolase (fig. 5-4b, c and d).
Myrmikitic intergrowth is well developed (fig. 5-4e). Cross hatching,
simple Carlsbad twinning and perthitic intergrowths are common.
Inclusions of biotite, rounded droplets of quartz, albite and oligoclase
are also common. The phenocrysts, in outcrops close to the contact zone
with other granitic rocks are reddened perhaps due to the impregnation
of hematite dust by later hydrothermal solutions.

Biotite: Biotite is the most abundant mafic mineral of the granitic

rocks of the district. It is usually dark brown in colour with greenish
tint locally. In some cases, where inclusions of older rocks are in
close proximity, the biotite flakes show a ghost directional orientation.
Biotite alters to chlorite. Marmo (l97l) suggested that biotite is a
typical mineral of the synkinematic rocks and that its presence is easily
 199.

understood if the general formation of synkinematic granite due to

the granitization of mainly pelitic and arkosic sediments is accepted.
In Ad-Dawadmi, biotite is the principal mafic mineral in all generations
of the granitic rocks.

Hornblende occurs locally and in subordinate accessory amounts in

the synkinematic adamellite intrusions within the layered basic mass
or in proximity of older amphibolitized gabbro and metadiorite
inclusions.

Sphene is invariably associated with biotite, when present it is

in accessory quantities, brown to yellowish-brown in colour, occurs
in granules, as well as wedge-shaped crystals.

Allanite, epidote and apatite occur as accessory minerals.

4.1.3c History of crystallisation. It is suggested that the first

silicate minerals to separate from the melt were plagioclase and bio-
tite; oligoclase locally reacted with the melt to give a reaction rim
of albite. Crystallization of alkali feldspars followed. Quartz was
the final mineral to crystallize as it occupies interstitial spaces.
A post-crystallization alkali metasomatism formed the second generation
of alkali feldspars in the form of large anhedral crystals of microcline,
which replaced the original constituents of the rock, especially the
oligoclase. It also enclosed relics of the groundmass represented by
oligoclase, quartz and little biotite. Due to late stage albitization
the microcline was replaced by microcline perthite.

Chlorite, sphene, allanite and epidote are most likely secondary

deuteric minerals. Sericitization of feldspars is probably a near sur-
face hydrothermal action.

4»1»4 Summary:

The synkinematic granitic rocks are characterized by:

l) Coarse grained, foliated, porphyritic, inhomogeneous differ-

entiates of quartz-monzonodiorite, granodiorite, adamellite
and granite.
 199.

2) Scattered masses of variable altered inclusions of biotite

schist or biotite-plagioclase hornfels that range in size
from clots to long belts, are included.

3) The contacts with the country rocks are migmatitic but there
are many cases of sharp contacts.

4) The contacts with the younger granitic rocks are sharp.

5) In the marginal zones of xenoliths, it is highly contaminated

with mafic minerals and tends to become dioritic.

6) The alkali feldspar phenocrysts away from the Al-Jealani

layered basic intrusion indicate a 155°-170° flow direction
of the granitic magma. This is parallel or sub-parallel to
structural trends of the country rock xenoliths or their elong-
ation. The foliation was induced along the same trend.

7) The marginal zone to Al-Jealani layered mass exhibits a flow

direction of the granitic magma parallel to its contact, with
persistently inward dip. This marginal zone displays an exten- -
sive shearing of the granite at the contact, which gradually
decreases at some distance from it. The zone affected by this
deformation is 50-100 m. wide. The schistosity is consistently
parallel to the margin of the layered basic mass with a steep
inward dip (60°-70°).

5.4*2 The late-kinematic granitic rocks (Al-Mas 1 oukhah adamellite)

4.2.1 Field characteristics. The late-kinematic rocks included in

this study cover about 50$ of the part of the granitic batholith mapped
by the author. They are characterized by fine to medium grained texture,
grey colour and absence of any planar structure. They are of fairly
uniform composition, essentially consisting of albitic oligoclase,
quartz, microcline, perthite and biotite (fig. 5-4h). Feldspar is
white to pale grey in colour; phenocrysts of this mineral are absent.
Biotite is locally segregated into clots.
 In the central part of the mapped area, inclusions of amphi-
bolitized gabbro, metadiorite, quartz-diorite and tonalite within
the adamellite are abundant (plate l). The adamellite close to
these inclusions is characterized by the presence of basic patches
rich in amphibole. Transitional rocks at the margins of these
xenoliths show gradations between the adamellite and the xenolith
material (As-1009). The Al-Masloukhah adamellite also contains
numerous inclusions • of the older porphyritic synkinematic foliated
granitic rocks, into which it has been intruded (plate 4). A 'ghost1
gneissose structure visible locally in the adamellite is derived
from inclusions of foliated syhkinematic granitic rocks.

4.2.2 Petrography; In thin section, oligoclase with rims of

albite and alkali feldspars are almost equally abundant (Table 5-4 )>
the oligoclase locally forms larger crystals than the alkali feldspar
aid is almost always sericitized.

Quartz occurs in large grains many of which show undulose

extinction. It also occurs as small rounded and subrounded grains
enclosed within the oligoclase or alkali feldspars.

Table 5-4 Modal analyses of Al-Mas loukhah adamellite

Sample no. K-feldspar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic minerals

G-13 40.0 29.0 25.6 5.4

G-290 29.1 41.7 20.2 8.0
As-471 37.7 31.3 26.8 4.2
As-372(a) 39.1 31.8 25.8 3.3
As-466 34.7 33.2 27.0 5.1
As-476 27.8 37.0 33.2 . 3.0
As-477 36.8 32.0 29.0 2.2
AS-479 41.0 30.7 28.0 5.6
As-711 34.8 40.3 23.4 1.5
As-751 31.4 36.3 28.7 3.6
As-752 38.4 38.1 22.6 0.9
As-718 40.7 34.7 19.4 5.2
As-719 39.4 31.3 20.7 8.6
As-727 40.4 27.8 30.0 1.8
As-729 30.2 35.0 27.1 7.7
As-726(a) 30.4 32.4 30.3 6.9
As-726(b) 37.9 36.6 20.8 4.7
As-820 36.0 38.2 19.3 6.5
As-821 37.8 33.9 22.9 5.4
As-822 31.8 38.7 28.2 1.3
As-823 23.4 37.9 20.5 18.2 (cont

Range : 27.8 - 41.0 29.O - 41.7 19.3 - 33.2 0.9 - 18.2

Average : 34.6 36.1 25.0 5.1
Microcline and perthite are intergranular and appear to replace
oligoclase and portions of the groundmass. Locally, it occurs in
small phenocrysts enclosing idiomorphic plagioclase. Myrmikitic
intergrowths are sparingly developed at "borders between plagioclase
and microcline.

Biotite is the main ferromagnesian mineral present. It is

locally altered to chlorite. Muscovite is occasionally associated
with "biotite. Hornblende occurs in areas close to xenoliths. Sphene,
apatite, allanite, muscovite are the common accessory minerals.

4.2.3 History of crystallization; From thin section examination

it appears that the first to crystallize from the melt are plagioclase
and "biotite. Some of the plagioclase reacted with the melt to form an
albitic rim. Orthoclase followed, but a change in the physical con-
ditions . of crystallization led to the crystallization of microcline
also. The first generation of quartz occurs as small crystals in the
groundmass or rounded embayments in the feldspars. And the second,
larger interstitial grains was the last mineral to form.

A post-consolidation soda metasomatism is possibly responsible

for the perthitic intergrowth with microcline to form microcline
perthite.

Chlorite, sphene, allanite and epidote are most likely secondary

deuteric minerals. Sericitization is probably a near surface hydro-
thermal action.

4.2.4 Summary:
The Al-Masloukhah adamellite is characterized by the following:

1) Homogeneous composition, massive, fine to medium even-grained

texture.

2) An absence of inclusions of the biotite schist derived from

the country rocks.

3) An abundance of inclusions of the syn-kinematic granitic rocks

which contain xenoliths of original country rocks.
 4) An abundance of inclusions of pre-existing basic rocks in
the central area.

5) Approximately equal amounts of potash-feldspar and plagioclase,

with the former tending to embay the latter.

6) An absence of foliation.

7) The sharp discordant contacts with syhkinematic granitic rocks,

(fig. 5-2d, 4j).

5.4*3 The post-kinematic granitic rocks

Two types of granitic rocks occurring in the area have been

assigned to this grouping.

1) Al-Hadbah medium-grained "patchy" adamellite.

2) Coarse-grained pink granite.

Both are intruded into the syn- and late-kinematic granitic rocks
1,
in the form of small stocks and dykes covering an area of about 15 Km.,
the contacts with other rocks are usually chilled, discordant and
sharp (fig. 5-2g).

4.3*1 The Al-Hadbah Adamellite

This adamellite is finer-grained than the Al-Masloukhah type and

is characterized by an abundance of dark biotite-muscovite rich
patches, -g-1 cm. in diameter. These patches are uniformly distributed
throughout the rock and are 5-10 cm. apart. Weathered surfaces usually
have a pitted appearance where these patches have been weathered away
into rounded dark hollows (fig. 5-4i)* Inclusions of both the syn-
kinematic and the late-kinematic granitic rocks are abundant.

In thin section both microcline and orthoclase are found in

association with albitic oligoclase and quartz. Biotite, occurs dis-
persed throughout the rock locally biotite and muscovite aggregates
form dark patches. Chlorite, sphene, apatite and magnetite are the
main accessory minerals.
 4.3»2 The coarse-grained pink granite

This granite occurs as small stocks near the contact between

synkinematic and late-kinematic granitic masses. Rarely it occurs
in smaller bodies away from this contact.

This leucocratic granite is characterized by its pinkish to

pinkish-red colour, coarse grain-size and the presence of some
alkali-feldspar phenocrysts. In thin section, potash feldspar, both
orthoclase, orthoclase perthite (fig. 5-4f) and microcline (fig. 5-4g)
are dominant over plagioclase (table 5-5), which is of oligoclase com-
position (An^y 1 Q ). The oligoclase is sericitized along cracks and in
the cores of grains. Biotite is the only mafic mineral present
(0.4 - 5.0 percent).

Table 5-5 Modal analyses of the postkinematic pink granites

Sample no. K-fel&spar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic minerals

G-2 47.1 19.3 29.4 4.2

KP-62 51.7 16.0 25.6 6.7

As-459 55.4 18.1 23.4 3.1

As-468 44.1 18.0 35.3 2.6

As-700 44.1 17.5 36.8 1.6

As-713 45.5 20.1 34.0 0.4

As-819 51.3 20.0 24.3 4.2

As-831 41.2 23.8 30.0 4.97

Range : 41.2 - 55.4 16.0 - 23.8 23.4 - 36.8 0.4 - 6.7

Average : 47.5 19.1 29.9 3.5

4.3.3 Summary

The post-kinematic rocks are homogeneous, unfoliated, even-

grained and pink but locally porphyritic. They occupy only 15 sq.Km.
of the total granitic area. They occur in small stocks and dykes with
sharp chilled contacts against both the syn- and late-kinematic grani-
tic rocks. They are either adamellite in composition, (Al-Hadbah
adamellite) characterized by their uniform spotted texture of the mica
 Granites

Figure 5-4

(a to h taken in transmitted light)

Perthitic microcline phenocryst enclosing plagioclase crystals

with albite rim. Small inclusions of quartz and biotite are
also -present. Post-kinematic granite, CN, G-21o.

Plagioclase crystals enclosed in a large microcline pheno-

cryst. Plagioclase grains sericitized and saussuritized,
zoned, and with albite rim. Myrmikitic intergrowth is
developed at contact with the alkali-feldspar. Ar-Ridaihah
adamellite, CH, As-395-

Microcline phenocryst enclosing sericitized plagioclase

crystals with albite rim. Note the irregular grain
boundary with quartz (right) and biotite (left). Ar-^
Hidaihah l adamellite, CN, As-595.

Microcline phenocryst replacing plagioclase. Ar-Ridaihah'

adamellite, CN, As-395-

Myrmikitic intergrowth at contact of earlier plagioclase

(bottom) and younger alkali-feldspar (top). Ar-Ridaihah'\
adamellite, CN, As-395-

Orthoclase-perthite, abundant exsolved lamellae of perthite

with variable dimensions. Post-kinematic granite, CN,
G-218.

Well-developed cross-hatching in microcline crystal.

Post-kinematic granite, CN, G-218.

Equigranular adamellite. Al-Masloukhah adamellite, CN,

As-820.

Uniformly distributed patches of biotite and muscovite in

post-kinematic patchy adamellite. Locality G-266 (Plate 5 ) .

Dykes of late-kinematic granite in earlier synkinematic

porphyritic adamellite. Locality As-467 (Plate 5)-
vfa• • Vv v-. ; * •
2 ' 7: >> I' K-
'

^ '' • V »" \ /FT-

patches, or coarser grained and granitic in composition. They are
devoid of inclusions of earlier rocks and are not contaminated.

5.5 MINOR INTRUSIONS

5.5*1 Pregranite intrusions

5.1.1 Microdiorite dykes

These are narrow dykes (J-2 m. across) which strike approximately

160°. They occur predominantly cutting the layered basic rocks of
Samrah Mine area. These are the oldest dykes present in the area and
are cut by younger basic and acidic dykes. They are usually porphyri-
tic with large euhedral plagioclase phenocrysts set in a groundmass
of approximately equal amounts of feldspar and pyroxene and/or
amphibole. In some of these dykes up to 10/o of quartz is present.
In thin section the plagioclase and pyroxene frequently show subophitic
intergrowth. Small zoned euhedral to subedral laths of plagioclase
range in composition from A n ^ to An^g. The pyroxene forms stumpy
euhedral grains which are marginally altered to amphibole. Apatite,
opaque ore minerals, biotite and hematite are present in accessory
amounts. Alteration of the main constituents is extensive, plagioclase
being altered to sericite and pyroxene to amphibole, chlorite and
locally carbonate.

5.5*2 Postgranite intrusions

5.2.1 Aplites and pegmatite

Veins and lenses of leucocratic, pink pegmatite, usually associated

with aplite, range in width from less than 1 cm. up to 10 m., generally
they are 1-3 m. across. They are extremely abundant in the granitic
rocks of the area and are randomly orientated. They are also abundant
in the Al-Jealani basic intrusion, where they have consistently out-
ward1:: dips of 10°-50° which contrast markedly with the inward dips of
the layered .mass.

The aplites are fine grained, hololeucocratic rocks which, in

thin section are seen to be mainly composed of quartz, orthoclase,
albite, biotite and/or muscovite.
 Some pegmatites exhibit zonal differentiation, for example in
the white plugs in the vicinity of Samrah ancient mine, where the
core is occupied by quartz and is rimmed by pink orthoclase with
subordinate muscovite; others, usually dykes, exhibit no zonal differ-
entiation. Quin (1964) found a lithium-bearing mica float
(Lepidolite) in the white plug west of Samrah mine. Eijkelbook (1966)
reported the occurrence of large crystals of andalusite in an
orthoclase-rich zone in one of these pegmatite plugs. Pockets of
tourmaline and muscovite are present in pegmatites injected into the
layered intrusion.

5.2.2 Granitic dykes

These dykes are formed of fine grained pink rock of adamellitic

or granitic composition. They cut all types of rock and are occasion-
ally randomly orientated. They are most abundant in the areas SSE of
Musiddah village and south of Hamrur village (plate l). In both areas
they generally trend east-west.

The modal variation in these dykes is shown in (table 5-6).

Most of the dyke rocks analysed indicated adamellite composition. The
rest are either granodiorite, granite or even quartz monzonite in
composition (fig. 5-7b).

Table 5-6 Modal analyses for granitic dykes in the area

Sample no. K-feldspar Plagioclase Quartz Mafic minerals

G-10-b 45*2 21.8 32.0 1.0

G-10-c 41*7 24.0 33*0 1*3
As-433 38.0 38.2 21.6 2.2
As-461 47*3 17.0 34*8 0.9
As-707 24.8 37*9 34*3 3*0
As-720 51.8 30.7 13*8 3*7
As-721 27.6 35*8 31.8 4.8
As-721 34.8 34*8 26.7 3*7
As-722 31*2 39*6 24*9 4*3
12.6 29*3 11.2
6.6
As-724 46.9
As-725 23.7 41*7 28.0
As-730 35*2 29.1 34*6 1.1
 5.2.3 Dacite, microdiorite, quartz microdiorite and Ehyolite dykes*

These dykes generally occur infilling en-echelon tension fractures

which are locally sigmoidal and which run east-west to east - northeast
west - southwest over long distances (plate l). Clear sharp chilled
contacts with country rocks are characteristic.

The dacite dyke sworm is more abundant and forms four groups in
the south part of the area, a fifth group occurs in the central part.
These dykes show good flow banding and closely developed jointing para-
llel to the walls. There is local primary microfolding of the flow
banding, usually parallel to irregularities in the walls.

The dacite dykes are porphyritic with phenocrysts of potash feld-

spar, zoned plagioclase and more rarely quartz set in a fine grained
groundmass of quartz, feldspar, biotite and amphibole.

The microdiorite and quartz microdiorite dykes are dominant in the

mid-western and northern parts of the mapped area (plate l), where they
infill west - northwesterly trending tension fractures. Towards the
south, they are less abundant and run in an east - west direction. They
are composed of plagioclase phenocrysts set in a groundmass of andesine,
pyroxene, amphibole. and chlorite. Up to about jfo quartz is present in
some of these dykes.

The Khyolite dykes are most common in the northern part of the
mapped area where they trend 110°. They range from 2-5m. in thickness
and are intruded into biotite and sericite schists. They infill tension
fractures in en-echelon pattern. The rhyolite dykes are locally in
contact with microdiorite dykes without any cross-cutting relationships.
These dykes are pale grey or pink in colour and are porphyritic, with
phenocrysts of potash feldspar, set in a groundmass of chlorite, quartz
and accessory opaque minerals. Other rhyolite dykes are spherulitic
in which the spherulites are locally fringed with amphibole.

* Volcanic terms are used because these dyke rocks exhibit textures
similar to those of volcanics, the groundmass is cryptocrystalline.
 209.

5.6 GEOCHEMISTRY AND MODAL VARIATION OP THE GRANITIC ROCKS

5.6.1 Modal Variation

Modal analyses for the various granitic rocks in the whole

Plutonic complex (tables 5- 1,2,3,4,5) have been plotted onto ternary
diagrams using potash feldspar (p), quartz (q) and plagioclase feld-
spar (P) as co-ordinates after recalculating the modes to 100$,
ignoring the mafics. The coarse grained synkinematic granitic rocks
show a wide range of modal variation than the fine grained granitic
rocks (fig. 5-6 a and b). Rock types vary from quartz-monzonodiorite
to granodiorite to adamellite and locally to granite, thus forming a
heterogeneous group of granitic rocks. The finer grained Al-Masloukhah
adamellite, however, shows a concentration in the adamellite compart-
ment of the diagram (fig. 5-6 b).

The post-kinematic granite (fig. 5-7a) shows a close group of plots

in the granite zone of the ternary diagram, except for three out of
ten samples, two of which have adamellite composition and one quartz-
monzonite•

The ternary diagram (fig. 5-5) for quartz, total feldspars and
total mafic minerals shows a similar spread for the synkinematic rocks
towards the mafic corner, while both late- and post-kinematic types
show clusters with much less mafics, with the post- still less than
the late-kinematic. This suggests that the synkinematic rocks were
contaminated by the more basic country rocks.

5.6.2 Normative and chemical variation

6.2.1 Introduction: A total of 16 complete major-element analy-

ses was done by atomic absorption methods (table 5-7). Electronic
computing techniques were employed, using these results, to derive the
C.I.P.W. norms for the samples (table 5-3) and to calculate a differ-
entiation index based on the total of normative minerals quartz + orthoclase
+ albite + leucite + nepheline + kaliophilite (table 5-9). The norms were
also used in the triangular plots of the NaAlSi^Og - KAlSi^Og - SiC>2 - H^O
experimental system, projected on the anhydrous base (Tuttle and Bowen 1953),
Table 5-7
Postkinematic -
Synkinematic - granitic rocks Latekinematic - granitic rocks Granitic dykes
granitic rocks
As-701 As-704 As-706 As-206 As-372 As-395 As-726 As-729 As-822 As-823 As-700 As-819 G-266 ISA-39' ISA-16' ISA-39'O 6"
(a)

69.50 64.32 63.83 69.00 73.18 75.20 76.14 75.45 70.83 69.20 79.62 70.83 76.64 63.80 71.30 71.69

0.58 0.30 0.67 0.30 0.26 0.42 0.12 0.67 0.05 0.17 0.02 0.13 0.08 0.68 0.35 0.09

12.66 13-82 13.50 13.06 12.80 11.10 11.45 10.39 13.40 10.01 8.71 13.64 10.17 16.00 14.93 15.50

2.48 3.19 3.46 1.22 0.62 0.28 0.43 1.11 0.56 2.94 0.54 0.61 0.93 1.84 O.56 0.53

3.46 4.55 5.30 1.56 1.95 1.10 0.7-3 1.64 0.80 3.92 1.73 3.40 1.14 3.76 1.76 1.03

0.06 0.08 0.09 0.04 0.02 0.09 0.03 0.03 0.01 0.07 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.12 0.03 0.02
1.24 1.99 1.62 0.66 0.23 0.61 0.13 0.38 0.33 2.14 0.09 0.07 0.17 2.80 0.26 0.27

2.75 3.27 5.15 2.24 1.26 1.26 0.83 0-95 1.33 2.70 0.71 0.81 0.84 1.79 0.00 0.51

4.08 4.53 3.96 6.87 5.10 5.12 4.41- 4.48 4.50 4.15 2.89 4.30 4.31 3.82 4-44 4.16
4.04 3.01 2.61 4.90 4.14 3.75 4.51 4.66 7.80 3.88 4.91 5.78 4.36 2.50 5.03 4.63

0.68 0.53 1.02 0.62 0.14 0.50 0.25 0.54 0.24 0.98 0.22 0.10 0.50 3.10 0.50 1.52

0*07 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.06 0.10 0.07 0.13 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.08 0 . 0 2 0.40 0.07 0.06
0.07 0.09 0.14 0.04 0.01 0.07 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.09 0.02 0.01 0.02 0.14 0.05 0.02

101.47 99.73 101.41 100.59 99.77 99.60 99.12 100.45 100.04 100.28 99.52 99.77 99.21 100.77 99.28 100.03

Analysts: A. A1 Shanti and S. Farouki

Table 5-8 Normative analyses

Postkinematic -
Synkinematic - granitic rocks Latekinematic - granitic rocks granitic rocks Granitic dykes

G—266 As-700 As-819 ISA-39 ISA-16' ISA-39106"

As-706 As-701 As-704 As-206 As-372 As-395 As-726 As-729 As-822 As-823
a

Qtz 22.95 15-83 14.91 24.81 31.98 33-16 33.81 18.83 22.75 36.22 45-10 20.02 22.35 24.95 27.72
17-91
C 4.09 2.30 2.77
23.88 28.96 24.47 22.16 26.66 27.54 46.10 22.93 25.77 29.02 34.16 14-78 29.73 27.37
Or 15.43 17.79
34.52 39.90 42.79 36.22 33.79 27.50 25.50 29-89 28.04 17.47 36.38 32.32 37.57 35.20
Ab 33.51 38.33
4.30 8.49 00.85 0.33 2.40
An 11.36
Ne
7.40 5.93 8.14 5.37 4.79 2.95 3.88 4.41 10.64 3.50 2.99 2.75
DO 11.13
Wo O.48 0.24 0.54

4-38 3.18 7-38 0.56 0.64 0.94 5.97; 0.62 1.81 4.28 11.46 2.89 2.01
By
01
5.02 3.60 4.62 0.74 1.96 0.88 2.67 0.81 0.77
Mt
Em
0.72 0.57 0.57 0.49 0.80 0.23 1.27 0.09 0.32 0.15 0.04 0.25 1.29 0.66 0.17
11 1.27
0.21 0.09 0.02 0.17 0.05 0.05 0.02 0.21' 0.05 0.05 0.02 0.33 0.12 0.05
Hap 0.33 0.17
3.53 0.31 0.81 1.24 3.21 1.62 4.60 2.69 1.56
Ac
Ns 3.31 1.44 0.49 1.57 2.50 1.25 1.21

H2O 0.58 0.70 0.20 0.60 0.32 0.67 0.27 1.01, 0.52 0.27 0.18 3.49 0.57 1.58
1.07 0.75

Total j101.41 101.47 99.73 100.59 99.77 99.60 99.12 100.45 99-89 100.28 99.21 99.52 99-78 100.75 99.28 100.03
 212.

Table 5-9 Differentiation index - granitic rocks

Sample No. D. Index* Average Remarks

As-706 66.85
As-701 81.35
Synkinematic
As-704 71.95
81.05 granitic rocks
AS-206 83-77
AS-572 92.07
As-395 90.36

As-726(a) 93.61
As-729 88.85 late kinematic
87.11
As-822 90.43 granitic rocks
As-823 75.57

G-266 90.43 post kinematic

As-700 91.59 90.86
granitic rocks
As-819 90.56

ISA-391 69.45
ISA-16 1
92.25 83-99 granitic dykes
ISA-39,6" 90.29
-

* Differentiation index
 i.e. , the Q - Or - Ab diagram (fig. 5-8b). Other triangular
diagrams plotted were Or - Ab - An (fig. 5-9a). It should be noted
that the components in each case were converted to total 100$, and
as such are taken as indicators of relationships, rather than exact
representation of the relative positions of the samples in the indi-
vidual systems. These methods of plotting also tend to be selective
as only a limited number of components is used.

The composition of the granitic rocks with respect to the minerals

quartz, albite and orthoclase is restricted to a relatively small
range and are clearly grouped when plotted on a ternary diagram (fig.
5-8b).

The A.P.M. diagram, exhibits an approximately linear trend

(fig. 5-9a) and is in accordance with the alkali - lime index of
Peacock (1931) (fig- 5-10).

Greenwood and Brown (1972) concluded that the plutonic granitic

rocks in the north-east compartment of the Arabian shield in which
the Ad-Dawadmi batholith is situated is formed from calc-alkaline
magma.

In the following the chemistry of the various granitic rocks

syn-, late- and post-kinematic is discussed separately.

6.2.2 The synkinematic granitic rocks which are of wide modal

variation ranging from quartz-monzonodiorite to granite in composition,
exhibit on the ternary diagrams (fig. 5-8 and 9) clustering towards
the sodic or (Ab) corner.

The CaO - Na 2 0 - K 2 0 diagram (fig. 5-8a) shows a trend extending

from calcic towards low calcic with more soda enrichment relative to
potash. The A.P.M. diagram (fig. 5-9) shows a variation from low
alkalic towards higher alkalic. This chemical variation is in accord-
ance with the modal variation. Both point out the wide range of
contamination, (fig. 10) gives an alkali - lime index of 57-5$ Si0 2
indicating origin from a calc-alkaline melt (Peacock, 1931 )•
Volume percent of quartz (Q), 40
total feldspar ( F ) and
dark minerals (M) in
Synkinematic granite ( O )
late-kinematic granite ( • ) A
post - kinematic ( A ) A • N
©• A
granitic rocks and
O
granitic dykes
data from table
( + )
+
+ ° A• •
• ,30

• • • H.Z3
+
i •

•
•
• .20
Fig: 5-5 •

10

V
20 10 100
 215.

Fig: 5-6 Volume percent of Quartz (Q )t pJagioclase feldspars(P)

and alkali feldspars(A) for "a" Synkinematic
and for "b" late Kinematic granitic rocks
Volume percent of Quartz ( Q ) plagioc lose feldspars (P )
and alkali feldspars (A) for V Post Kinematic granitic
rocks b" granitic dykes.
 217.

Fig: 5 - 8
CaO

a.

Na20

O Syn-kinematic

• Late-kinematic

A Post-kinematic
 Fe

a.

The curve is the boundary line between

the pigeonitic (tholeiitic) rock series of
H a t i z y o - z i m a Volcano and the hypers-
thenic ( c a l c - a l k a l i c ) series of Amagi
Volcano in Japan (Kuno 1968).

Na + K- M

b.

Fig: 5—9 Alk-F-M and Normative diagrams

a) Alk-represents alkali oxides, Fe-total iron,
and Mg-Magnesium oxide.
b) Or-Ab-An.
 219.

Percent
CaO 2
K 0 + Na 0 2

ro
o Oo rv>X oo rox oo
o-• +o o o o
o +
2
x o2 CO
o ro° S ro
"o w o o
T> CO
o
 ca Percent percent
CN
CaO FeO + MgO

Co O fo CJ ^ cn O" v4
_i
— i IOi
As 701 -

As 704 -

</> As 706
3
i- As 206
CD
3
As 372

As 395-

As 726 a

n As 729
0
® As 822-
1
As 823- 13 contaminated
CD
3

As 700-

O As 819 -J
CO
G 226 -

*0ZZ
 221.

6.2.3 The late kinematic granitic rocks show grouping with

little separation, or small area overlap with the previous rock types
on the ternary diagrams (fig. 5-8b and 9b). These rocks are more
on the potassium rich side. The A.P.M. diagram (fig. 5-9) shows high
alkalies.

The homogenous nature of this granitic rock exhibited by the

modal analysis (fig. 5-6b) does not appear so clearly here. This is
probably due to the limited number of chemical analyses performed on
these rocks.

The alkali - lime index for the late-kinematic rocks is 55.0$

Si02 (fig. 10) indicating origin from an alkali-calcic melt (Peacock,
1931).

6.2.4 The post-kinematic granitic rocks show on the ternary

diagram (fig. 5-8a and 9b) a high (Or) and a constant low lime. This
indicates a homogeneous non-contaminated magma more on the alkalic
side than both syn- and late-kinematic rocks. This is in accordance
with the modal analysis, diagram (fig. 5-7a).

5.7 GENERAL DISCUSSIONS AND CONCLUSIONS

1. The three granitic rock units, syn-, late- and post-kinematic

are derived from one magmatic source of average calc-alkaline com-
position. The lack of associated large amounts of basic intrusive
rocks suggests that this magmatic source originated from a crustal
melt.

2. The values (fig. 5-9a) appear to fit a simple differentiation

trend with time, along which alkalies are progressively concentrated
relative to iron and magnesium. Rocks of the synkinematic quartz-
monzonodiorite and granodiorite plot towards the Ee-Mg rich end of
the trend and are separated from the rocks of adamellite composition.
This suggests that magma followed one path of differentiation, with
the synkinematic more calcic first, followed by granodiorite, adam-
ellite and finally granite (fig. 5-ll)«
 222.

3. The contamination with ferromagnesian minerals from the pre-

existing country rocks is extensive' and decreases towards the more
alkalic rocks, i.e. following the same differentiation trend.

4. The syhkinematic intrusive rocks show extensive enrichment

with xenoliths at the present level of erosion. This suggests some
contamination of magma by partial assimilation of xenolithic material.

5. The primary flow fabric defined by the preferred orientation

of the alkali-feldspar grains, and less distinct, the mafics, suggests
that the granite melt had been generated below this present level.
Structures in the pre-existing rocks appear to have controlled this
flow direction.

The prevailing gradational contacts and the inhomogeneity of the

synkinematic granitic rocks indicate an undisturbed region in the
upper low liquid portion of the zone of melting, Tuttle and Bowen (1958) •
The late kinematic rocks which are homogeneous and unfoliated
represent the more fluid portions of the zone of melting. These were
intruded into higher levels giving rise to sharp contacts with the
synkinematic rocks.

The post-kinematic granitic rocks were emplaced last and have

sharp chilled contacts against both older intrusive rock types. They
are also less contaminated and more alkalic*
 CHAPTER 6

FRACTURES AND JOINTS

6.1 INTRODUCTION

Well exposed linear features attract the attention in aerial

photographs of Ad-Dawadrai district. These are surface expressions
of extensive faulting in the area. The shear zones in the granitic
batholith are loci of the zinc - lead - silver mineralization.

The complex fractures pattern is related to the transcurrent sinistral

Najd Fault System (Brov/n et al. 1972, a series of major lineaments
extending for over 1200 Kms. (fig 6-1) in a northwesterly direction.

Study of the fracture patterns in the district shows that the

fractures can be explained as a result of modification of a regional
stress field by movements on a series of wrench faults which are
considered to be part of the Najd fault system.

6.2 GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF THE FRACTURE SYSTEM

After the Hejaz Orogeny (1000 - 660 ra.y), the district was
affected by faulting during the Najd Orogeny (660 - 570 m.y). The
northwesterly wrench faults were the first to form, followed by the
secondary fault systems. The faulting was accompanied by intrusion
of the numerous dykes predominantly of dacitic and microdioritic
composition in the south, and rhyolitic and microdioritic in the
north. At a later stage fluids v/hich deposited quartz, sulphides
with chlorite and carbonates invaded the fractures. Renewed
movements along these fractures during and after mineral deposition
caused extensive brecciation. Three generations of hydrothermal
solutions are indicated by quartz overgrowths. Displacements of
the early granite pegmatite dykes commonly indicate the direction
and amount of the strike-slip on the faults.

6.3 FIRST ORDER WRENCH FAULTING

The prominent sinistral shear zones comprising close en echelon

fractures trending 135° £ 5° are part of the Najd fault system. The
 224.

£1M!
 225.

width of the shear zone in these faults ranges from 15 - 30 metres.

The rocks within the shears are strongly fractured, brecciated and
cemented by quartz, carbonate and chlorite gangue and generally
stained brown and standing prominently above the surrounding ground.
The Hamrur, Saffaga and Urn Ergaba in the south (Fig. 6-2) are the
best exposed major faults,

6.4 SECOND ORDER FAULTING

The second order faulting is associated with the first order

wrench movements in the form of shear fractures with strike-slip
movements, and extension fractures which have suffered dilation
only.

6.4.1 Shears

At most localities one member of a pair of shear fractures

dominates to the exclusion of the other. The northeasterly trending
components have a strong parallelism and are approximately at equal
separations. They are characteristically curved near to first
order faults. In the area between the Hamrur and Urn Ergaba faults
they form a sigmoidal pattern (fig. 6-2).

These shear fractures are prominent at their outcrops due to

post-movement silicification and alteration of bedrock which has
produced differential resistance to weathering between shear zones
and country rocks. The width of individual shears ranges from
7-20 m., with outcrop relief generally between 1-3 m., but locally
up to 10 m. with a dyke-like appearance.

Mineralizing fluids and subsequent oxidation have coloured

the shear zones amber or brown. Complex fracture cleavages and
extensive brecciation were developed v/ithin the shear zones indicating
repeated deformation.

6.4.2 Extension fractures

East-v/est trending sets of en echelon extension fractures formed

synchronously v/ith the second order shears are filled by a swarm of
LEGEND

Zn.Pb-Ag Vein
Second order Fault

Syn.kinematio Dyke

Major Fault ( N a j d

Granite. Adamellite

Basic Mass

Schist

RJ
ON
 227.'

dacite, microdiorite and rhyolite dykes (see section 6.4*7). The

dykes show chilling against the wall rocks* Quartz-sulphide vein
deposits invaded the extension fissures adjacent to second order shears.

6.4.3 Consideration of fracture analysis implications

McKinstry (1953) suggested an explanation for some of the

structures based on a two dimensional analysis of the stresses
which caused secondary faulting. Moody and Hill (1956) proposed
that as a result of reorientation and partial relief of the regional
stress field during movements on the wrench faults, second and third
order faults are expected to form. Stress trajectories for this
complex fracture system were constructed at the suggestion of
(J. McM. Moore) and helped in the analysis and interpretation of
the fault system.

Stress trajectories are defined as sets of orthogonal lines

representing the orientation of the principal stresses, compressive,
extensive and maximum shearing stresses at a specified point. This
concept of stress trajectories permits the representation of progres-
sive changes in the orientation of the principal stress axes within
a stress field, while maintaining their orthogonal relationships one
to another.

The formation of a major wrench fault by the failure of a

previously isotropic medium in a compressive stress field results
in local distortion of that field. The distortion is at a maximum
in the vicinity of the tip of the fault and is reduced away from
the end, as the regional field re-establishes itself across the
moving fault, modified only by frictional drag on the fault plane.

Chinnery ( 1 9 6 6 ) considered the conditions apertaining around a

moving wrench fault under (a) pure shear and (b) uniaxial compressive
stress, and constructed maximum shearing stress trajectories for each
of the two models (fig. 6-3). Theoretical considerations render the
pure shear model unacceptable as a mechanism for wrench faulting
(N.J. Price, personal communication).
 228.

Theoretical m a x i m u m shearing stress t r a j e c t o r i e s at the

end of a sinistral wrench fault" ( a f t e r Chinnery )
6.4.4 Comparison with theoretical models

In order to reconstruct a palaeo-stress system that is comparable

with the theoretical models like those of Chinnery from a fracture
pattern, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

(a) failure should have happened before any significant ductile

deformation took place.

(b) The country rocks of the area should be approximately isotropic

i.e. devoid of any planar fabric discontinuities, sedimentary or
, tectonic.

(c) The area should be near or include the ends of one of the major
v/rench faults caused by the stress system.

The area represented in (fig. 6-2) of the Ad-Dawadmi district

fulfils the above requirements, where

(a) There is no field evidence of ductile behaviour in the rocks

of this area.

(b) The igneous fabric in the Al-Masloukhah adamellite which

comprises over 90% of the area is homogeneous and isotropic.

Despite minor shearing of its contact, the Al-Jealani layered

basic intrusion behaved as an integral part of the otherwise -
isotropic adamellite during faulting. This is shown by the
lack of distortion of the dacite dyke traces (<5"v trajectories)
v/hich out the bat hoi it h and basic mass.

Contraction joints were formed during cooling of the granitic

magma, but these joints did not influence the later Najd stress
field..

(c) The three major v/rench faults in the south area have at some
period terminated there, although subsequent movements have
caused the Um Ergaba fault to propagate a further 16 Kms. north-
westward, diverging from its previous course and termination at
X (fig. 6-4).
Evidence of a distorted stress field around the tip of the
Hamrur and Um Ergaba faults has been preserved by a freakish
 fig: 6 - 4
FORCAST SHEAR ORIENTATIONS
Anticipated conjugate
shear fractures.

Shear fractures
represented by
actual f a u l t s .

Potential extension
A trajectory of the
Hamrur fault.
Previous termination
X of the Um Ergaba
f ault.

MoM:
%
 combination of second order faulting and the simultaneous
intrusion of dykes into the related, tension fractures.

6.4.5 Relationships of joints and the second order fractures

Figs. 6-5 and 6-6, show the stereographic plots and the rose
diagram for the joint sets in four separate areas of the district
(plate 5). The compound diagram in both figures shows that four
main sets of joints occur. Three of the main joint sets coincide
with the later Najd east-west tension fractures and conjugate shears.
The fourth joint set is a strong set normal to the regional
compressive stress orientation during the Najd faulting. It
seems possible that this set originated partly as cooling joints in th
in the granite batholith and partly as relaxation joints after the
faulting. In the former case the orientation normal to the
maximum compressive stress would mean that they remained passive
during the east-west Najd compression. Many of the cooling
joints in the granite batholith v/ere intruded and "sealed" by
granite pegmatites.

6.5 STRESS TRAJECTORIES

6.5.1 Principal stresses

There are three sets of principal stresses, (compressive or

extensive) which are orthogonal, and one pair of maximum shearing
stresses are oriented at 45° to the maximum and minimum principal
stresses.

In the upper crust one of the three principal stresses acts

normal, to the earth's surface and two parallel with it. In flat
or subdued topography one principal axis is therefore approximately
vertical and two horizontal. Wrench faults form under conditions
in v/hich the maximum and minimum compressive stresses are horizontal
 fig: 6-5

Group 4 Summary
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Grs.l 2 5 4
0 - 1/2 % 0 - 1/2 % 0 - 1 % 0 - 1/2 % 0 - I %
1/2-2 % 1/2 - 2 % 1 - 3 % 1/2 - 2 % 1 - %
2-4 % 2 - 3 % 3 - 7 %
4 - 6 % 3 - 4 % 7 - ii %
2 - 3 %
3 - 5 %
2 - %
3 -
%
%
•mm
•
6 - 1 0 % 4 - 7 % II - 13% 5 - 7 % 4 -
 J0£

157 Joints Group 2

212 Joints

Group 3
122 Joints

Fig: 6 - 6

Summary, groups I , 2 , 3 a n d 4
7 2 7 J o i n t readings
(fig. 6-7).

1 3
Thus the four sets of trajectories of & ,g and the two
maximum shearing stresses can be represented in plan.

6.5.2 Construction of stress trajectory in Ad-Dawadrai district

In Ad-Dawadmi, the southern map area where the fracture

systems are very well exposed, a palaeo-trajectory system has
been constructed from the fracture pattern (fig. 6-8). The
•7
plane normal to the least principal compressive stress ( )
is the orientation for potential extensional fissures. In this
area the extensional fractures have been intruded by a dyke
swarm.
Since the maximum compressive stress ( is horizontal
under v/rench fault conditions, the traces of the dykes are paral-
lel to the trajectories of the maximum compressive stress. The
maximum compressive stress also bisects the angle between related
conjugate shears. It is therefore possible to locate ^ in
localities v/here two complementary conjugate shears are observed.
The average angle between the conjugate shear planes in Ad-Dawadmi
is 72°. The angle between and each shear plane is therefore
36° (fig. 6-7). Using only the angular relationships of the
tensional fractures, whose only movement was dilation, and shears
whose sense of displacement is known, it is possible to reconstruct
a map of the palaeotrajectories of maximum compressive stress ( & ),
minimum compressive stress ( g ) (fig. 6-8) and maximum shearing
stress ( T ) (fig. 6-9).

Using the angle between the maximum shearing stress ( T ) and

failure surface (S) (9°) and between the maximum^compressive stress
) and failure surface
(S) (36 )
a map of the anticipated
orientations of secondary faults throughout the area was constructed
(TgMax. Compressive stress
d^Intermed.Compr. stress
<S Min. Compressive stress
*X Max. Shearing stress
S Shear failure plane
STRESS TRAJECTORIES

Maximum. Compressive
Stress <j (deduced
from secondary faults)

Minimum Compressive
Stress (perpend,
to ( T 1 )
 fig;6-9
STRESS TRAJECTORIES

Maximum shearing
stress trajectories
(showing sense
of movement,)

5 Km

/
(fig. 6-4). This should be compared with faults shown on the
geological map (fig. 6-2) with which there is a good correlation.

6.6 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN FIRST AND SECOND ORDER FRACTURES

The complex secondary fault system is mainly related to the

Hamrur and Saffaga faults, but not the Um Ergabah. The three faults
are part of a larger zone of en echelon wrench faults associated v/ith
the Najd fault system. Both Hamrur and Saffaga faults end in the
area and it seems likely that at some stage the Um Ergabah fault
also terminated at X, where it shows localised splay branching and
a sudden change of direction.

The sinusoidal northwesterly trending trajectories emanating

from the tips of the Hamrur (A) (fig. 6-4) and Saffaga faults represents
probable trends for the extension for the two faults. In the event
of continued propagation the two faults would take lines diverging
or curving from their previous course (fig. 6-3-).

It is probable that the north-v/est deflection of Um Ergabah

fault was influenced by the presence, in its path, of the basic mass.
No secondary faulting occurred as the Um Ergabah fault extended along
the new northwesterly course'.

In contrast, stress conditions at the tips of the Hamrur and

Saffaga faults were very complicated and resulted in piecemeal
failure of the adamellite, perhaps as a result of higher confining
pressures. This fracturing may have happened either during the
movement of the Hamrur and Saffaga faults or in response to later
renewed compression which, under lower confining pressures might
otherwise have induced further propagation of the main faults.

It is not possible to deduce the exact age relations of the

three faults but since the dykes which are synchronous with the
Hamrur and Saffaga secondary fractures are not displaced by the
Um Ergabah fault and locally intrude the fault plane, it seems
likely that it is older than the Hamrur and Saffaga faults and
already crossed the area at the time of dyke intrusions The Um
Ergaba fault did not disturb the regional stress field indicating
that this field was re-established after the extension of the fault
had stabilized and before the dyke intrusion.

The main disturbance of the regional stress field was by the

Hamrur and Saffaga faults during the intrusion of dykes.

The three first order v/rench faults are almost certainly the
products of the same east-v/est compressive stress system, each perio-
dically moving independently to temporarily relieve the stress increase.
The concentration of the stress at the tips of the faults as the
stresses built up provided a strong inducement for the further
propagation (Hamrur and Saffaga) and the deflection (Um Ergaba) of
the faults.

6.7 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN FAULTS OF THE SECOND ORDER AND DYKES

The dykes invaded the tensional fissures before the relaxation

of the compressive stresses and are therefore synkinematic (in relation
to this last deformational phase). Locality G-ll illustrates the
relationships (fig. 6-10).

The second order shear zone v/as formed by failure in a local

stress system in which plunged westward at 10°. Movement on the
shear v/as extral as shown by the displacement of the pre-existing
granite-pegmatite dyke. In the vicinity of the shear the orientation
of the stress system was modified during movement and the dacite magma
utilized the curved extension fracture
1 - ^
2 surface) normal to
3
the least compressive stress ^ to gain access. The curvature of
the dyke therefore demonstrates the distorted stress trajectory.
The magma failed almost completely to intrude the shear indicating that
the confining pressure acting across the shear was greater than
the hydraulic pressure of the magma. The only dacite in the shear
itself is a series of small lenticular pods which have chilled margins
like the dyke. the magma
These pods represent the aborted efforts of
to enter the shear plane under hydraulic pressure (P ) against the
m

resistance of <s~ .
n
 It can therefore be concluded:

p / (dilation of the tension fractures by the

intruding magma),

but pm ^ (component of the cf"*" acting normal to the

failure to intrude the shear)

n
therefore > f ^ . pm 3
9

In addition to the tension fractures formed by the faulting, the

dacite magma may have intruded pre-existing joints oriented normal to
3
9

6.8 RELATIONSHIPS OF VEIN ORE DEPOSITS TO SECOND ORDER FRACTURES

The hydrothermal ore bearing fluids invaded the fault and fracture
systems under hydraulic pressure after the relief of the confining
n
stress . The fluids, were not therefore subjected to the same
constraints as the dyke magma and as a result they entered the shears
and extension fractures un-occupied or only partly filled by dykes.
En echelon extension veins mainly on the northeasterly trending shears
also contain ore bodies (Samrah prospect). The dominant control on the
movement of these fluids v/as the permeability of shears and extension
fractures unfilled by dykes. Fig. 6-11 shows the rose diagrams for
all ancient workings in the district. The summary rose diagram (e)
shows that all the orebodies of the ancient workings occupy the
conjugate pair of shears as well as the E-W tension fractures.

6.9 SCALE FACTOR

The construction of trajectories in Ad-Dawadmi was carried out on

maps of 1 : 100,000 scale. The results illustrate the disturbance of
the regional stress field by the major faults in the area, in particular
the Hamrur fault. Movements on the second order faults in turn
disturbed local stress fields in their vicinity (locality G-ll, fig.
6-10), in the same way as the regional field v/as affected by the
first order faults. This disturbance led to minor third order
 242.

a
Ar-Ridaniyah
Arja ancient workings
ancient workings
47 readings
22 readings

Sidriyah vicinity;
ancient workings
c. 103 reqdings
Samroh vicinity;
ancient workings
89 readings

Fig: 6-11
Summary frequency diagram
for all ancient workings
in the district
256 readings
fractures adjacent to second order faults.

On a regional scale, the entire Najd Fault System across the

Arabian shield might be amenable to approximate stress trajectory
analysis. The system shows many of the characteristics of major
wrench faults in other parts of the world. These include the
truncations and direction changes which are thought to represent
pauses during episodic propagation and spasmodic movements on the
fault lines. One of these is seen in Ad-Dawadmi on the Um Ergaba
fault.

A suitably exposed fault system in isotropic rocks is amenable

to stress trajectory analysis of fracture traces from a regional
scale to the scale of a single exposure.

6.10 CONCLUSIONS

The hydrothermal Zn-Pb-Ag vein mineralization in Ad-Dawadmi

district is structurally controlled along faults and fractures
developed in the granitic batholith. The fracture systems,
particularly those which are well exposed in the south on a terrain
of subdued relief are amenable to fracture analysis.

The stress trajectory analysis provides a useful analytical

method for the elucidation of the fracture systems at all scales
from regional to those of individual exposures.

The second order faults and extensional fractures, usually

curved, are most commonly developed near the ends of major wrench
faults. Not all major wrench faults, however, have second order
faults associated with them.

The secondary fracture systems associated with the Hamrur and

Saffaga faults correspond closely to the theoretical model for stress
conditions in the vicinity of the end of a wrench fault formed under
uniaxial compressive stress. In making comparison with the model,
allowance must be made for the (9°) angle between the maximum shearing
stress ( T ) and failure surfaces (S) which are represented by the
actual faults.
 In any one locality one member of each conjugate shear pair
dominates to the exclusion of its complement. Locally, the com-
plementary shear later took over and displaced its predecessor as
movement on the major fault continued.

The regional stress field in Ad-Dawadmi has been re-oriented

near the tip of a first order v/rench during the fault movements.
The whole fault pattern of the district can be explained by the
local disturbance of a single regional stress field in which the
compressive stresses acted east-i/est. The three major v/rench
faults entered the area from the south.

The Hamrur and Saffaga terminated in the area while the Ura
Ergabah now ends 16 kms northwestward, but its movements and
propagation were spasmodic, and a previous termination from v/hich
it diverged can be seen south of the layered basic mass.

The homogeneous fracture pattern confirms that the adamellite

and the incorporated basic mass behaved as an isotropic medium
during faulting, the pre-faulting joints being passive or sealed
by granite pegmatite veins.

Outside the batholith fault patterns have been influenced by

the rock fabrics in the schists and trajectory construction is
not possible.

The dyke swarms were "syn-faulting" and intruded the tension

fractures because the confining stresses across the second order
shears were in most cases greater than the hydraulic pressure
of the magma.

The hydrothermal quartz-sulphide veins were emplaced post-

faulting. The mineralizing fluids used the faults and the
extension fractures to gain access and veins have formed in shears
and extension joints unoccupied by dykes.
 CHAPTER 7

VEIN-TYPE MINERALIZATION IN GRANITE

7.1 INTRODUCTION

The vein-type mineralization within the granite in Ad-Dawadmi

district is restricted to a belt about 10 Km wide trending N-S. It
lies approximately in the central portion of the batholith and extends
from Arja mines in the north to (PL-100) in the south. The total
number of ancient prospects is about 1^0 (Plate 1).

The majority of workings in these ancient mines are in the form

of longitudinal caved-in trenches 1-6 m in depth. Deep shafts and
stopes are present only in few of these ancient mines, particularly in
Samrah where a depth of over 70 m was reached by the ancients with
linking crosscuts and narrow stopes. All the ancient .mines are
localized along fractures which controlled the mineralization. These
show a dominant northeasterly trend, but an east-west trend is also
present. Intersections of both types of fractures commonly provide
the loci for mineralization.

Brecciation is ubiquitous along zones of fracturing throughout

the whole district, Three generations of quartz were introduced in
these zones. The second generation was associated with the main bulk
of ore deposition together»with chlorite, calcite and sericite. Both
the first and last quartz generations were practically barren. The
last is a white comb quartz that cements fragments of the former two
stages of quartz, the wall rock, and the shattered sulphide minerals
(fig. 7-1 a, b and c). Occasionally microdiorite dykes were intruded
in the fracture zones prior to quartz-1 and mineralization, subsequently
they v/ere brecciated and behaved as host for the sulphide and gangue
minerals (Samrah).

The predominant'ore minerals as identified by ore microscopy,

X-ray diffraction and EPMA are Zn-Pb-Ag sulphides and sulphosalts,
including sphalerite, galena, polybasite, pyrargyrite, argentian '
tetrahedrite (freibergite), acanthite, stromeyerite and native silver.
Other sulphides associated are: pyrite, chalcopyrite and minor amounts
of arsenopyrite, while pyrrhotite and individual grains of millerite
occur in the basic rocks of Samrah mine. The iron oxides magnetite and
hematite are of localized occurrence.

The mineralized veins show brown stained outcrops which are

prominent against the surrounding ground. 'within the leached oxidized
zone hematite, limonite, hemimorphite, malachite, cerrussite (minor,
identified in hand specimen) and black manganese oxides were identified.

The common gangue minerals in order of decreasing abundance are

quartz, chlorite, calcite/carbonates, epidote, sericite and serpentine.

7.2 HISTORY OF MINING

Remains of the ancients, apart from dozens of workings, are

represented by ruins of villages, tailing dumps, pottery, grinding
stones, charcoal and slag dumps.

Carbon 14 activity of charcoal collected by Quin (1964) from the

slag left by the ancients and analyzed by the radiocarbon dating lab.
of Kaman Instrument Inc. in Austin, Texas, gave ages before A.D, 1950
of 1214 - 68 and 1188 - 57 years. Fragments of glass studied by the
Corning Museum of Glass (1965) indicated an Islamic period which could
date anywhere from the 8th to the 13th century A.D.

Ancient slag samples analysed spectrograph!cally showed a high

lead content. Globules of native lead 1 mm in diameter could be seen
in the slag, which may suggest that the ancients recovered only the
silver and not the lead.

A pre-Islamic mining period in the district is possible, but the

evidence is lacking.

7.3 PREVIOUS WORK

Several geologists investigated the main ancient mines, particularly

Samrah, and accounts are given by: Twitchell (1932), Bogue (1954),'
Quin: (1964), Theobald (1966 a and b) and (1972), Mytton ( 1 9 6 5 ) and
Kiilsgaard (1968).
 Eijkelboom (1966) located, investigated and sampled all the
ancient prospects in the district.

The geology of Samrah mine and the vicinity was mapped from
aerial photographs by Theobald. He logged and carried out trace
element geochemical investigations of the drill cores from DHL.
He also investigated the wadi sediments in Samrah and the vicinity
for trace elements. Kiilsgaard carried out an evaluation study of
Samrah mine based on l8 boreholes drilled on the mine by the U.S.G.S.

Regarding the other ancient mines in the district, Meaton (1971)

carried out an exploration program consisting of surface trenching
and sampling. This was followed by drilling 12 holes on nine
favourable sites.

During 1971/72 an economic feasibility study of the Samrah

ancient mine \/as conducted under the guidance of Prof. G.R. Davis.
Mineralogical examination on ten fresh drill cores from deflections
in existing holes was conducted by A1 Shanti (1971) and Morrissey
(1971), followed by metallurgical bench tests at the laboratories of
Warren Spring in England and Metallgesellschaft A.G. in Germany.
The work was co-ordinated by Northgate Exploration Ltd. at Dublin,
Ireland, into an economic feasibility study by Schultz (1972).

7.4 PRESENT WORK

The examination of the mineralization at Samrah and other ancient

workings was undertaken to fulfill the following objects:

1. To prepare a detailed map of Samrah prospect of a scale of

1 : 1000.

2. To log the drill holes and study the cores megascopically and
petrographically.

3. Study the environment of ore deposition and to work out the

genetic control.

4. To study the distribution of silver.

5. To make a systematic study of all the ore and gangue minerals

from the textural and chemical point of view.
7.5 GEOLOGICAL SETTING

The well developed fracture system v/ithin the granitic rocks in

the central portion of the batholith, furnished favourable channel-
ways and sites for hydrothermal ore deposition. The predominantly
brecciated granitic rocks within the zones of fracturing are generally
the host for the ore deposits. However, within the mineralized belt,
inclusions of the pre-existing country rocks were frequently tran-
sected during drilling. Younger, pre-mineraliz-ation basic dyke
intrusions were also encountered. All these rocks have been brecciated
in zones of fracturing and have participated as hosts to ore deposits.
Many ancient mines are localized at sites of intersection of fractures
with country rock inclusions (Pl-107, Pl-108, Pl-77, Pl-54, PI-91
etc.). Occasionally the ore deposits are localized along fractures
which form the boundary between the granite and the layered basic rocks,
(Samrah, XL-34 and XL-45).

The three quartz generations within zones of fracturing form a

characteristic hydrothermal quartz-sealed breccia. In situ fragments
of a particular wall rock are numerous with extensive hydrothermal
alteration. Commonly a halo of fine chlorite fringes such fragments
(fig. 7-lb). Breccia fragments are of variable size, from microscopic
to about 5 cm., angular or subangular to rounded depending on transport-
ation within shear zones and subsequent hydrothermal corrosion.

After its deposition, the mineralization suffered deformation and

subsequent partial mobilization. Mineral textures have been complicated
by this later tectonism.

The fracture zones exhibit a width of 15-50 m of hydrothermal

alteration of the wall rocks. The rocks are laced with a netv/ork of
quartz veins and stringers that are commonly associated v/ith chlorite
and calcite. Extensive epidotization and sericitization of the
felspars and chloritization of the biotite is exhibited by the granitic
rocks in the fracture zones.
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-1

Brecciation

Typical brecciation on vein outcrops within the fracture

zones. Brecciated wall rock fragments and adamellite
in the central part (light) and microdiorite (dark).
The first and last quartz generations (white) are shown.
The second quartz generation is grey mixed with the
wall rock fragments. Locality, Samrah prospect.

Polished surface of a quartz sealed breccia. Fragments

of the earlier breccia including quartz, chlorite, calcite
and sericite, cemented by second generation of quartz and
gangue. The third quartz generation (white)formed the
last cementing material. The fragments of the second
breccia are surrounded by an aureole of chlorite.
Locality, Sumairah (PL-98) prospect.

Northeast face of ancient slope in Samrah prospect. The

central portion (light coloured) is quartz rich breccia,
both hanging and foot walls consist of microdiorite dyke
rocks cut extensively by thread-like stringers of the
third quartz generation (hardly seen in the photograph).

Thin section in brecciated rock. Quartz, chlorite and

calcite occur in microveinlets. Samrah DHL at depth
of 39 feet from the surface.
250.
7.6 THE MINERALIZED SITES

A total of 150 mineralized sites occur within this belt. All

have been explored by the ancients, but only several were mined, as
indicated by extension and depth of ancient workings, mine tailings,
ancient ruins and slag dumps.

Ten mines have been investigated recently by drilling, where a

total of 30 holes were drilled, totalling 4867 metres. These are:

Mineralized site No. of drill holes Metres drilled

1 - Sararah 18 3624
2 - ilaterah (GV-19) 3 327
3 - Ulow (GV-21) 1 80
4 - Sumairah (PL-98) 2 174 v
5 - PL-44 1 110
6 - Sidriyah (PL-107) 1 120
7 - PL-108 1 120
8 - PL-77 1 101
9 - PL-59 1 106
10 - PL-24 1 105
Total 30 4867 metres

Only four of these, namely, Samrah, Materah, Sumairah and PL-44

showed silver mineralization as indicated by the chemical analyses on
the cores. Microscopically, silver minerals were recognized in all
four prospects. All other cored prospects showed disseminated or
veined pyrite with localized specks of other sulphides: galena, sphalerite
and chalcopyrite.

Detailed rnineralogical studies were carried out essentially on

Samrah because of the availability of abundant core and the relative
abundance of ore and other minerals. Comparison of the mineralogy
and textures of the mineralized zones in all these prospects demonstrates
that they exhibit similar paragenesis and textural relationships.

The structural setting is identical for all prospects, Mineraliza-

tion is structurally controlled in quartz veins and bodies of quartz-
sealed breccia occurring within northeasterly trending fracture zones
and less commonly in easterly trending ones.

7.6.1 Samrah Mine

6.1.1 Lithology and structure

Samrah ancient mine is situated at the extreme south edge of a dis-

rupted segment of the Al-Jealani layered basic mass, in contact with
younger late- and post-kinematic granitic rocks. The mineralization
is structurally controlled along a 70°/65°-70° shear zone with E-W
tensile fractures branching from the south side of the main shear.
The shear zone shows dextral strike-slip movement with a horizontal
displacement of about 80 metres. This is shown by dislocation of the
intermediate and basic dykes in the mine area (Plate 4). The tension
fractures are emphasized by dolerite and fine grained microdiorite
dykes commonly in a sigmoidal en echelon pattern.

These dykes were emplaced predominantly in the tensil fractures,

but suffer diversion into the shear fractures at intersections.
Within the mineralized zone, these dykes were strongly brecciated and
cemented by quartz, calcite, chlorite and the associated sulphide
minerals (fig. 7-1 b,d).

The primary lithology of the basic rocks is composed of plagioclase-

pyroxene, plagioclase-pyroxene-olivine and plagioclase cumulates which
have suffered hydration and amphibolitization in differing degrees. In
the contact zone with granite these rocks are feldspathized to inter-
mediate rocks of diorite and granodiorite composition (ISA 39 and 52).
In the fracture zones, quartz, calcite, chlorite and the associated
sulphides cement fragments of these basic and intermediate rocks.

The granitic rocks are even-grained alkali-calcic and brecciated

in the fracture zones. The plagioclase is strongly saussuritized and
has a light green colour, the alkali felspar is-strongly clouded.
Biotite is altered to chlorite and the altered rock fragments are sealed
with stringers of quartz, calcite, chlorite and sulphides.
 253.

Summary of geological history of Samrah

Igneous Metasomatic Tectonic Alteration

Time products Vein filling
activity changes oroducts

Comb quartz
young
Fracturing
Galena
Fracturing
Galena and
silver
sulphosalts,
Sphalerite, Chlorite,
Magnetite +
Hematite
pyrite
Microdiorite Quartz, sericite and
and carbonate,
7 Dolerite chlorite. epidote.
All rocks Local
in tension
have
en echelon serpentine
undergone
fractures
brecciation
within the
6 Aplite-
zones of
pegmatite
fracturing
5 Microdiorite producing
and quartz quartz and
microdiorite carbonate
dykes. sealed
breccia
4 Post-kinematic
granite stocks
and dykes

3 Late-kinematic
adamellite

2 Syn-kinernatic Only inclusions

adamellite & left v/ithin
granodiorite younger granitic
rocks
1 Basic Amphiboli t izat ion
layered & possible
Old rocks granodioritization
 The loci of intersection of shear and tension fractures probably-
furnished the favourable conduits for mineralizing fluids as indicated
by extensive ancient stoping at these locations and by drilling. The
mineralization along tension fractures gradually decreases away from
the main shear.

The repeated movement along the northeasterly shear fractures is

indicated by the various generations of quartz and by the strong
brecciation of the early two generations. Mutual replacement
textures are common.

6.1.2 Ancient Workings

These constitute two main stopes 90 x 15 and 40 x m at a
depth of about 15 m as well as many shafts, stopes and trenches, the
deepest of which reaches a depth of 75 m. These workings are
surrounded by about 20,000 tons of waste in the form of dumps which
conceal the bedrock (Plate 4).

An ancient village is situated at the southeast side of the mine

workings where ruins of houses and mine dumps are extensive. Slag
heaps lie a few hundred metres to the southwest of the mine where the
ancients possibly smelted the ore.

6.1.3 Geophysical Survey

Resistivity, self-potential and induced polarization survey methods
were carried out by Argas (1966) an the mine area. In conclusion no
indication of a shallow ore body was given except for a conductive
axis v/hich roughly conforms to the main shear zone, and in part with
the ancient workings situated along the tension fractures.

6.1.4 Geochemical Investigations

The geochemical investigations carried out on the wadi sediments

of Samrah mine and the vicinity by Theobald and Thompson (1971)
exhibited anomalies for lead, zinc and silver over the ancient workings,
the ancient ruins, waste dumps and the ancient slag areas (fig. 7-2).

The zirconium depletion in the mine area was interpreted as due

to alteration of rocks especially over the west mine workings. The
present author believes that the zirconium depletion over the west
workings and other places is largely due to primary lithological
compositions.

The trace element study of the Al-Jealani layered basic intrusion

indicated a prevailing low zirconium content for basic rooks (fig.
4-11, 13, 16) relative to granitic rocks. The zirconium content in
the basic rocks of Samrah mine and those in the mass are of similar
range. This is confirmed by the fact that the area showing the
minimum zirconium content correspond to the areas covered by the
layered basic rocks (fig. 7-2 and Plate 4).

6.1.5 Exploration drilling

A total of 18 drill holes and 10 deflections off some of these
drill holes have been sunk under the ancient workings. These explored
the 400 m length of the mineralization to a vertical depth of about
200 m from the surface. All the holes ended in basic rocks after
crossing the mineralized veins (figs. 7-3, 4, 5 and. 6) from collar
positions in either basic or granitic rocks (Plate 4).

(Fig. 7-3, 4, 5 6) show deflection logs across the

mineralization zones.

6.1.6 Mineralogy

The primary sulphide mineral'- assemblage comprises sphalerite,

pyrite, galena and less common chalcopyrite. Arsenopyrite is rare.
The main silver minerals are polybasite, pyrargyrite and argentian
tetrahedrite. Acanthite, stromeyerite and native silver are of
subordinate amounts. Magnetite and hematite occur in minor amounts
in addition to the sulphides.

The main non-metallic gangue minerals are quartz, calcite and

chlorite. The paragenetic sequence is illustrated in page 28&.

1.6.1 Silver minerals

The silver minerals identified in Samrah ores are the antimony*

rich sulphosalts: argentian tetrahedrite (freibergite), polybasite
 Q_

Pb (ppm) Ag (ppm)

m 100-200

30-70

10-20

3-1

-2

• <1
• •
»
• •

Um Ergabah mine

d_
Zn (ppm) Zr(ppm)
,0
um > »000

1 3000-7000

DUD 1000-2000

I', « ;| 3 0 0 - 7 0 0 a

[:' •'.••• 1 100-200

I I< 100

VJ1
Fig : 7 - 2 Geochemical Maps of Samrah mine and vicinity showing the distribution cr*

Pb, Zn, Ag, and Zr in the Wadi Sediment (30—80 mesh). Theobald (1971)
 1.6.3 Gal

SAMRAH MiN E DEFLECTION AT

97.90 ME Tir RS
WEST DEFLECTIONS "10 THE west
DDK NS I li I6C C
By
A. M. AL SHAN II

Inclination 4 5° North
Scale of log - ! 200

F X P L A N- A T i 0 H

Mineral > f d zone SO - i 0 0 % jrhides

[J'. i J Mineralized z . ne disss :"ir-Kicr:$ end poebss

T""" ] Quariz, iUi-.tq-:!;
OtMi < I sea nic roj-fiur it? breerio zona,
' ' microdc;i!i. d if ,tvch "as been col
V e; tansivi'l, a/ ti reed :>*e qwarlz svir^er
/ er.d strongly sibcif led ant breccioHid
I - 1 • ' . ' Ooorlz sanlert OcbO: e / d ' o r i t e brvecto zone

I ' / 'ii Cccrtz . ail a r a n i u - b r e c c i a zone

I . Aplile, giaivic pegiratite

Mrcioo'ior i t c dike

f^'J-n S t r o n g c M o r i t l z o l i c n ond c . v o c m o t r r o t i c n

:n basic rocks

j_ ] Granite, e - j n i g r o n u l o r , s e r i c i t i z e d p A
L J Metagobbro, Metodiorite Anoribosile '
 258.

AST DEFLECTION
N 10° W

WEST DEFLECTION
N 10° W 9

Inclination 4 5°
S c a l e of i o q : 200

E XPLA N A T i 0 N -

M i n e r a l i z e d zone 5 0 - 100 % sulphides

I _J M i n e r a l i z e d zone disseminations a n d paches

CCOCJ Quartz s'ringers

. " ' I Quartz s e a l e d m i c r o d l o r i t e b r e c c i a z o n e ,

m i c r o diorite d i k e which has been cut
extensively by t h r e a d l i k e q u a r t z s t r i n g e r s
end s t r o n g l y s i ! i c i f i e d a n d b r e c c i a t e d

Quartz sealed G a b b r o / d i o r i t e breccia zone

Quartz sealed G r a n i t e breccia zone

Microdiorite dike
S t r o n g c h i o r i t i z a t i o n and c a r b o n a t i z a t i o n
in b a s i c r o c k s
] Granite, e q u i g r a n u l a r , s e r i c i t i z e d pink

' Metagabbro, Metcdiorite Anorthosite

£ Aplite, granite pegmatite

EAST AND WEST DEFLECTIONS

N» 3 Fig:
A. M. A L SHANTI
js
t,: r.-'xrx. - . r^y.- ..*•„... >M5w? • j.'wiwsr/.vi ms " rm i r m
i rr~n iy imum mi i i i niMmiw.ii.i. ii ii. .i...].il..uj. »"hi.j». j 1
 259.

SAMRAH N E

E A S T AND WEST DEFLECTIONS

D D II N?. S - 5
By
A. M. A L S H A N T S

WEST DEFLECTION
N 3° E

Inclination 7i°
Scale of log ! 200

E X P L A N A T I 0N

'/sw\ Guart2 stringers

A? Quartz sealed m i c r o d i o r i t e breccia zone,

m i c r o d i o r i t e d i k e which has been c u t
extensively by t h r e a d like quartz stringers
and s t r o n g l y s i l icif ied a n d b r e c c i a t e d

Quartz s e a l e d G a b b r o / d i o r i l e breccia zone

Quartz sealed G r a n i t e b r e c c i a zone

Microdiorite dike
j-— Strong c h l o r i t i z o t i o n and carbonatization
in basic r e e k s '

j Granite, e q u i g r a n u l a r , s e r i c i t i z e d pink

*"7 rm j M e t a g a b b r o , Me to d i o r i t e A n o r t h o s i t e
I Fjn • /_
1 | Aplite, granite pegmatite
' J ' « V/
mwMnrniiMt nwMwrj' ; i.Bg^.-^Tgp^tg^ggB^^^
 2 260.

,, I III IBM 'I" 'I •< "

saf-i-^mameaBstss'rm-K - •• * •

EAST DEFLECTION
W

WEST DEFLECTION
N 13° W

In c Ii n at i o n
Scoie of loq 1:200

EX PLAN A T ION

I"******] Mineralized zone 5 0 - 100 % sulphides

[T»Vj Mineralized zone disseminations and paches

j//////////1 Quartz stringers

%*J Quartz sealed microdiorite breccia zone,

microdiorite dike which has been cut
extensively by thread like quartz stringers
and strongly s i l i c i f i e d and brecciated

Quartz sealed Gabbro/diorite breccia zone

*] Quartz sealed Granite b r e c c i a zone

1
A-
| j M i c r o d i o r i t e dike •
| \ ~ i Strong c h l o r i f i z a t i o n and c a r b o n a t i z a t i o n
L^-skJ in basic r o c k s
C Granite, e q u i g r a n u l a r , s e r i c i t i z e d pink
' Q J * Metagabbro,Metadiorite Anorihosite
] Aplite, granite pegmatite

SAMRAH Ml HE
EAST AND WEST DEFLECTIONS
. D H M°. 6 ^ ^
1 :
A. M. A L S H A N T1 ^ 9 O
 261.

and pyrargyrite. The sulphides present are acanthite and stromeyerite.

Minor amounts of native silver are also present. The silver minerals
are associated with the main silver sulphides of the ore, chiefly with
galena and to a lesser extent with sphalerite. Association of silver
minerals with pyrite is less common. Silver, predominantly present
in native form as grains up to 1.5 mm in size disseminated in gangue
specially calcite. The size range of the silver minerals is from
about 200 M m to 10^ m with most of the grains 50 - 100^ m.

1.6.1a Polybasite (Ag, Cu)^(Sb, As) S ^

Polybasite is the dominant silver mineral throughout Samrah

mineralization. It v/as detected by microscopic study and confirmed
by electron probe microanalysis and by X-ray diffraction.

Polybasite is associated with galena, and less commonly with

sphalerite and pyrite.

In the composite aggregates of sulphides where galena occurs as

a major sulphide in the form of a granulated and irregular interstitial
phase; polybasite commonly replaces it marginally, Po^basite grains
in this type of occurrence attain their maximum grain size (up to 1200 .^m)
and show distinct associations with acanthite, in which polybasite is
always external. Minute "dendritic" stringers of chalcopyrite, usually
separates the two silver phases (fig. 7-7 a and c) and frequently cross-
cut the acanthite in all directions. The fringing polybasite is
copper impoverished and one grain analysed contained 5% Fe. This
mineral association and textural relationships suggests that polybasite
is breaking dov/n to give acanthite and chalcopyrite.

Polybasite is also observed to fill fractures and cracks developed

within other sulphides and associated gangue (fig. 7-8 g).

Polybasite occurs also in massive coarsely crystalline galena

(S-7, As-633, As-634) in the form of rounded, oval, or elongated grains
which range in size from lO^m to 100^m, with the majority of grains
less than 50/#ra. Compound grains of two silver sulphosalts are common
(fig. 7-8b). The relatively large grains of polybasite,are usually
segregated along galena grain boundaries (fig. 7-9b) in contrast to
 262.

the small rounded ones which are included within the grains (fig.
7-9 a and b).

In sphalerite, polybasite occurs as inclusions of 30/V.m size or

fills in fractures, where it is frequently associated with other silver
minerals (fig. 7-8h). In pyrite, polybasite also occurs in fractures
and inclusions (fig. 7-7f) but in smaller grains relative to those in
sphalerite (fig. 7-8g).

In polished section, polybasite is light grey with a greenish tint

=
31-2 approximate mean), moderately to strongly anisotropic,
with localized red internal reflections in air and in oil. It
invariably decomposes in the microscopic light beam or electron probe
beam to give minute (/v3<#m) rounded blebs or short wires of native
silver (fig. 7-8 a and b). Simultaneously, polybasite is converted
to a very soft, grey, poorly reflecting substance, that, appears to be
isotropic and lacking in internal reflections. The end products of
the decomposition are thought to be acanthite and native silver.
Al-Shanti (1971), Morrissey! (1977)* This is in accordance with the
observations of Stephens (1931)-

The textural, relationships of polybasite towards other non-silver

sulphides indicate its later formation and replacement of them (fig.
7-7 b and c).

The chemical variation in polybasite is given in (Table 7-1 and

fig. 7-10) in which the copper content ranges between traces and
1.66/0 and the arsenic from traces to 0.89%. It is the antimony
rich member of the series polybasite - pearceite ( (Ag,
and (Ag, This variation is explained by the work
conducted by Peacock and Berry (19^7) where they concluded that in
both end members copper replaces silver in considerable and varying
amounts and in polybasite there may be also a substantial replacement
of Sb by As. They indicated also that there is no complete solid
solution from arsenian polybasite to pearceite and proposed two
distinct species rather than end members of one series.
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-7

(a to j taken in reflected PPL from polished

sections from Samrah prospect DH.l and 6)

Polybasite (pol) embaying sphalerite grain (si) and probably

replacing it. The polybasite in the centre decomposed
to acanthite (ac) and chalcopyrite (cp). Chalcopyrite
forms a rim around acanthite. 1SA-437, depth 143 mrs.

Polybasite (pol) replacing galena which in turn replaced

sphalerite (si). 1SA-455, depth 148.0 mrs.

Galena (gn) with marginal polybasite (pol) probably

replacing it. Polybasite is breaking down to acanthite
(ac) and chalcopyrite (cp). Chalcopyrite forms micro-
stringers bordering both silver phases and crossing the
acanthite. 1SA-437, depth 143.0 mrs.

Native silver (ag) with marginal chalcopyrite (cp). S-8

depth IO3.85 mrs.

Polybasite (pol) extensively replacing galena (gn), both

occupy parallel microfractures. 1SA-437, depth 143 mrs.

Polybasite (pol) filling cracks in deformed pyrite (py).

S-9, depth 105.20 mrs.

Acanthite (ac) and chalcopyrite (cp) inclusions in pyrite

(py). S-9, depth 105.20 mrs.

Abundant inclusions of sphalerite, chalcopyrite, acanthite

and gangue enclosed in pyrite. The inclusions have
variable shapes and sizes. S-9, depth 105.20 mrs.

Extensively fragmented magnetite (mg) and cemented by

chalcopyrite (cp), gangue (black) and acanthite (ac).
1SA-444, depth of 146 rars.

Magnetite (mg) extensively replaced by hematite (hm) and

gangue. The hematite contains inclusions of acanthite
(ac). Native silver grains occur in the gangue.
1SA-454, depth of 150 mrs.
265.

Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-8

(a to h are taken in reflected PPL

from samples from Samrah prospect)

a & b A grain of polybasite (pol) in galena matrix before (a)

and after (b) breaking dovra to blebs of native silver
(black) by the light beam of the microscope. As-634,
DH.l, depth 132 mrs.

c & d Compound grain of native silver (ag) and stromyerite

(st). The stromyerite in (a) is breaking do\m by the
effect of the microscopic light beam to native silver
(b). As-628 DH.6, depth 104.30 mrs.

e - A compound grain of polybasite (pol) and pyrargyrite in

a matrix of massive galena (gn). The polybasite shows
etching by the microscopic light beam of the microscope,
but pyrargyrite is not yet affected. As-o34, DH.l,
depth 132 mrs.

f - Metal sulphide aggregate of sphalerite (si), chalcopyrite

(cp), galena (gn) and acanthite (ac) showing grain boundary
replacement relationships. Galena replacing sphalerite
and chalcopyrite. Sphalerite galena and chalcopyrite are
replaced by acanthite. As-628, DH.6, depth 104.30 mrs.

g - Abundant inclusions of polybasite (pol), acanthite (ac)

and gangue minerals in pyrite. S-9, DH.6, depth 105.20.

h - A compound grain of polybasite (pol), acanthite (ac) and

native silver enclosed in sphalerite (si). Notice the
decomposition of the silver phases by the electron probe
beam (black spots). 1SA-455, DH.l, depth 150.50 mrs.
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-9

(a to c taken in reflected PPL)

Silver sulphosalts, tetrahedrite (freibergite), pyrargyrite

and polybasite in individual or compound grains included
in a matrix of massive galena. 'As-634, DH.l Samrah
prospect, depth of 132 mrs.

Etched massive galena showing grainboundary relationships

and segregation of silver sulphosalts along them. Smaller
sulphosalt inclusions occur in the galena grains probably
as exsolved phases. As-634, DH.l, Sararah prospect,
depth 132 mrs.

Etched galena, showing recrystallization and annealing

texture. Locality GV-19 depth of 8O.5O mrs. DH.l.
2 268.
 269.

Frondel (1963) and Hall (1967) also suggested two distinct series
Pearceite - antimonpearceite and polybasite - arsenopolybasite.
Harries and others (1965) however, on the basis of the similarity in
basic structural unit and external crystal form for all polybasite -
pearceite minerals, preferred the classification into one series with
polybasite as the S h y As end member and pearceite as the A s ^ S b analogue,
depending upon the simple multiplicity of fundamental cell dimensions.

Table 7-1 Electron probe microanalysis of five grains of

*3
Polybasite from .Samrah mine, g r a m 1 and 2 after
Warren Spring (1972).
Element grain 1 grain 2 grain 3 grain 4 grain 5
W.S. W.S. As-634 ISA455 ISA437
Wt/b vrt% Wt/o Wt?b

Ag 73.45 74.05 75.0 * 75.0 ' 81.35

Cu 0.74. l.OO 1.3 1.0 traces
Sb 9.65 6.05 9.8 9.0 10.4
As 0.89 0.46 —

S 15.85 15.25 14.8 14.5 13.46

Total 100.58 97.47 105.21

Calculated formulae:
grain 1 grain 2
(Ag, C u ^ ? (Sb, As) S1]L (Ag, Cu).,- (Sb, As). S__
lo.p l O 11
grain 5
(Ag, Cu) 1 7 ^(Sb, A s ^ g S ^

The calculated formula for the above five grains indicated the silver
sulphosalt polybasite,

grains 1 and 2 (Ag, Cu) l6 (Sb, As) S n

showed minor arsenic relative to antimony

grains 3 4 (Ag, Cu) l6 Sb 2 SX1

only traces of arsenic were detected

grain 5 A
^l6 CU traces ^ 2 S 11
only traces of copper were detected

*1 EPMA analyses listed in this chapter were conducted by J. Steed and

N. Wilkinson, Imperial College. See appendix 3*
*2 Ag estimated, the phase decomposes and the analysis is unsatisfactory
for silver.
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-10

(element distribution in polybasite)

Electron probe x-ray scanning images for lead (pb), silver

(ag), antimony (sb), copper (cu) and sulphur (s) for a grain
of po3.ybasite included in massive galena. The symbols
indicate the element represented by the bright areas of the
photographs, As-63^, DH.l. Samrah prospect depth 132.0
mrs. Scale 1 cm = 30.
271.
 272.

1.6.1b Pyrargyrite (Ag_SbS_)

Pyrargyrite is a minor silver sulphosalt in Samrah mineralization.

It was detected by microscopic study and confirmed by microprobe
analysis. Its main occurrence is within massive galena (As-o3zf, As-633,
S-7) commonly associated with other silver sulphosalts, polybasite and
tetrahedrite, (fig. 7-9a). It occurs in form of inclusions of rounded,
subrounded, oval or elongate forms that range in size from about 100^ m
to less than 10y m with the majority of grains less than 50/fc m.
Pyrargyrite occasionally occurs intergrown with other silver sulphosalts
(fig. 7-8e). In polished section, pyrargyrite is grey in colour with
bluish tint, strongly anisotropic with or without red internal reflect-
ions in air and oil. The mineral does not decompose in the microscope
light beam or under low current density during its analysis by the
electron microprobe.

Table 7-2 Electron probe microanalysis of three Pyrargyrite

grains from Samrah mine, grains 2 and 3 after
Warren Spring (1972).

Element grain 1 grain 2 grain 3

wt% wt% wt%

Ag 57.23 59.4 59.95
Cu 0.24 0.27
Sb 22.55 21.00 19.45
As 3.82 OA?
S 20.77 18.6 17.7

Total 100.57 103.1 97.84

The chemical variation in pyrargyrite is given in table 7-2 in v/hich

the copper occurs up to 0.27% and arsenic varies from traces to 3*82%.

Copper as in the case of the polybasite - pearceite series, replaces

silver in varying amounts. While arsenic substitutes for antimony.

The investigations carried out by Jaeger and Van Klooster (1912)

on the melting relations in the system Ag^AsS^ - Ag^SbS^ by the method
of cooling arrests, and by the X-ray diffraction studies, Toulmin (19^3)»
indicated the existence of a continuous solid solution series between
proustite (Ag_AsS ) and pyrargyrite ' (Ag_SbS_). According to Toulmin,
3 3 3 3
the miscibility becomes complete at JOCPC between both end members.

1.6.1c Tetrahedrite (freibergite) (Cu,Ag,Fe,Zn)gSb2S7

The argentian variety of tetrahedrite (freibergite) is the second

abundant silver sulphosalt after polybasite in Samrah mineralization.
It occurs mainly in the massive galena where it is associated with
both polybasite and pyrargyrite (fig. 7-9 a ). However, occasional
inclusions occur also in sphalerite associated with other silver
minerals. It always forms rounded, subrounded, oval or irregular
inclusions that range in size from 10 to 150a. m. Tetrahedrite grains
in galena tend to cluster in separate zones from those of pyrargyrite
and polybasite. Compound grains with other sulphosalts are common.
Small amounts of chalcopyrite are observed to be in close association
with tetrahedrite in the galena.

In sphalerite, tetrahedrite is associated with polybasite,

acanthite and native silver (S-4) filling cracks and cavities, where
it is believed to be breaking down by supergene alteration to give
a sequence of other minerals.

In reflected light tetrahedrite is grey with brownish tint,

( R ^ q = 29*7 - 31»0), isotropic, with no red internal reflections.

The elctron probe microanalysis indicated argentian tetrahedrite

(freibergite) composition (Table 7-3)•

Table 7-3 Electron probe microanalysis of two grains of

argentian tetrahedrite, Samrah mine

Element AS-634 As-634

grain 1 grain 2
V/u/o wt%
As:
Ag 21.03 28.7
Cu 15.14 17.4
Sb 47.15 24.1
Zn 2.44 2.7
Fe 1.53 2.9
S 15.8 * 22.1 *

Total 102.87 97.9

Indicating that S in the analysis is lower than the theoretical
ZWi'o - 27% given for tetrahedrite by Dana. (7th Edition).
Warren Spring (1972), semiquantitatively analyzed three tetrahedrite
grains from Samrah mine composite sample using the electron probe.
*

They were found to contain about 20% silver, 34% Cu and 23% Sb in
addition to the presence of sulphur and iron.

From the above analyses we notice a great variation in Ag, Cu and

Sb content of the various grains.

The electron probe microanalysis of two tetrahedrite grains showed

that copper, iron, zinc, silver, antimony and sulphur were present,
though in varying amounts. Arsenic v/as not detected in any of the
tetrahedrites, and if present, it would be below 1% of the detection
limit of the EPMA. The silver distribution is markedly variable.

In all samples analysed the sulphur value is low. Dana (7th

Edition) gives the sulphur content of tetrahedrite as between 24 - 27
per cent.

Fig. 7 - H includes X-ray photographs of elemental distribution in

a tetrahedrite-pyrargyrite compound grain. Qualitatively copper, zinc-,
iron, silver antimony and sulphur are all present in tetrahedrite
though in varying amounts.

This high silver-bearing tetrahedrite has been called freibergite,

and Dana (7th Edition) shows a maximum silver content of 18 per cent
but usually less than 5 per cent. In the present study values from
20 to 29% Ag were detected.

1.6.Id Acanthite Ag^S

Acanthite is a minor silver sulphide in Samrah mineralization.

It is usually associated with polybasite in composite sulphide aggregates
(fig. 7-8 f).

It is very closely intergrown with chalcopyrite and with native

silver. The chalcopyrite forms minute branching veinlets, cross-
cutting acanthite and separating it from marginal polybasite (fig.
7-7 a and c). This relationship between the three closely associated

* Cu percentage is high and probably faulty analysis.

 Vein-Type Minera3.iza.tion

Figure 7-11

(element distribution in freibergite and pyrargyrite)

Electron probe x-ray scanning images for lead (pb), silver (ag),
antimony (sb), iron (fe), copper (cu), zinc (zn) and sulphur (s)
for a compound grain of tetrahedrite, (freibergite) (top) and
pyrargyrite (bottom). The symbols indicate the element
represented by the bright areas of the photographs. The
intensity of brightness reflects the amount of the relevant
element in the phase. Notice that pyrargyrite does not contain
Fe or Zn. As-634, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth 132.0 mrs.
Scale 1 cm = 50
phases points out the possibility of polybasite breaking down to
acanthite and chalcopyrite. In larger grains of polybasite, lensoid
compound inclusions of acanthite, chalcopyrite and native silver
occur.

Acanthite occurs also, as small individual or irregular compound

inclusions in sphalerite, in pyrite and in magnetite (fig. 7-7 g, h, i
and j) or it occurs as fracture filling within these minerals. The
grain size in pyrite and in sphalerite ranges from 10^ m - 50/«m.

In galena larger grain sizes lOO^m were observed.

In polished section acanthite is either grey with greenish tint or

grey, soft, usually shows scratched surfaces. The scratches •
occlude all anisotropy effects. It decomposes more rapidly th$n
polybasite under the microscopic light beam to give minute blebs of
native silver (%2/t{m).

Due to its rapid decomposition under the electron beam of the

microprobe, the following analyses only were possible (Table 7-4).

Table 7-4 Electron probe microanalysis of three acanthite

grains from Samrah mine.

Element As-6l8 ISA-437 ISA-455

grain 1 grain 2 grain 3

wt% wt% wt%

Ag 82.3 84.9 78.4
S 10.7 11.4 13.0

Total 95.0 96.3 91.4

1.6.1e Stromeyerite (Ag Cu)S$

The stromeyerite is a minor phase in the Samrah assemblage. It

was identified by electron probe. It is restricted to highly brecciated
and chloritized parts of the ore body, where it is invariably rimmed
by chalcopyrite (fig. 7-8 c and d).
 In polished section it is grey, soft with scratched surfaces,
but the anisotropy was difficult to dctect owing to polishing damage.
It is more readily etched by microscopic light than polybasite or
acanthite. It decomposes to native silver in larger grains lOftm
(fig. 7-3 c and d). No satisfactory quantitative analysis could be
carried out due to its rapid decomposition in the electron beam.

From the mode of occurrence and its mineral association it is

suggested that it is a secondary mineral formed from the decomposition
of other silver sulphosalts.

1.6.If Native silver

Native silver occurs in subordinate amounts in the Samrah

mineralization. It is mainly associated with quartz and calcite
veinlets (S-8) in which grains up to 1.5 mm occur. Its occurrence is
erratic and. acanthite is commonly in association. Chalcopyrite is
also present and partially or entirely encloses native silver grains
(fig. 7-7d).

Native silver grains 50m m are occasionally included in pyrite,

in sites close to the centre of grains.

In brecciated sphalerite, native silver grains 150^ m, occur as

inclusions or along fractures commonly with complex assemblage of
silver minerals (fig. 7-3h).

A few native silver grains were checked for Au, Hg, Cu and Bi by
electron probe microanalysis, but nothing was detected.

The mode of occurrence of the native silver and its mineral

association suggests that it is a secondary mineral formed by the
decomposition of pre-existing silver sulphosalts, notably tetrahedrite,
polybasite and pyrargyrite.

1.6.2 Sphalerite

The textural relationships of sphalerite depends largely on its

reduced ductility and mobility relative to galena and chalcopyrite.
Textural evidence suggests that sphalerite is of older generation <
 279.

than chalcopyrite and galena but obviously later than the first
generation of pyrite (fig. 7-12g). ' The body colour in hand speciman
varies from light brown to brown to steel grey, reflectivity
=
measurements range (R^g 16.2 - 17.0), paler colours being
characteristic of remobilized sphalerite. The characteristic
internal reflections are quite common from yellowish brown to
reddish. Megascopic zoning is exhibited in core specimens where
the colour grades from resinous brown on the margin to deep brown
in the centre of the coarse crystalline grains. No colloform
texture occurs.

Sphalerite is the most abundant base metal sulphide in the

Samrah mineralization. It occurs throughout the mineralized zones
as deformed coarsely crystalline (fig. 7-12b, c, and d) brecciated
aggregates with quartz (fig. 7-12d, 7-13)» calcite and chlorite in
the form of veinlets together with other sulphides including galena,
chalcopyrite and silver minerals which show replacement relationships
against it.

In relation to pyrite, sphalerite is interstitial, infilling open

spaces and commonly replacing the first pyrite generation (fig. 7-12g).
Pyrite veinlets cross cutting sphalerite exhibit anhedral granular
texture, and thus interpreted as second generation of pyrite. Often
this pyrite is replaced by galena. Small euhedral pyrite grains
2 - m occur embedded in sphalerite either associated with chalcopy-
rite inclusions or in zones where chalcopyrite is lacking. Their
distribution is erratic and occasionally they concentrate along cracks
or grain boundaries (fig. 7-12a, 7-13c).

Galena is of later generation, filling fissures and cavities and

embaying sphalerite (fig. 7-12h and i). Replacement textures are very
well developed and commonly commence in marginal zones by irregular
extensions of galena into sphalerite. Remnant sphalerite grains are
common in galena (fig. 7-12h).

The structure of sphalerite is closely related to that of

chalcopyrite. Both oriented and non oriented intergrowths are common.
Solid solution takes place at least to a limited extent at elevated
temperatures, and exsolution is therefore possible during falling
temperatures (Edwards, 1954, Ramdohr, 1969). The exsolution of
chalcopyrite from sphalerite in the Samrah mineralisation takes the
following forms:

1. Minute spherical droplets of various sizes arranged in

cloud-like aggregates, with a size range from submicroscopic
to These are commonly concentrated in particular
areas of the grains, either occupying central positions of
the grains (fig. 7-12e) or concentrated at the grain
boundaries (fig. 7-12f).

2. Tabular or lens-like form embedded parallel to the crystal-

lographic directions (fig. 7-12a).
3. Irregular ragged grains (^2km - 10.# m) disseminated in
sphalerite but more concentrated at grain boundaries.

The remobilized sphalerite contains no inclusions of chalcopyrite

(fig. 7-12a). Generally, sphalerite where associated with chalcopyrite
includes a large amount of exsolved chalcopyrite relative to that
associated with other minerals or gangue.

Chalcopyrite replacing sphalerite at grain boundaries is a common

feature (fig. 7-l4a).

Table 7-5 Electron microprobe analysis of Samrah Sphalerite

Element ISA-477 As-633

Wt% Wt%

Zn 64.2 56 .4
Fe 4.6 5.4
S 32.8 33.1

Total 101.6 94.9

Several grains of sphalerite were checked for Mn and Cd by EPMA and

proved to be below their detection limit of 1% and 0.5% respectively.
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-12

(a to j taken in reflected PPL)

Deformed sphalerite, recrystallized to small untwinned crystals

along walls of a fracture and became depleted from chalcopyrite
which is enriched as exsolved phase in the undeformed parts.
Fine euhedral pyrite crystals occur along the fracture. S-l,
DH.l, depth 138.65 rars. Samrah prospect (etched section).

Deformed sphalerite showing large number of fine twin lamellae.

GV-19 prospect, DH.l, depth of 80.5 mrs. (etched section).

Sphalerite showing coarse twinning and irregularly distributed

patches of exsolved chalcopyrite. GV-19 prospect, DH.l,
depth of 80.5 mrs. (etched section).

V/ell developed twinning in deformed and recrystallized.

sphalerite along a fracture. The fracture has been sealed
later by quartz. GV-19 prospect, DH.l, depth 80.5 mrs.
(etched section).

Fine exsolution of chalcopyrite in sphalerite in emulsion

texture. The grain boundaries of sphalerite are depleted.
S-3, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth 132.75 mrs.

Fine exsolved chalcopyrite along grain boundaries of sphalerite

aggregate. The sphalerite grains are clear away from the
margins. As~6l4, DH.S-5W, Samrah prospect depth of 201.0 mrs.

Pyrite (py) replaced by sphalerite (si), both pyrite and

sphalerite are replaced by galena (gn). 1SA-449, DH.l,
Samrah prospect, depth of 148 mrs.

Allotriomorphic galena (gn) replacing pyrite (py) and

sphalerite (si). S-3, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 132.75 m

Galena (gn) veinlets cutting sphalerite (si). 1SA-449, DH.l,

Samrah prospect, depth of 148 mrs.

Grain boundary relationships of sphalerite (si) and magnetite

(mg). Sphalerite is replacing magnetite. Chalcopyrite
(cp) is marginal to hematite suggesting replacement texture.
S-l, DH.l, Samrah prospect depth of 138.65 mrs.
 282.

1 OOu
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-13

(a to c taken in reflected PPL)

Etched sphale.rite, showing recrystallization into fine twinned

sphalerite grains along post-mineralization fractures.
Fractures are sealed by quartz. The sphalerite away from
the cracks is not affected. GV-19 prospect, DH.l,
depth of 80.5 mrs.

Etched sphalerite showing displaced twin lamellae by step

micro-faults and later introduction of chalcopyrite along
the fractures and twin lamellae. S-l, DH.l, Samrah prospect
depth of 138.65 mrs.

Microscopic sigmoidal tension gashes developed in sphalerite.

The gashes are sealed by quartz and partly by pyrite. 1SA-
442, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 146 mrs.
2 84.
 1.6.3 Galena (PbS)

Galena is the second most abundant base metal sulphide after

sphalerite in the Samrah mineralization. It is not as widespread
but more restricted to central parts of the veins. It is commonly
coarsely crystalline and compact and almost invariably contains
inclusions of silver sulphosalts (described under their headings).

The habit of the galena in the mineral aggregates suggests that

this mineral has responded to the later stages of brecciation and
hydrothermal activity by readily recrystallizing and migrating to
interstities around the latest generation of comb quartz (fig.
7-l4b). This late (remobilized) galena contrasts with the earlier
inclusion-rich galena in having fine annealed grain texture (fig.
7~9c) from which silver minerals are exsolved.

The primary intra-galena sulphosalt inclusions (tetrahedrite,

polybasite and pyrargyrite) are replaced by grain rim complexes
consisting of polybasite^acanthite, (fig. 7-7 a and c) and chalcopy-
rite which are apparently the stable low temperature phases representing
the complex sulphosalts initially fixed as inclusions in the galena.

The galena shows a tendency to vein and replace pyrite, (fig. 7-15
c, d and e) sphalerite and chalcopyrite and textural evidence also
suggests that it was still mobile and being recrystallized after the
formation of the later gangue minerals (quartz, carbonates and chlorite).

Few grains of galena were checked for silver by EPMA but proved to
be below its detection limit ( 0.5%).

1.6.4 Chalcopyrit e CuFeS^

Chalcopyrite is not as abundant as other mineral sulphides of

Fe, Zn or Pb. It is of irregular distribution throughout the mineralized
zones, most commonly as aggregates or clusters within the composite
sulphide aggregates, or in thin seams cutting through the gangue, pyrite
or sphalerite. The common minerals with which it is associated in
decreasing order of abundance are sphalerite, magnetite, pyrite,
acanthite, native silver and stroraeyerite.
 In the paragenetic sequence it is of younger age of crystal-
lization than pyrite (I) and sphalerite. It always follows cata-
clastic fractures in both as replacement veinlets (fig. 7-15 a and b).
Grain boundary segregation is common, but more dominant in sphalerite
(cf sphalerite) where the segregation is often due to unmixing from
the sphalerite. Replacement of both sulphides by chalcopyrite is
illustrated in (fig. 7-12 j and 7-15& and b). Exsolution textures
of chalcopyrite in sphalerite are common and take various forms,
(discussed under sphalerite).

Galena, which is of later crystallization tends to replace it,

but this is not as extensively developed as in the case of pyrite or
sphalerite. Native silver, stromeyerite and acanthite are commonly
associated with chalcopyrite, (fig. 7-7d, 7-9f)« The stromeyerite
is almost always rimming and replacing chalcopyrite. Such veinlets
are developed in calcite-chlorite gangue. In the case of acanthite
thin "dendritic" chalcopyrite stringers cross-cut acanthite and form
a zone separating it from the polybasite (fig. 7-7c). This chalcopyrite
is thought to result from the decomposition of polybasite (discussed
under the heading acanthite).

In the rare occurrences of magnetite-hematite, chalcopyrite is

closely associated. It follows cracks in the magnetite and replaces
it. Hematite occurs as tabular inclusions within chalcopyrite.

1.6.5 Pyrite FeS 2

Pyrite is widespread throughout the mineralization. It possesses

variable characteristics and is evidently not all of the same period
of crystallization.

Pyrite occurs in massive, polygonal, loosely bonded aggregates

(fig. 7-15g). Usually, pyrite masses are fractured brecciated and
healed with gangue, chalcopyrite, sphalerite or galena (fig. 7-15)*
This strongly shattered, corroded and strained pyrite does not have
definite outlines. Pyrite also occurs as irregular or rounded residual
grains in the gangue or enclosed in sphalerite and galena. Euhedral
or subhedral pyrite grains host numerous inclusions of acanthite,
polybasite (£-9), native silver, galena, chalcopyrite, arsenopyrite,
sphalerite and gangue.

Pyrite stringers also occur cutting other sulphides, usually

sphalerite. Euhedral disseminations of pyrite crystals are also
common throughout the mineralization with no evident cataclasis.

The mode of occurrence of pyrite and its relationship with other

sulphides indicate that it formed during three distinct stages. Some
older, where extensive fracturing took place after its crystallization
causing brecciated fabrics and subsequent replacement by other sulphides,
and some younger} the third stage was deposited along with the other
sulphides.

Microscopically pyrite is not zoned and shows anomalous weak

anisotropism with yellowish brown to light blue polarization colours.
The microprobe investigations on pyrite gave no indication of signifi-
cant minor elements in the pyrite.lattice.

1.6.6 Arsenopyrite (FeAsS) (As-608)

Arsenopyrite is a minor mineral in the Samrah mineralization, seen

only in two polished sections taken from the foot wall of the main shear
zone. Arsenopyrite occurs as euhedral to subhedral crystals or
aggregates (fig. 7-15j) embedded in a quartz-chlorite-caronate and
epidote matrix. Small corroded grains of variable sizes also occur,
rimmed either by galena, sphalerite, chalcopyrite or acanthite.

Arsenopyrite is of later age than pyrite, it is seen rimming it

or in form of minute inclusions within pyrite grains.

1.6.7 Magnetite (FeO.Fe^)

Magnetite is associated with the sulphide minerals in subordinate

amounts, commonly with chalcopyrite. It is deposited earlier than-
sphalerite following pyrite-1, as evidenced by its replacement of it
(fig. 7-15f). The magnetite grains were shattered and re-cemented by
chalcopyrite and quartz and less abundant galena or acanthite (fig. 7-14
c, d and e). Chalcopyrite occurs in the form of interstitial filling,
 2 288.
Paragenetic table illustrating sequence of minerals occuring in the
Zn-Pb-Ag vein deposits. Ad-Dawadrai District.

Minerals

Pyrite

Magnetite

Hematite

Arsenopyrite

Sphalerite

Chalcopyrite

Galena

Tetrahedrite

Polybasite

Pyrargyrite y
Argentite

Stromeyerite

Native Silver

Gangue

Quartz

Calcite

Chlorite

Epidote

Sericite

Sernentine
veinlets or tongues in magnetite aggregates. Acanthite is less
common; it infills fractures in partly martitized magnetite or forms
small inclusions (fig. 7-7i). Sphalerite also replaces magnetite
(fig. 7-12j)•

1.8.8 Hematite (Fe^O )

Hematite is less abundant than magnetite with which it is

intimately associated as a primary hematite (fig. 7-l4d) or a
secondary hematite (fig. 7T7.] ) replacing it. Chalcopyrite is again
observed at mutual grain boundaries tending to replace both minerals
(fig. 7-l4d).

The grain boundary relationships of hematite, magnetite and

chalcopyrite suggest that both magnetite and primary hematite
crystallized simultaneously before chalcopyrite.

6.1.7 Phase relationships between Iron Oxides and the Associated

Iron Sulphides

The iron oxides at Samrah mine are closely associated with chal-
copyrite and pyrite in the zones of mineralization within the fractures.
This paragenesis occurs in a large number of epigenetic sulphide
deposits in other parts of the world.

Schwartz and Eonbeck (1940) tabulated 130 deposits and showed

that the minerals normally associated v/ith the iron oxides are:
chalcopyrite, pyrite, pyrrhotite, sphalerite, galena, arsenopyrite,
bornite and chalcocite. < The most common are those that can exist in
equilibrium or under Y^ conditions favourable to the simultaneous
p
formation of Fe^O^ - Fe^O^ . At Samrah these are pyrite and chalcopy-
rite and the formation of magnetite and primary hematite was preceded
by that of pyrite.

Taylor and Kullerud (1971) observed that the most common mineral
assemblages that can occur with magnetite are those of the Cu-Fe-S
system notably chalcopyrite, pyrrhotite and pyrite. They conducted
experimental studies to show the phase relations in the Cu-Fe-S-0 •
system at 300°C, from which it was deduced that if a copper-iron
 Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-14

(a to e taken in reflected PPL)

Tongue-like protuberences of galena (gn) in chalcopyrite (cp)

suggesting replacement of the latter by the galena. The
sphalerite (si) and chalcopyrite show a mutual even grain
boundaries. S-l, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 138.65 mrs

Galena mobilized into the interstities of the comb-quartz of

the third generation and partly replacing the earlier quartz.
1SA-437, i)H.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 143.0 rars.

An aggregate of magnetite (rag) and chalcpyrite (cp). The

chalcopyrite is interstitial to magnetite replacing it.
Residual magnetite is seen in chalcopyrite. S-l, DH.l,
Samrah prospect, depth of 138.65 mrs.

Sulphide-oxide aggregate of chalcopyrite (cp), magnetite (mg)

and hematite (hm). Chalcopyrite appears to replace both
iron oxides with residual grains left in a matrix of
chalcopyrite. S-l, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 138.65 m:

Extensively brecciated magnetite (dark grey) replaced by

hematite (light grey) and gangue (black). Minute veinlets
of chalcopyrite cut the oxide minerals. 1SA-444, DH.l,
Samrah prospect, depth of 144.0 mrs.
291.
292.

Vein-Type Mineralization

Figure 7-15

(a to j taken in reflected PPL)

a - Pyrite (py) strongly deformed, cracks are sealed with

chalcopyrite (cp) and quartz. GV-19 prospect, DI-I.l,
depth of 80.70 mrs.

b - Pyrite (py), brecciated, cemented and replaced by chalcopy-

rite (cp). DH.l, GV-19 prospect, depth of 80.70 mrs.

c - Remnants of pyrite (py), corroded and replaced by galena (gn)

1SA-437, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 143.0 mrs.

d - Pyrite corroded and replaced by galena (gn), caries and

atoll replacement textures are shown. 1SA-437, DH.l,
Samrah prospect, depth of 143.0 mrs.

e - Brecciated pyrite (py), cemented and extensively replaced

by galena (gn), S-3, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 132.75 mrs.

f - Pyrite aggregate showing replacement by gangue and by magnetite

(mg). S-l, DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of 138.65 mrs.

g - Pyrite aggregate, weakly deformed, showing grain boundary

relationships. Air etched section. S-5, DH.3, Samrah
prospect, depth of 92.85 mrs.

h - Corroded pyrite grains, showing zonal and core replacement by

gangue. S-9, DH.6, Samrah prospect, depth of 105.20 mrs.

i - Pyrite, strongly deformed cemented and replaced by hematite

(grey) and gangue (black). DH.l, PL-44, at depth of 56.0 mrs.

j - Euhedral crystals of arsenopyrite in aggregates. 1SA-480,

DH.l, Samrah prospect, depth of I58.O mrs.
 293.
'10U u

v ^ m J ^ L •&
/i-

Pfpy^i ,00 x i -
sulphide assemblage has a bulk composition situated on the sulphur
side of an approximate composition line running from chalcocite
through bornite and chalcopyrite to pyrite, it cannot coexist with
magnetite alone and hematite must appear as a phase.

The primary assemblage magnetite, hematite, pyrite and chalcopy

rite observed in the Samrah mineralization can be regarded as a
typical univariant assemblage formed in a sulphur rich system with
f ..
a fixed 0 d e t e r m i n e d by the buffering effect of the rock silicate
It probably indicates an equilibrium temperature of 300°C or less
(Taylor and Kullerud 1971).

6.1.8 Ore Reserve Estimation

Kiilsgaard (1968) reported the following estimate of indicated

and inferred ore reserves calculated at a cut-off grade of / 25 per
ton gross metal value and mineralized material with a grade of / 23
per ton, taking metal prices at / 2.45/oz. Ag, $ 0.13/lb Pb and
/ 0.13/lb Zn:

Classification Tonnage (metric) Gross value Total gross

per ton value

Indicated ore 133,300 0> 81 / 10,800,000

Inferred ore 71,100 / 41 / 2,900,000

204,400 0 67 0 13,700,000

Indicated material 76,300 0 23 / 1,700,000

Inferred material 20,600 0 23 / 470,000

96,900 0 23 / 2,220,000
Total ore and
mineralized material 301*300 0 33 / 15,920,000

The actual metal content of the above as calculated from RLilsgaafd

report is:
Classification Oz.Ag/ton /Pb /Zn

Indicated ore 23.61 2.28 5.89

Inferred ore 10.17 0.55 5.14

18.93 1.68 5.63

Indicated and inferred material 5.21 Nil 3.64
Total ore and mineralized
material 14.52 1.14 5.00

Kolzem (1969) considered that the 3:8 drill holes in Samrah which
gave a total drill core of 3624 m to have explored a mineralized
panel over 400 m long and 200 m deep. The reserves of this panel
have been estimated at about 300,000 tons averaging 1/ Pb, 5/ Zn
and 15 oz.Ag/ton.

Schultz (1972) estimated the reserves indicated by drilling to

be 230,000 metric tons containing 13.2 oz.Ag/ton, 0.9/ Pb and
5.3/ Zn.

The estimation used by Schultz (1972) for the feasibility

evaluation carried out on Samrah as 330,000 metric tons containing
13.6 oz.Ag/ton, 0.9/Pb and 4.5/ Zn. He concluded that the reserves,
the grade and the remoteness of this prospect renders it uneconomic.

7.6.2 Ifaterah (GV19) prospect

Materah ancient mine is situated 5 Km. south of Ad-Dawadmi town,

on a series of quartz sealed adamellite breccia and quartz veins
localised along two parallel closely spaced shear zones trending
045°. The host rock is predominantly adamellite. Wall rock
alteration as in the case of Samrah is very strong. The plagioclase
of the adamellite is altered to light green clinozoisite and the
potash feldspars clouded and stained red. Biotite schist inclusions
are abundant, partly migmatized and invariably thermally metamorphosed
to hornfels. Thin local microdiorite dyke intrusions preceded the
mineralization.

The two mineralized shear zones are prominent over the surrounding
ground, forming two longitudinal ridges. The ancient workings consist
of discontinuous 5-10 m deep stopes. The workings extend intermittently
for 700 m along the northern vein and 200 m along the southern one.
 296.

Fig.TLIGMate'Cih ( G V - 1 9 ) Drill holes.

Inclined depth, meters from Surface

Shear zone

: i :: 2 •: i / f s m ^ M M ^ ' l : : :
Bottom Top
* 27.0 m "

I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i ' ~'
108 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 m
Inclined depth,
meters from Surface

DH#M3
iL45° at 3 0 0 °
Oz/Ag % P b % Zn Width (m)
0.3 0.002 0.02 4.68
 297*.

The zone showing shearing and hydrothermal alteration is 25-35 m wide.

Sulphide mineralization is associated with grey quartz of the second
stage infilling. The first stage quartz is barren white quartz
which became brecciated and cemented by the second stage gangue and
sulphide minerals. A third stage white barren comb quartz has
cemented the former brecciated gangue and sulphide mineralization.

The sulphides present in Materah are pyrite, sphalerite, galena

and chalcopyrite. The silver minerals present are polybasite and
acanthite in minute inclusions in sphalerite.

The oxidized zone contains hematite, limonite, malachite and

hemimorphite. Manganese staining is also abundant.

Three drill holes were carried out on the northern vein (fig.
7-16). These holes intersected disseminated sulphide mineralization
associated with quartz veins. One hole intersected a 1.3 m zone with
11 oz of silver, but the average silver content in the v/hole thickness
(4.65 m) of this "zone is only 2 oz.

The textural relationships and paragenetic sequence of the ore

minerals are comparable to those at Samrah. Pyrite was formed
first, followed by sphalerite, then chalcopyrite. Galena is of
later crystallization and tends to replace pyrite, sphalerite and
chalcopyrite. Polybasite and acanthite are the last minerals formed
as interstitial veinlets and minor inclusions in other sulphides,
particularly sphalerite.

7.6.3 Suraairah (PL 98 west) prospect

Sumairah ancient workings are localized 2 Km on the north east

extension of Samrah mine. The workings extend for a distance of
250 m. in the form of stopes and circular, inclined and vertical
shafts. The depth reaches 1 5 m . The width of individual veins
varies from 0.3 to 3.0 m. They consist of quartz-sealed granitic
breccia and quartz veins. The host rocks are dominantly granitic
and country rock inclusions. The granitic rocks are extensively
saussuritized and sericitized and extensively cut by a network of
white quartz veinlets commonly associated with calcite and chlorite.
 1.6.3 Galena (PbS)
Fig.7-17Sumairah ( P L 98 West)
Surface DDH # I

Inclined depth
0 Meters

q _ Drill hole I
Oz / A g % P b % Z n Width /meters
4.1 < 0 . 5 < 1.0 6.0

Inclined depth
0 Meters

Quartz-sealed breccia .Quartz

Veins, Mineralization zones

Epidotized, Locally mytonitized adamellite,

rich with Quartz stringrs

Epidotized granite

Granitic rock

f f f l l f l Biotite schist, ond migmatite zones

»»»»»»! Xenoliths
 Two holes were drilled on this mineral prospect (fig. 7-17)•
Both intersected sulphide mineralization within the quartz and the
quartz breccia veins. The thicknesses and average analyses are
given in fig. 7-17.

The sulphide minerals present are disseminated pyrite, sphalerite

and galena. Chalcopyrite is less common, acanthite in minute
inclusions and veinlets is rare. The textural relationships among
the ore minerals as well as the paragenetic sequence are analogous
to those of Samrah and Materah ancient mines.

7.6.4 PL 44

This ancient prospect is situated 3 Km north of Ad-Dawadmi town

along a 057° trending shear zone.

The host rocks are predominantly porphyritic granodiorite

intruded by equigranular Al-Masloukhah adamellite. Pre-existing
rock inclusions are abundant. Alteration is identical to the former
mineral sites. The ancient workings extend for 250 m as shallow
filled-in pits.

One hole was drilled on this mineral prospect. It intersected

the mineralized veins below the deep workings at an angle of 48° and
328° azimuth. A total of five quartz veins were intersected within
a zone of country rock inclusion. The width of the veins ranges from
45 cm to 1.45 m within an 8.0 m wide zone. The silver values range
from 0.1 - 2.8 oz/ton and average 4.6/ zinc in a total lode width of
1.08 m.
The sulphide minerals pyrite, sphalerite, chalcopyrite and galena
are disseminated throughout the zone of mineralization. Textures
and paragenetic sequence are similar to the previously described
vein deposits.

7.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

1. The zinc-lead-silver vein deposits of Ad-Dawadmi district are

mostly situated within the granitic batholith. A few other vein
deposits cut the metasediments near the granite contacts. These
veins were extensively worked by the ancients.
2. The mineralization in the granitic rocks forms a distinct north-
south belt in the central part of the district mapped. This belt
contains many xenoliths which are predominantly pelitic and semi-
pelitic. Many of the xenoliths are large and retain their original
structure and orientation. There are several ancient prospects
located in xenoliths, or at their faulted contacts with granite.

3. There is an obvious structural control of the mineralization

throughout the district, along northeasterly trending shear zones
and less commonly along east-west fractures. The intersections of
the two provide favourable loci for mineralization.

4. The mineralization is controlled more by the availability of

voids than by lithological variations in the wall rocks, i.e. the
mineralized quartz breccia is found in granitic rocks (predominant),
dyke rocks, basic inclusions or pelitic xenoliths. On a regional
scale the mineralization is related to the belt previously occupied
by a north-south trending pelitic horizon before the granite intrusion.

5. The hydrothermal fluids of residual magmatic origin related to

the post-kinematic granite intrusions were responsible for the
deposition of the sulphide minerals in fractures along a belt in
the batholith which had been replaced by the granitic rocks.

6. Brecciation is ubiquitous along zones of fracturing throughout

the district. The mineralization consists dominantly of a breccia
of granitic fragments cemented by quartz with sulphide minerals.
The brecciation and deformation were reactivated by repeated movements.

7. There were three generations of quartz deposition along the

fractures. Base metal sulphide minerals were deposited with the
second quartz generation. The first and the last generations of
white quartz were barren. The earlier quartz is brecciated, but the
last generation consisting of comb-like quartz crusts is more widespread
and with the associated chlorite and calcite, cemented the fragmented
sulphides and the gangue minerals.

8. The westerly trending fractures were intruded by dacite,

microdiorite and rhyolite magma. The northeasterly shear fractures
were locally intruded by this magma in the form of lenticular patches,
some of which were brecciated and mineralized during the latest fault
movements which accompanied the mineralization (Samrah).

9. The predominant ore minerals are zinc, lead and silver sulphides
(sphalerite, galena, acanthite and stromeyerite) and sulphosalts,
(polybasite, pyrargyrite and tetrahedrite). Native silver is not
uncommon and is associated with gangue and pyrite. Some other
sulphides occur and include pyrite, chalcopyrite and minor amounts of
arsenopyrite. Pyrrhotite and individual grains of millerite occur
in the gabbroic wall rocks of Samrah prospect. Magnetite and hematite
are uncommon and were only found in two drill hole intersections.

The sequence of mineral deposition was pyrite first, followed

by magnetite, hematite then sphalerite. The pyrite, magnetite and
sphalerite were extensively brecciated and cemented by later gangue
and sulphide minerals. Chalcopyrite was deposited after sphalerite
and replaced it and the earlier sulphides and iron oxides. Galena,
the last mineral to be deposited, contains inclusions of silver
phases and has been deformed and recrystallized, with well developed
annealed textures. The silver phases related to this mobilized
galena, predominantly as polybasite, migrated to the vicinity of
grain boundaries and later were transformed to acanthite and chal-
copyrite.

10. Supergene enrichment is weak and has formed small quantities of

native silver, acanthite and stromeyerite.

11. Zoning: The mineral zoning across the veins is only slightly
developed. The galena tends to occupy the central parts of the
veins, which is probably due to its tendency to flow under conditions
of high pressure temperature into new open spaces caused by renewed
fracturing.. The sphalerite is almost ubiquitous but tends to be
more concentrated on the hanging wall parts of the veins. Chalcopy-
rite, magnetite and hematite occupy positions near the foot walls of
veins. The pyrite is widespread and does not show preference for
any particular zone. Lateral and vertical mineral zoning other than
the above is not observable and assumed to be insignificant.

12. Lateral extension of mineralization: DH8 and DH10 which

traversed the west-south-west and the east-north-east strike
extensions of Samrah mineralization respectively, did not detect
any significant mineralization, The surface exposures at both these
extensions appear to be barren.

13- Mineralization at depth: Mineralization below the zone drilled

probably decreases with depth as fracture zones become tighter.

n
 CHAPTER 8

CONCLUSIONS

8.1 OROGENESIS

The Ad-Dawadmi district, as part of the east-central segment of

the Arabian Shield, has been affected by few mountain building move-
ments (the multicyclic Hejaz and Najd orogenies). These were
responsible for the emplacement of various granitic, basic and
ultrabasic rocks, as well as the folding, faulting and metamorphism
of the older sedimentary successions. Bloomfield (1970) and Kazmin
(1971) believed that the multicyclic Mozambique Orogeny may have
extended northward into the Arabian shield. However Brown (1971)
was reluctant to apply the African orogenic cycle nomenclature to
the Arabian shield until more detailed correlation is made. Many
radiometric datings appear to be correlatable.

In the Ad-Dawadmi district the conformable Ar-Ridaniyah and

Abt Formations have been folded and metamorphosed to low grade
greenschist facies during the widespread Hejaz orogeny which was
active in the period of 1000 - 660 m.y. B.P.

An ultrabasic suite now comprises chloritite and serpentinite,

which are schistose in the north. These, together with amphibolite,
were emplaced in the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation during the earliest phase
of the Hejaz orogeny.

Layered basic masses were emplaced during the waning stage of

folding and were followed by syn- and late-kinematic granitic
intrusions. The ultrabasic suite is strongly metamorphosed compared
with the layered gabbros. This is probably due to the intrusions of
the layered masses at a later and less intense stage of the Hejaz
orogeny. o

The Najd Orogeny followed the Hejaz Orogeny.- It is characterized

by northwest tectonic trends and probably culminated at the end of -the
Precambrian. The effects of this orogeny on the district are restricted
to the intrusion of the post-kinematic granite and later the
development of northwest strike-slip faults. Probably some of
the retrograde metamorphism observed in the area is related to the
Najd Orogeny. This orogeny is synchronous with the Pan-African
tectonothermal event marking the end of Precambrian in Africa
(Brown, 1971).

Following the Najd orogeny, the shield was a stable shelf

throughout the Palaeozoic. Evidence of this is the occurrence of
the undeformed Saq Sandstone which was deposited unconformably over
the shield during Cambrian-Ordovician period.

8.2 THE METAMORPHIC SUCCESSIONS

The Ad-Dawadmi district contains two metasedimentary Formations,

Ar-Ridaniyah and Abt. These were intruded by Pre-, syn-, late-
and post-kinematic intrusions which range from ultrabasic to acidic.
These metasediments were deposited in a transgressive probably marine
environment with impure sandstones at the base and pelitic/semi-
pelitic units at the top.

8.2.1 The Ar-Ridaniyah Formation is the basal formation. It

consisted originally of 1500 - 2000 m thick impure sandstone horizon
at the base. This is overlain conformably by a 2000 - 3000 m thick
calcareous horizon intercalated with limestone, dolomitic limestone,
pelitic bands and possibly thin tuffaceous layers. The Ar-Ridaniyah
Formation is exposed only in the southeast part of the district.

8.2.2 The Abt Formation is composed essentially of a thick series of

pelitic and semipelitic rocks which conformably overlie the Ar-
Ridaniyah Formation. They were deposited in a relatively deeper
environment than the sediments of Ar-Ridaniyah Formation.

8.2.3 The Ultrabasic Suite at the contact of the impure sandstone

and the overlying calcareous horizon forms roughly concordant intrusive
sheets in the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation.

8.2.4 The Deformation and Metamorphism related to the early Hejaz

orogeny raised, deformed and metamorphosed both the sedimentary
 305.

successions and the intrusive ultrabasic suite. Metamorphism reached

the greenschist grade facies (B1.1-B1.2). The metamorphic minerals
which dominate both Formations are: albite, epidote/clinozoisite,
tremolite/actinolite, biotite-chlorite-muscovite, calcite and quartz.

The ultrabasic suite was metamorphosed to serpentinite and

chloritite which became schistose in the northern outcrops. The
basic rocks became amphibolites.

8.5 LAYERED INTRUSIONS

The layered basic intrusions were intruded during the waning stages
of the Hejaz orogency. This is indicated by the absence of folding and
by incipient amphibolitization.

The Al-Jealani intrusion is an elliptical mass with a steeply inward

dipping margin that exhibits no chilled contacts against the enveloping
granitic rocks. The intrusion is probably an inverted cone shape as
interpreted from the aeromagnetic map and the dips at outcrop in the
outer units. The dips of the fifteen units that comprise this
intrusion at outcrop decrease gradually inwards from 60° to 20° or less.

The Al-Jealani layered mass probably formed from one surge of

basaltic magma along an elliptical structure. The layered rocks
originated through undercooling combined with convection currents in
the magma. Density stratification in rhythmically layered rocks are
attributed to a gravitative process.

The well layered sequences which are commonly separated by essen-

tially non-rhythmically layered plagioclase - olivine cumulates
suggest that the process of rhythmic layering operated intermittently.

8.4 GRANITIC ROCKS

The granitic rocks were emplaced during the late cycles of the
multicyclic Hejaz orogeny, and after the emplacement of the layered
basic masses. The long northwesterly axis of the granitic batholith
is subparallel to the general strike of the fold axes in the enveloping
metamorphic host rocks.
 The batholith is comprised of three genetically separated
components, an earlier foliated, coarse-grained and porphyritic
variety in the west, termed synkinematic, a later equigranular
homogeneous variety in the east termed late-kinematic and a post-
kinematic type which is homogeneous, non-contaminated, pink, locally
porphyritic and shows sharp chilled contacts against the previous
two varieties. Syn- and late-kinematic components constitute about
95/ of the granitic rocks exposed, whereas the post-kinematic type
rocks constitute only 5/ of the total granite and occur in small
stocks and dykes.

The three granitic varieties are derived from one magmatic

source of average calc-alkaline composition from a crustal melt.
The magmatic differentiation followed one path from more calcic
synkinematic to less calcic post-kinematic.

The syn-kinematic variety shows primary flow fabric suggesting

generation of the granite melt below the present level. Their
prevailing gradational contacts and inhomogeneity indicate an
undisturbed region in the upper low liquid portion of the zone of
melting.

The late-kinematic variety represents the more fluid portion of

the zone of melting. It exhibits sharp contacts against earlier
rocks.

The post-kinematic rocks were emplaced last and show chilled

contacts against older granitic varieties.

8.5 SYN-SEDIMENTARY MINERALIZATION

The uper part of the Ar-Ridaniyah Formation contains concentra-

tions of iron and zinc sulphides in the form of lenses parallel to
bedding. At outcrop these are capped by brown gossan that extends
about 20 m downwards with no apparent supergene base metal enrichment.

A ;.syngenetic-diagenetic origin is postulated for these sulphide

lenses. The sulphides may have been deposited either as sedimentary
accumulations or as submarine hydrothernial exhalations or possibly by
both processes.
 The metals are thought to have been derived from a land surface
by erosion and subsequently transported by currents in streams into
an environment of sulphidation. Alternatively the source of metals
could have been distant hydrotherraal subaqueous exhalations. The
sulphide deposits probably formed when the metal ions encountered
H s generated from rotting organic material below the sediment/water
interface, or more likely by the reduction of the sea v/ater sulphate.
The reduction of the sulphate may have been biogenic or inorganic.

According to Rickard (1968), the form of iron that reacts with

sulphide species to form iron sulphides in the natural aqueous
environment is mainly goethite. The diagen^sis and the early stages
of metamorphism were possibly the important factors which induced
remobilization and concentration of the ore sulphides into lenses.

When the temperature exceeded 200°C during regional metamorphism

the non-equilibrium iron sulphides if present should have been
converted into the equilibrium components pyrite and pyrrhotite
(Rickard, 1968). As the pressure and temperature became higher the
pyrite-pyrrhotite transformation possibly would have released large
amounts of sulphur. This possibly leached the remaining zinc, lead,
copper and silver ions adsorbed on the non-sulphide components to
form further ore sulphides.

Supergene oxidation is marked by the peripheral breakdown of

pyrrhotite grains or aggregates to marcasite and secondary pyrite.
This presumably is promoted by either descending or ascending acidic
solutions.

8.6 HYDROTHERMAL VEIN TYPE MINERALIZATION

The Ad-Dawadmi district is an ancient silver mining district.

Ancient workings are widespread along quartz breccia veins. These
veins are structurally controlled within a north-south trending
belt in the central part of the granitic batholith. It seems
possible that this mineralization was disseminated in a north-
south trending pelitic and semi-pelitic horizon before the intrusion
of the granite and was therefore lithologically controlled. This
pre-granite pelitic horizon is now represented only by xenoliths
\tfhich commonly retain their original structures and orientations.
The intrusion of post-kinematic granites was followed by the deve-
lopment of a fracture pattern related to the Najd orogeny.

The residual hydrotherraal magmatic fluids of the post-kinematic

granite probably played the main role in leaching the metals from
the host rocks, mobilized and deposited them along these fractures.
It is possible that the mineralized fluids were partly deep seated
magmatic and partly metaMrorfftiic. Repeated shearing along
mineralized fractures was associated with further deposition of
gangue minerals, with brecciation of brittle minerals and with
mobilization and recrystallization of other less brittle minerals.

Alteration is extensive within the fracture zones as well as in

the walls. For example, feldspars of both granitic and basic rocks
are strongly epidotized and sericitized, pyroxenes amphibolitized or
altered to biotite and/or chlorite. Minute veinlets of quartz,
carbonate minerals and chlorite are common.

A detailed exploration program carried out at Samrah, the main

prospect in the district, proved that the deposit is uneconomic.
The probable reserves are estimated by Kiilsgaard (1968) at 330,000
tons of ore with average 13.0 oz silver, 1% lead and 4.5% zinc.

The ancient miners won 60,000 tons of ore from surface and
underground mining.
 REFERENCES

ABBOTT, D., 1962. The gabbro cumulates of the Kap Edvard Holm
complex, east Greenland. Unpublished PhD Thesis,
University of Manchester.

AL-SHANTI, A.M., 1971. Silver Mineralogy of Samrah Mine. Report

to the Director General of Mineral.Resources. Open-
file rept. D.G.M.R.

AL SHANTI, A.M., 1971. Preliminary progress report - Samrah Mine.

Report to the Director General of Mineral Resources;
Open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

AL SHANTI, A.M., SKIBA, W. and DAVIS, G.R., 1973. The A1 Jealani

layered basic intrusion,- Ad-Dawadmi district, Saudi
Arabia, In press.

ANTUN, P., I967. Sedimentary pyrite and its metamorphism in the Oslo
region. Norsk, geol. Tidsskr. 47, pp. 211-233.

ARGAS, 1966. Geophysical survey at Samrah. Unpublished open-file

report to D.G.M.R.

ARNOLD, R.G., and REICHEN, L.E., 1962. ' Measurement of the metal content
of naturally occurring metal deficient hexagonal pyrrhotite
by an x-ray spacing method. Am. Miner., 47, pp. -105-111.

ARNOLD, R.G., 1967, Range in composition and structure of 82 natural

terrestrial pyrrhotite, Can. Mineralogist, V.9,
pp.. 31-50.

ARNOLD, R.G., 1969. Pyrrhotite phase relations below 304 - 6°C at 1

atm*total pressure: Econ. Geol., V. 64, pp. 405-419.

BARROW, G., 1912. On the geology of lower Dee-side and the southern
highland border: Geol. Assoc. Proc., V.23, 268.

BLANCHOT, A., 1970. Recommendations for a medium - range mineral

exploration program for Saudi Arabia. B.R.G.M.
unnumbered report to D.G.M.R.
2 310.

BLOOMFIELD, K., 1970. Qrogenic and post-orogenic plutonism in Malawi,

in African magmatism and tectonics, New York, Hafner
Pub. Co., p. 119-155.

BOGUE, R.G., 1954. Reconnaissance of mineral deposits in a part of

Western Saudi Arabia. U.S. Geol. Survey, Saudi Arabian
Project, Open-file rept. to D.G.M.R.

BOORMAN, R.S., 1967. Subsolidus studies in the ZnS - FeS - FeS 2 System.
Econ. Geol., V. pp. 614-628.

BOIS, J. and SHANTI, M., 1971. ^ mineral resources and geology

of the western part of the Ad-Bawadmi quadrangle,
photomosaic 101 W. B.R.G.M. Open file report.
71 Jed. 1 to D.G.M.R.

BOULADON, J., 1966. Note on the results of mineral prospecting in areas

II and III. Open-file rept. 66-A2, B.R.G.M. 66-A2 to
D.G.M.R.

BRAMKAMP, R.A., RAMIREZ, L.F., BROWN, G.F., and POCOCK, A.E., 19&3.
Geologic map of the Wadi Ar-Rimah Quadrangle, Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia; U.S. Geol. Survey, Misc. Geol. Inv.,
Map I-206A.

BROWN, G.F., 1971. Tectonic map of the Arabian Peninsula: U.S. Geol. Survey
Saudi Arabian Project rept. 134*

BROWN, G.F., and COLEMAN, R.G., 1972. The tectonic framework.of the
Arabian Peninsula, 24th Int. Geol. Cong. Sec. 3, pp. 3OO-3O5.

B R O W , G.M., 1956. The layered ultrabasic rocks of Rhum, Inner Hebrides,

Phil. Trans. R. Soc. London, 240, 1-53*

BROWN, G.M., 1957. Pyroxenes from the eariy and middle stages of
fractionation of the Skaergaard Intrusion, East Greenland.
Mineralog. Mag., 31, 511-543*

BUTLER, J.R., and SKIBA, W., 1962. Strontium in plagioclase feldspars

from four layered basic masses in Somalia: Mineralog.
Mag., 33, 213-225.
 BUTLER, J.R., and SKIBA, W., 1966. The use of An and'Sr data on plagioclase
in study of basic xenoliths in a gabbroic mass at Hamar,
Somalia, Mineralog. Mag. 35, pp.720-730.

CHAO, E.C.T., and FLEISCHER, M., 1960. Abundance of Zirconium in

igneous rocks: 21st Int. Geol. Congr. Rep., Pt. 1,
106-131.

CH3NNERY, M.A., 1966. Secondary faulting, I - Theoretical Aspects.

Can. J. Earth Science, 3, 163-174.

CHINNERY, M.A., 1966. Secondary faulting II - Geological Aspects.

Can. J. Earth Science, 3, 175-190.

CORNING MUSEUM OF GLASS, 1965. Analysis of slag and glass samples

from Samrah ancient mine. Unpublished report to D.G.M.R.

CORNWALL, H.R., and ROSE, H.J., 1957. Minor elements in Keweenawan

lavas, Michigan: Geochem. Cosmochem. Acta, 12,
209-224.

CORPEL, J.A., LETALENET, J., MAILLARD, J. and PLAT, R. 1971.

Mineral exploration for nickel and copper at Jabai
Humayyan. B.R.G.M. Open file report, 71 Jed. 16
to D.G.M.R. 32 p.
DELFOUR, 4*1 1971. Geological mapping and mineral exploration program
for Saudi Arabia, B.R.G.M. un-numbered rept.

DESBOROUGH, G.A., and CARPENTER, R.H., 1965. Phase relations of

pyrrhotite. Econ. Geol., V.60, pp.l431~l450.

EDWARDS, A.B., 1954. Textures of the Ore Minerals and their

significance, the Australasian Inst, of Mining and
Metallurgy, pp. 242.

EIJKELBOOH, G., 1966. The mineral resources and geology of the Jabal •
.Dhuhaylan - Jabal al Urd region (sheet 101, zone II):
B.R.G.M. open-file rept. 66-A-I3 to D.G.M.R.

EIJKELBOOH, G., 1966. The mineral resources and geology of the Arjah-
Ad-Dawadmi region (sheet 98, Zone II): B.R.G.M. open-
file rept., 66-A-10, to D.G.M.R.
 312.

ESKOLA, P., 1959. Die entstehung der gesteine: Springer, Berlin.

FLEISCHER, M., and STEVENS, R.E., 1962. Summary of new data on rock
samples G-l and W-l: Geochem. cosmochem. Acta, 26,
525-543.

FRONDEL, C., 1963. .Isodimorphism of the polybasite and pearceite

series. Am. Miner., 48, 565-572.

GOLDSCHMIDT, V.M., 1954. Geochemistry: Oxford press, London. 730 p.

GREENWOOD, W.R., and BROWN, G.F., 1972. Petrology and chemical analyses
of selected plutonic rocks from the Arabian Shield;'
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. U.S. Geol. Survey Technical
Letter 147, open-file rept., D.G.M.R.

HALL, A.L.j 1932. The Bushveld igneous complex of the Central Transvaal,
Union of South Africa, MOB.geol. surv. S. Afr., 28, 560 p.

HALL, H.T., 1967. The Pearceite and polybasite series, Am. Miner.
V.52, 1311-1321.

HARRIS, D.C., NUFFIELD, E.W., and FROHBERG, M.H., 1965. Studies of

mineral sulphosalts: XIX - Selenian polybasite. Can.
Mineralogists, 8, 172-184.

HEIER, K.S., 1962. Trace elements in feldspars - a review: Norsk Geol.

Tidsskr., 42, Pt.2, 413-454.

HEIER, K.S., and TAYLOR, S.R., 1959. Distribution of Ca, Sr and Ba

in Southern Norwegian IPredambrian feldspars. Geochim.
cosmochim. Acta, 17, 286-304.

HESS, H.H., 1960. Stillwater igneous complex. Mem. geol. soc. Amer.,
80, 225 p.
 313..

HOLZEM, J.M., 1969. A program for underground exploration for Samrah,

A1 Amar and Jabal Sayid. B.R.G.M. open-file rept. 69-7,
to D.G.M.R.

JACKAMAN, B., 1971. Genetic and environmental factors controlling the

formation of the massive sulphide deposits of Wadi Bidah
and Wadi Wassat, Saudi Arabia. Ph.D. thesis, Imperial
College, LONDON.

JACKSON, E.D., 1970. The cyclic unit in layered intrusions - a

comparison of repetitive stratigraphy in the ultramafic
parts of Still Water, Muskox, Great dyke and Bushveld
complexes. Geol. Soc. S. Afr. Special publication 1,
391-424.

JEAGER, F.M., and VAN KLOOSTER, H.S., 1912. Studen Uber naturliche und
Kuns'tliche Sulfoantimonite und Sulphoarsenite. Z. anorg,
chem., 78, 245-268.

JOHANNSEN, A., 1931. A descriptive petrography of igneous rocks,

Chicago Univ. Press, V.l, pp.140-158.

KAZMIN, V., 1971. Pre-cambrian of Ethopia. Nature Phy. Sci., V.230,

p. 176-177.

KI3LSGAARD, T.H., 1968. Evaluation of a diamond drilling program of

the Samrah mine, near Ad-Dawadmi, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
U.S. Geol. Survey Technical Letter 106, open-file rept.
D.G.M.R.

KUNQ, H., 1968. Differentiation of basalt magmas in Basalts: the

Poldervaart Treatise on Rocks of Basaltic Composition
(eds. Hess, H.H., and Poldervaart, A.), V.2, pp. 623-688,
John Wiley, New York.
LACOMBE, P., LAMBOLEZ, B., LALOUX, P., and DE SOLERE, B., 1969-
Ardaniyah area, Input anomalies A and G, geological and
geophysical ground surveys, comments on Argas reports,
drilling recommendations: B.R.G.M. open-file rept. 69-3
to D.G.M.R.

LAMBOLEZ, B., 1968. Airborne magnetic and scintollometric sheet 101,

scale 1 : 100,000, interpretation: B.R.G.M. open-file
rept., 68-46 to D.G.M.R.

LECA, X., and PLAT, R., 1971. Geological sketch map, Jabal Humayyan,
scale 1 : 20,000, attached to B.R.G.M. report 71 JED.16.

% nirrm P 1969. Drill hole results at

LBTALENET, J., and QTJOTT,
.Ardaniyah. B.R.G.M. open file report, 69 Jed. 42, 16P.

MARMO, V., 1971. Granite petrology and the granite problem/. Elsevier,.
Amsterdam, 244 pp.

MCDONALD, J.A., 196?. Metamorphism and its effects on sulphide

assemblages. Mineral Deposita (Berl.) V.2, N0.3
pp. 200-220.

McDOUGALL, I., and LOVERING, J.P., 1963- Fractionation of chromium,

nickel, cobalt and copper in a differentiated dolerite-
granophyre sequence at Red -Hill, Tasmania: J. Geol.
Soc. Austr. J. 10, 325-338.

McKINSTRY, H.E., 1953- Shears of second order. Am J. Sci. V.251,

401-414.

MEATON, E.P., 1971. Dawadmi Silver District, Diamond drilling program.

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Directorate General of Mineral
Resources, Jeddah, open-file rept., D.G.M.R.

, J.D., and HILL, M.J., 1956. Wrench Fault Tectonics, Bull. Geol.
Soc. Am., 67, 1207-1246.
 316.

MOORE, J. ,McM., and AL SHANTI, A.M., 1973. The use of stress trajectory
analysis in the elucidation of part of the Najd Fault
System, Saudi Arabia. In press.

MORRISSEY, C., 1971. Notes on the mineralogy of ten drill core samples
from Samrah, Saudi Arabia. Open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

MYTTON, J.W., 1965. Geological and geochemical reconnaissance of the

Ad-Dawadmi quadrangle, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: U.S.
Geol. Survey Tech. Letter -28. Open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

NOCKOLDS, S.R., and MITCHELL, R.L., 1948. The geochemistry of some

Caledonian plutonic rocks. Trans. R. Soc. Edin., 6l,
333-373.

PALACHE, C., BERMAN, H., and FRONDEL, C., 1946. The system of Mineralogy
of James Dwight Dana and Edward Salisbury Dana, Seventh
Edition, V.l. Chapman and Hall, Ltd., London, pp. 834.

PEACOCK, M.A., 1931. Classification of igneous rocks, J. of ' Geology

Vol. 39, PP. 54-67.

PEACOCK, M.A., and BERRY, L.G., 1947. Study of Mineral Sulphosalts:

XII polybasite and pearceite. Mineralog. Mag. V.28,
2-13.

PITCHER, W.S., 1953. The migmatitic older granodiorite of Thorr district,

Co. Donegal. Q.J. geol. soc. Lon. V.108, pp. 413-446*

PRICE, N.J., 1966. Fault and Joint Development in Brittle and Semi-
Brittle rocks. Pergammon Press, New York.

PRICE, N.J., 1973. Personal communiation.

PRINZE, M., 1967. Geochemistry of Basaltic rocks: Trace Elements. The

Poldervaart treatise on rocks of Basaltic composition, V.l,
271-323.
 316.

QUIN, H.A., 1964a. Geology, Silver Mines and Lithium minerals of

Ad-Dawadmi Area: Progress Report No.2, open-file
rept. D.G.M.R.

QUIN, H.A., 1964b. Geology, Silver Mines and Pegmatites of Ad-Dawadmi

and Halaban areas: Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, open-file
rept. D.G.M.R.

QUIN, H.A., 1964c. Ad-Dawadmi Basin, a basic intrusion of possible

major economic importance: Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

RAMDOHR, P., 1969. The Ore Minerals and their intergrowths,

Pergammon Press, 1174 p.

RICKARD, D.T., 1968. The geological and microbiological formation of

iron sulphides. PhD thesis. Imperial College, LONDON.

RICKARD, D.T., 19o9a. The chemistry of iron sulphide formation at low

temperatures: Acta Univ. Stockh. ¥.20:4, pp. 67-95-

SCHULTZ, R.W., 1972. Economic feasibility study of the Samrah silver-

zinc-lead deposit; Ad-Dawadmi District; Saudi Arabia.
Open-file rept., D.G.M.R.

SCHWARTZ, G.M., and RONBECK, A.C., 1940. Magnetite in sulphide ores.

Econ. Geol., v. 35> PP* 585-610.

SCOTT S.D., and BARNES, H.L., 1971. Sphalerite Geotherraometry and

Geobarometry.- Econ. Geol., V.66, pp. 653-669.

SKIBA, W. and BUTLER, J.R., 1963. The use of Sr-An relationships in

plagioclase to distinguish between Somalian Metagabbros
and country-rock amphibolites, J. Petrol., 4, 352-366.

SKIBA, W. and AL SHANTI, A.M., 1971. Geological map of the

Ad-Dawadmi district based on reconnaissance,

scale 1:100,000. Unpublished to D.G.M.R.

SPRINGER, G., 1968. Electron probe analyses of Stannite and related

tin minerals. Mineralog. Mag., V.36, pp.1045-1051. .
 317.

SPRY, A., 1969. Metamorphic textures. Pergammon Press, 350 p.

STANTON, R . L . 1972. Ore Petrology, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 713 P-

STEPHENS, M.M., 1931. Effect of light on polished surfaces of silver

minerals. Am. Miner. 16, pp. 532-549.

STEWARD, F.H., and WAGER, L.R., 194?. Gravity stratification in the

Cuillin gabbro of Skye. Geol. Mag., 84, 374.

STORM, T.W., and HOLLAND, H.D., 1957. The distribution of nickel in

the Lambertville diabase : Geochim cosmochim. Acta, 11,
335-347.

STRECKEISEN, A.L., 1967. Classification and nomenclature of igneous.

rocks, Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Abb., V.107, No.2, pp. 144-214. ;
Also No.3, pp. 215-240.

TAYLOR, L.A., 1970. Low temperature phase relations in the Fe-S system,
Carnegie Institn., Annual Rep., Dir. Geoph. Lab., pp.259-270.

TAYLOR, L.A., and KULLERUD, G., 1971. Mineral assemblages in the Cu-
Fe-S-0 system, Carnegie Institn., Annual Rep. Dir. Geoph.
Lab., pp. 315-318.

THEOBALD, P.K., Jr., 1966a. Geology of Samrah and vicinity, Kingdom of

Saudi Arabia: U.S. Geol. Survey Technical Letter 42.
Open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

THEOBALD, P.K., and THOMPSON, C.E., 1971. Geochemical maps of Samrah

and vicinity, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. U.S. Geol. Survey
Technical Letter 131, open-file rept. D.G.M.R.

THEOBALD, P.K., Jr., THOMPSON, C.E., and HORN, H.D., 1966b. Geologic log
and chemical data, Diamond drill hole 1, Samrah, Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia: U.S. Geol. Survey Technical Letter 86,
open-file rept. D.G.M.R.
 318.

TOULMIN, P., 1963. Proustite-pyrargyrite solid solutions, Am. Miner.

V.48, pp. 725-736.

TURIKIAN, K.K., 1963. The chromium and nickel distribution in basaltic

rocks and eclogites: Geochim. cosmochim. Acta, 27>
835-846.

TURIKIAN, K.K., and KULP, J.L., 1956. The geochemistry of strontium:

Geochim. cosmochim, Acta, 10, .245-296.

TURIKIAN, K.K., and WEDEPOHL, K.H., 1961. Distribution of the elements

in some major units of the earths crust: Bull. Geol.
Soc. Am., V.72, 175-192.

TURNER, F.J., and VERHOOGEN, J., 19o0. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology:
McGraw-Hill, New York, 694 p.

TUTTLE, O.F., and BOWEN, N.L., 1958. Origin of granite in the light of
experimental studies in the system NaAlSi^Og - KAlSi^Og -
Si02 - H^O. Geol. Soc. Am. Mem., 74, pp. 1-153*

TWITCHELL, K.S., 1932. Samrah ancient mine, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,

Ministry of Finance, open-file rept., D.G.M.R.

VOGT, J.H.L., 1923. Nickel in igneous rocks: Econ. Geol. V.l8,

PP* 307-353*

WAGER, L.R., 1953. Layered intrusions (notes on three lectures given:

to the Danish Geological Society in Nov. 1952.

WAGER, Yi.R., and BROWN, G.M., 1968. Layered igneous rocks. Oliver and
Boyd, Edinburgh, 588 p.

WAGER, L.R., and BROWN, G.M., and WADSWORTH, W.J., 1960. Types of
igneous cumulates. J. Petr., V.l, pp.73 - 85.
 319.

WAGER, L.R., and DEER, W.A., 1939. Geological investigations in East

Greenland Pt. III. The petrology of the Skaergaard
intrusion, Kangerdlugssuaq, East Greenland. Medd. On.
Gronland, 105, No.4, 1-352.

' WAGER, L.R., and MITCHELL, R.L., 1951. The distribution of trace
elements during strong fractionation of basic magma -
a further study of the Skaergaard intrusion, East
Greenland:* Geochim. cosmochim. Acta, 1, 129-208.

WARREN SPRING LABORARORY, 1972. The recovery of silver minerals

from a Saudi Arabian ore. Unpublished report to D.G.M.R.

WELLS, M.K., 1962. Structure and petrology of the Freetown layered

basic complex of Sierra Leone,.Bull. Geol. Surv. Dept.,
Sierra Leone, 9j 115 P«

WINKLER, H.G.F., 19&5. • Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks: Springer-

Verlag, Berlin.

WINKLER, H.G.F., 1967. Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks. Springer-

Verlag New York Inc. 2nd ed. pp.237.

W00DA1L, R. and TRAVIS, G.A., 1970. The Kambalda nickel deposits,

Western Australia. Proceedings of the Ninth Commonwealth
Mining and Metallurgical Congress, 1969? vol. 2, p.517-553•

YODER, H.S., Jr., and TILLEY, C . E . 1 9 6 2 . Origin of basalt magmas:

an experimental study of natural and synthetic rock
systems. Jour. Petrology, vol. 3> PP* 342-532.
 APPENDIX 1

Semiquantitative Spectrographs Analysis of

Heavy Concentrates in Al-Jealani leered Complex
(B & Li were analyzed but not detected)
,('Cr analysed by X-ray Fluorescence)

Sample Ba Co Mn Cu Cr Ni Ti Sr V Pb Zn Fe Zr Ca Na
No wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.% wt.%

SA-2 .02 .006 .25 .002 .07 .015 1.0 .02 .08 .005 .05 10. .005 .3 .05
SA-6 .02 .003 .15 .002 .05 • .006 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 10. .015 .3 .05
SA-9 .02 .004 .2 .002 .04 .008 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 10. .01 .6 .05
SA-14 .02 .003 .15 .002 .04 .006 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 10. .015 .2 .05
SA-20 .02 .003 .2 .002 .016 .005 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 10. .005 .6 .05
SA-24 .02 .004 .2 .002 .04 .005 1.0 .02 .05 .005 .05 10. .015 .6 .05
SA-2 7 .02 .004 .2 .002 .04 .006 1.0 .02 .06 .005 • 05 10. .005 .6 .05
SA-30 .02 .006 .15 .003 .02 .006 1.0 .02 .08 .005 .05 10. .008 .1 .05
SA-38 .02 .008 .12 .002 .03 .01 1.0 .02 .08 .005 .05 10. .04 .1 .1
SA-44 .02 .006 .12 .002 .04 .01 1.0 .02 .035 .005 .05 10. .02 1.5 .1
SA-46 .02 .006 .12 .003 .06 .01 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 10. .025 .1 .05
SA-49 .02 .008 .15 .004 .14 .012 1.0 .02 .07 .005 .05 10. .03 .3 .05
SA-31 .02 .008 .15 .003 .05 .015 1.0 .02 .07 .005 • 05 10. .02 1. .05
SA-53 .02 .006 .12 .004 .06 .01 1.0 .02 .08 .005 .05 10. .05 .2 .05
SA-55 .02 .008 .15 .003 .04 .01 1.0 .02 .08 .005 .05 10. .05 1.5 .1
SA-57 .02 .007 .5 .003 .07 .015 1.0 .02 .06 .005 .05 8. .02 .5 .05

SA-60 .02 .007 .4 .003 .06 .01 •1.0 .02 .05 .005 .05 8. .02 .5 .05
SA-62 .02 .006 .4 .003 .06 .008 1.0 .02 .05 .005 .05 8. .02 .3 .05
 321.

APPENDIX 2

Field and Laboratory Methods

(Al-Jealani basic intrusion)

1. Two detailed chain and brunton compass traverses were carried

out.

(a) A-Af traverse, N 42°V/, started 200 metres away from the
northern margin of the intrusion to the centre.

(b) B-Bf traverse, N 48°E, ran across the intrusion from

west to east.

These traverses were chosen to ensure best exposures of various

units. However, many contacts between units were either inferred or
checked in localities away from the traverse line.

2. 213 rock samples and 70 heavy concentrates were collected, the

latter from the small tributaries draining particular rock
units.

3. 160 thin sections were prepared from the rocks of the basic
intrusion, the younger dyke rocks, the enveloping granitic
rocks, the xenolithic outcrops in the vicinity of Samrah mine,
and from drillhole 1 of the mine.

4. Plagioclase was separated, using Frantz isodynamic magnetic

separator, from 40 rock samples of the basic intrusion.

5. An content of plagioclase was determined optically on cleavage

fragments by the Tsuboi method. Ca was determined on the same
material chemically. Sr was determined using X-ray Quantometer.

6. 5 whole rock analyses were made on rocks of the layered intrusion.

7. 60 rock samples were determined semiquantitatively by spectro-

graph^ analyses for trace elements, and other elements that
are related to this study, Cr was checked by X.R.F.
 322.

8. 18 heavy concentrates were investigated semiquantitatively by

spectrographic analyses for trace and other elements that
relate to the study. Fe, Ti and Cr were checked by X.R.F.

9. 15 polished sections were prepared from the heavy concentrates.

10. 10 polished sections were prepared from the rocks of the basic
intrusion which showed relatively high concentration of opaques.

11. The field data v/ere plotted on 1 : 10,000 scale photo enlarge-
ment for the intrusion and the vicinity.

12. A final map (plate 3) 1 : 10,000 scale is made on the basis of

(a) field work, (b) laboratory work, and (c) photogeologic
interpretation.
 APPENDIX 3

Procedure

The mineral identification was carried out by using the combined

technique of ore microscopy, electron microprobe analyses and X-ray
pov/der diffraction.

The physical features and optical properties of the minerals were

examined in reflected light using a Reichert Zetopan ore microscope.

A Cambridge Microscan Mk.l was employed to analyse carbon-

coated polished mineral surfaces. A constant accelerating voltage
of 25 kv was used throughout. Average counts per ten seconds from
the sample were compared with the count rate from standards which
were pure metals or analysed samples. The detection limit is 1.0%
+ /
or better, and the precision of analyses is within - 9% of the
relative value.
Quantitative data were corrected for errors due to instrumental
effects: absorption, over voltage, atomic number and fluorescence,
using a semi-empirical method (T.K. Kelly and G.M. Steed pers. comm.).

Small amounts of silver sulphosalt polybasite were excavated

from polished sections using a fine steel needle and incorporated in
a small ball of rubber solution. The ball was mounted on a drawn
glass fibre and inserted in a Philips 11.46 cm (dia.) Debey-Scherrer
powder camera. Either Fe filtered Go ( A = 1.7889 2) or Ni
filtered Co K ( ^ = 1.3405 2) radiation was used. Interplanar
spacings were determined with the line spacings being read- on a
scale, and the relative intensity of the lines was visually estimated.
X-ray diffraction anlges were tabulated and the d values obtained
from tables.